Operation Manual
Cristina Bachmann, Heiko Bischoff, Lillie Harris, Christina Kaboth, Insa Mingers, Matthias Obrecht, Sabine Pfeifer, Benjamin Schütte, Marita Sladek This PDF provides improved access for vision-impaired users. Please note that due to the complexity and number of images in this document, it is not possible to include text descriptions of images. The information in this document is subject to change without notice and does not represent a commitment on the part of Steinberg Media Technologies GmbH.
Table of Contents 8 New Features 11 11 11 12 13 Introduction Platform-Independent Documentation PDF Documents and Online Documentation Conventions Key Commands 14 14 15 22 24 Setting up Your System Studio Setup Dialog Setting up Audio Setting up MIDI Synchronizers 26 26 32 33 33 34 35 35 35 41 Audio Connections Audio Connections Window Renaming the Hardware Inputs and Outputs Adding Input and Output Busses Adding Child Busses Presets for Input and Output Busses Adding Group and FX Channels Monitorin
Table of Contents 225 Editing Selection Ranges 228 228 233 238 244 244 245 248 248 249 250 251 251 260 Playback and Transport Transport Panel Transport Menu Transport Bar Transport Pop-Up Window Time Display Window Left and Right Locators Setting the Project Cursor Auto-Scroll Settings Menu Time Formats Pre-Roll and Post-Roll Punch In and Punch Out Metronome Click Chase 262 262 263 On-Screen Keyboard Recording MIDI With the On-Screen Keyboard On-Screen Keyboard Options 264 264 269 271 276 284 284 Re
Table of Contents 528 528 531 532 534 534 535 535 535 536 Hitpoints Calculating Hitpoints Locating to Hitpoints in the Project Window Slices Creating a Groove Quantize Map Creating Markers Creating Regions Creating Events Creating Warp Markers Creating MIDI Notes 538 538 539 539 541 542 543 545 546 546 Tempo Matching Audio Algorithm Presets Stretching Audio Events to the Project Tempo Musical Mode Auto Adjust Manual Adjust Free Warp Flattening Realtime Processing Flatten Realtime Processing Dialog Unstr
Table of Contents 764 764 766 771 774 MIDI Realtime Parameters and MIDI Effects MIDI Track Parameters MIDI Modifiers MIDI Effects Transpose and Velocity on the Info Line 775 775 Using MIDI Devices Program Change Messages and Bank Select Messages Patch Banks MIDI Device Manager Device Panels 776 776 781 784 784 785 787 788 789 789 789 790 790 791 791 792 792 792 792 793 793 794 794 794 MIDI Functions Transpose Setup Dialog Merging MIDI Events into a New Part Dissolve Part Dialog Bouncing MIDI Parts Rep
Table of Contents 1017 Render Selection Dialog 1020 1020 1026 1027 1027 Export Audio Mixdown Export Audio Mixdown Dialog Mixing Down to Audio Files Available Channels for Export File Formats 1035 1035 1036 1038 1039 1044 1044 1045 Synchronization Master and Slave Timecode Formats Clock Sources Project Synchronization Setup Dialog MMC Master Panel External Synchronization Setting up Synchronization for a Personal Music Studio 1047 1047 1051 1054 VST System Link Setting up VST System Link Activating V
New Features Cubase comes with many new features. The following list informs you about the most important improvements and provides links to the corresponding descriptions. New Features in Version 10.5.20 Improved Range and Event Editing ● Cubase now includes the following range and event editing functions: Range to Next Event/Range to Previous Event, Enlarge Range to Next Event/Enlarge Range to Previous Event, Cut Head/Cut Tail, and Set Spacer between Selected Events.
New Features effects section to add the finishing touches. Get inspired by the 100 new presets or start creating your own unique sounds right away. See Padshop 2. MultiTap Delay ● Providing the rhythm for your echo, the new MultiTap Delay gives musicians all the inspirational creative options that they need. Up to eight taps per delay loop can conveniently be created and edited.
New Features mouse wheel can now be used to quickly and easily transpose selected notes. See Score Layout and Printing. LUFS Normalization ● As an alternative to normalizing by maximum peak level, you can now use the integrated loudness value as reference, according to EBU recommendation R 128. See Normalize. Easier Macro Creation ● The Macros section now comes with new functionality.
Introduction This is the Operation Manual for Steinberg’s Cubase. Here you will find detailed information about all the features and functions in the program. Platform-Independent Documentation The documentation applies to the operating systems Windows and macOS. Features and settings that are specific to one of these platforms are clearly indicated. In all other cases, the descriptions and procedures in the documentation are valid for Windows and macOS.
Introduction Conventions Groove Agent SE Describes the features and parameters of the included VST instrument Groove Agent SE. Retrologue Describes the features and parameters of the included VST instrument Retrologue. MIDI Devices Describes how to manage MIDI devices and device panels. Conventions In our documentation, we use typographical and markup elements to structure information. Typographical Elements The following typographical elements mark the following purposes.
Introduction Key Commands EXAMPLE Select Project > Add Track. Key Commands Many of the default key commands, also known as keyboard shortcuts, use modifier keys, some of which are different depending on the operating system. When key commands with modifier keys are described in this manual, they are indicated with the Windows modifier key first, followed by the macOS modifier key and the key. EXAMPLE Ctrl/Cmd-Z means: press Ctrl on Windows or Cmd on macOS, then press Z. 13 Cubase Pro 10.5.
Setting up Your System To use Cubase, you must set up your audio, and if required, your MIDI system. Studio Setup Dialog The Studio Setup dialog allows you to set up your connected audio, MIDI, and remote control devices. ● To open the Studio Setup dialog, select Studio > Studio Setup. The following options are available: Add Device Allows you to manually add devices such as a Note Expression Input Device, an additional Time Display device, or specific remote control devices.
Setting up Your System Setting up Audio Reset Resets the selected remote device. Apply Applies the settings. Setting up Audio You must set up your audio equipment before you can use it in Cubase. IMPORTANT Make sure that all equipment is turned off before making any connections.
Setting up Your System Setting up Audio or noisy recordings. For example, different inputs can be used, such as consumer line level (-10 dBV) or professional line level (+4 dBu). Sometimes, you can adjust input characteristics on the audio interface or on its control panel. For details, refer to the documentation that came with the audio hardware.
Setting up Your System Setting up Audio ● On Windows, click Control Panel. ● On macOS, click Open Config App. This button is available only for some hardware products. If it is not available in your setup, refer to the documentation of your audio hardware. NOTE The control panel is provided by the manufacturer of your audio hardware and is different for each audio interface brand and model. However, control panels for the Generic Low Latency ASIO Driver (Windows only) are provided by Steinberg. 4.
Setting up Your System Setting up Audio ASIO-Guard Latency Shows the ASIO-Guard latency. HW Sample Rate Shows the sample rate of your audio hardware. HW Pull Up/Down Shows the pull up/down status of the audio hardware. Set to Defaults Allows you to restore the default settings. Processing Precision Allows you to set the audio processing precision to 32 bit float or 64 bit float. Depending on this setting, all channels are processed and mixed in 32-bit floatingpoint or 64-bit floating-point format.
Setting up Your System Setting up Audio Record Shift Allows you to shift the recordings by the specified value. RELATED LINKS VST Plug-in Manager Window on page 737 ASIO Driver Setup Page This page allows you to set up your ASIO driver. ● To open the page where you can set up the ASIO driver, select Studio > Studio Setup and select the audio driver in the Devices list. The following options are available: Control Panel Opens the control panel for the audio hardware.
Setting up Your System Setting up Audio Ports Reset Allows you to reset all port names and visibilities. I/O The port input/output status. Port System Name The system name of the port. Show As Allows you to rename the port. This name is used in the Input Routing and Output Routing pop-up menus. Visible Allows you to activate/deactivate audio ports. State The state of the audio port.
Setting up Your System Setting up Audio RESULT The application that has the focus gets access to the audio hardware. Audio Hardware Configuration Most audio cards provide one or more small applications that allow you to customize your hardware. The settings are normally gathered on a control panel that can be opened from within Cubase or separately, when Cubase is not running. For details, refer to the audio hardware documentation. Settings include: ● Selecting which inputs/outputs are active.
Setting up Your System Setting up MIDI RELATED LINKS Audio Connections on page 26 Monitoring In Cubase, monitoring means listening to the input signal while recording. The following ways of monitoring are available: ● Externally by listening to the signal before it reaches Cubase. ● Via Cubase. ● By using ASIO Direct Monitoring. This is a combination of the other methods.
Setting up Your System Setting up MIDI 3. To hide a MIDI port, deactivate its Visible column. 4. Click OK. Setting up All MIDI Inputs When you record MIDI, you can specify which MIDI input each recording MIDI track should use. However, you can also record any MIDI data from any MIDI input. You can specify which inputs are included when you select All MIDI Inputs for a MIDI track. PROCEDURE 1. Select Studio > Studio Setup. 2. In the Devices list, select MIDI Port Setup. 3.
Setting up Your System Synchronizers The following columns are displayed: Device The connected MIDI devices. I/O The port input/output status. Port System Name The system name of the port. Show As Allows you to rename the port. This name is used in the Input Routing and Output Routing pop-up menus. Visible Allows you to activate/deactivate MIDI ports. State The state of the MIDI port. In 'All MIDI Inputs' Allows you to record MIDI data from all MIDI inputs.
Setting up Your System Synchronizers RELATED LINKS Synchronization on page 1035 25 Cubase Pro 10.5.
Audio Connections To play back and record in Cubase, you must set up input and output busses in the Audio Connections window. Here, you can also set up group and FX channels, external effects, external instruments, and the Control Room. The bus types that you need depend on your audio hardware, on your general audio setup, for example your surround speaker setup, and on the projects that you use.
Audio Connections Audio Connections Window Audio Device Shows the selected ASIO driver. Device Port Shows which physical inputs/outputs on your audio hardware are used by the bus. Expand the bus entry to show all speaker channels. If the bus entry is collapsed, only the first port that is used by this bus is visible. The Device Port pop-up menu displays how many busses are connected to a given port. The busses are shown in square brackets next to the port name.
Audio Connections Audio Connections Window The following options are available above the bus list: Add External FX Opens the Add External FX dialog, where you can configure a new external FX. Favorites Lets you store external effect configurations as favorites that you can recall. Expand All/Collapse Expands/Collapses all busses in the bus list. The following columns are available for the bus list: Bus Name Lists the busses. Click the name of a bus to select or rename it.
Audio Connections Audio Connections Window NOTE Excessive output levels from an external effect device can cause clipping in the audio hardware. You cannot use the Return Gain setting to compensate for this. You must lower the output level on the effect device instead. MIDI Device When you click in this column, a pop-up menu opens where you can disconnect the effect from the associated MIDI device, select a MIDI device, create a new device, or open the MIDI Device Manager to edit the MIDI device.
Audio Connections Audio Connections Window Up to 3 bus assignments can be displayed in this way. If more connections have been made, this is indicated by a number at the end of the port name. For example, “Adat 1 [Stereo1] [Stereo2] [Stereo3] (+2)” means that the Adat1 port is already assigned to 3 stereo busses plus 2 additional busses. Delay Allows you to enter a value to compensate for an inherent delay (latency) of your hardware effect device during playback.
Audio Connections Audio Connections Window Add Channel Opens a menu where you can select the type of channel that you want to add. You can add the following channels: ● External Input ● Talkback ● Cue ● Headphone ● Monitor Presets Opens the Presets menu, where you can select bus configuration presets. Store allows you to save a bus configuration as preset. Delete deletes the selected preset. NOTE You can save the insert slots for Cue, Monitor and Control Room channels are saved in the presets.
Audio Connections Renaming the Hardware Inputs and Outputs Renaming the Hardware Inputs and Outputs Before you set up busses, you should rename the default inputs and outputs of your audio hardware. This allows transferring projects between different computers and setups. For example, if you move your project to another studio, the audio hardware may be of a different model.
Audio Connections Adding Input and Output Busses 2. In the Devices list, select your audio hardware driver. 3. Click Control Panel. 4. Activate/Deactivate ports. 5. Click OK. Adding Input and Output Busses You must add input and output busses to establish the connection between your audio hardware and Cubase. PROCEDURE 1. In the Audio Connections dialog, click the Inputs or Outputs tab. 2. Click Add Bus. 3. In the Add Input Bus dialog, configure the bus. 4. Optional: Enter a name for the bus.
Audio Connections Presets for Input and Output Busses PROCEDURE 1. On the Inputs tab, Outputs tab, or Group/FX tab, right-click a surround bus. 2. Click Add Child Bus and select a channel configuration. RESULT The child bus is created and can be used for routing. Presets for Input and Output Busses For input and output bus configurations, you can use different kinds of presets. ● A number of standard bus configurations.
Audio Connections Adding Group and FX Channels RESULT The preset is deleted. Adding Group and FX Channels Group channels and FX channels allow you to group bus configurations. Adding group and FX channels in the Audio Connections window is identical to creating group channel tracks or FX channel tracks in the Project window. PROCEDURE 1. In the Audio Connections dialog, click the Group/FX tab. 2. Do one of the following: ● To create a group channel, click Add Group.
Audio Connections External Instruments and Effects ● Audio hardware with low-latency drivers. Cubase compensates for the input/output latency and ensures that the audio that is processed through external effects is not shifted in time. Connecting an External Instrument/Effect You can connect external instruments/effects to the audio hardware of your computer. PREREQUISITE The hardware device has stereo inputs and outputs. PROCEDURE 1.
Audio Connections External Instruments and Effects You can also select MIDI Devices > Create Device and create a new MIDI device association. NOTE Delay compensation is only applied for the effect when you use MIDI devices. 5. Click OK. This adds a new external FX bus. 6. Click in the Device Port column for the left and right ports of the send bus and select the outputs of your audio hardware that you want to use. 7.
Audio Connections External Instruments and Effects The audio signal from the channel is sent to the outputs on the audio hardware, through your external effect device, and back to the program via the inputs on the audio hardware. RELATED LINKS Setting up External Effects on page 36 External Effect Parameter Window This window allows you to make delay and gain settings for the selected external effect.
Audio Connections External Instruments and Effects 5. Click OK. This adds a new external instrument bus. 6. Click in the Device Port column for the left and right ports of the return bus and select the inputs of your audio hardware to which you connected the external instrument. 7. Make additional settings for the bus. You can also adjust the settings while using the external instrument. This allows you to hear the result.
Audio Connections External Instruments and Effects Activates/Deactivates the external instrument. Bypass External Instrument Allows you to bypass the external instrument. Delay Allows you to adjust the delay for the external instrument. Return Gain Allows you to adjust the return gain for the external instrument. Sending MIDI Notes to External Instruments You can send MIDI notes from a MIDI track to an external instrument.
Audio Connections Bus Configurations PROCEDURE 1. Select the audio track that uses the external effect or the instrument track that uses the external instrument. 2. In the Inspector, click Freeze Audio Channel or Freeze Instrument Channel. 3. In the dialog, adjust the Tail Size value. When the Tail Size is set to 0 s, freezing only takes into account the data within the part boundaries. RESULT The freeze function is performed in real time to ensure that external effects are taken into account.
Audio Connections Bus Configurations ● To remove multiple input or output busses at the same time, use Shift or Ctrl/Cmd to select them in the list, right-click them, and select Remove Selected Busses. Changing Port Assignments You can change the port assignment of busses. PROCEDURE 1. Select Studio > Audio Connections. 2. Do one of the following: ● To change the assignment of a single bus, open the Device Port pop-up menu, and select a new port.
Project Window The Project window provides an overview of the project, and allows you to navigate and perform large scale editing. Each project has one Project window. The Project window is displayed whenever you open or create a new project. ● To open a project, select File > Open. ● To create a new project, select File > New Project.
Project Window Showing/Hiding Zones ● 2 The Zones tab allows you to determine and lock the position of certain MixConsole channels in the lower zone. Project Zone The project zone shows the toolbar, the track list with the tracks, the event display with the parts and events of the project, and the Project window ruler. On the toolbar, you can activate/deactivate the status line, the info line, the overview line, and the Transport Bar.
Project Window Project Zone RELATED LINKS Track List on page 53 Event Display on page 54 Global Track Controls on page 54 Ruler on page 56 Status Line on page 57 Info Line on page 58 Overview Line on page 58 Transport Bar on page 59 Project Window Toolbar The toolbar contains tools and shortcuts for opening other windows and various project settings and functions.
Project Window Project Zone Constrain Delay Compensation Constrain Delay Compensation Minimizes the latency effects of the delay compensation. Left Divider Left Divider Tools that are placed to the left of the divider are always shown. Media & MixConsole Windows Open MediaBay Opens/Closes the MediaBay. Open Pool Window Opens/Closes the Pool window. Open MixConsole Opens/Closes the MixConsole. Open Control Room Opens/Closes the Control Room.
Project Window Project Zone Deactivate All Solo States Deactivates all solo states. Deactivate All Listen States Deactivates all listen states. Activate/Deactivate Read for All Tracks Activates/Deactivates read automation for all tracks. Activate/Deactivate Write for All Tracks Activates/Deactivates write automation for all tracks. Suspend All Read/Write Automation Suspends all read/write automation.
Project Window Project Zone Shows the left locator position. Go to Right Locator Position Allows you to go to the right locator position. Right Locator Position Shows the right locator position. Locator Range Duration Locators to Selection Allows you to set the locators to the selection. Locator Range Duration Shows the duration of the locator range. Transport Controls Go to Previous Marker/Zero Moves the project cursor to the previous marker/zero position on the timeline.
Project Window Project Zone Time Displays Select Primary Time Format Allows you to select a time format for the primary time display. Primary Time Display Shows the position of the project cursor in the selected time format. Select Secondary Time Format Allows you to select a time format for the secondary time display. Secondary Time Display Shows the position of the project cursor in the selected time format. Markers Jump to Marker Allows you to set and locate marker positions.
Project Window Project Zone Glue Glues events together. Mute Mutes events. Zoom Zooms in. Hold Alt and click to zoom out. Comp Assembles takes. Time Warp Adjusts musical positions of events to time positions. Line Creates a series of contiguous events. Play Allows you to play back events. Color Allows you to colorize events. Color Menu Select Color for Selected Tracks or Events Opens the Colorize pane that allows you to colorize the selected tracks or events.
Project Window Project Zone Moves the selected event to the right. Trim End Left Decreases the length of the selected event by moving its end to the left. Trim End Right Increases the length of the selected event by moving its end to the right. Project Root Key Project Root Key Changes the root key of the project. Snap Snap to Zero Crossing Restricts editing to zero crossings, that is, positions where the amplitude is zero.
Project Window Project Zone Activates/Deactivates AudioWarp quantize. Open Quantize Panel Opens the Quantize Panel. Audio Alignment Open Audio Alignment Panel Opens the Audio Alignment Panel. System Performance Meter System Performance Meter Shows the meters for average audio processing load and the disk cache load. Right Divider Right Divider Tools that are placed to the right of the divider are always shown. Window Zone Controls Show/Hide Left Zone Shows/Hides the left zone of the window.
Project Window Project Zone Audio Alignment on page 210 Left/Right Toolbar Divider The left and right toolbar dividers allow you to lock the position of specific tools at the left or at the right side of the toolbar, so that they are always shown. All other items are shown in the center of the toolbar. When you reduce the width of the Project window, these toolbar items are hidden successively. When you increase the width, they are shown again.
Project Window Project Zone RESULT The track list is divided and video, marker, or arranger tracks are automatically moved to the upper track list. All other track types are moved to the lower track list. AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK ● To move any type of track from the lower track list to the upper and vice versa, right-click it in the track list and select Toggle Track List from the context menu. ● To resize the upper part of the track list, click and drag the divider between the track list sections.
Project Window Project Zone 1 Add Track Opens the Add Track dialog. 2 Use Track Preset Allows you to add a track using a track preset. 3 Number of Visible Tracks Displays how many tracks are hidden. Click this to show all tracks that are filtered out by the Visibility tab. NOTE If the track was outside the view or hidden, it is now shown. Tracks that are hidden using Set Track Type Filter are not shown. 4 Set Track Type Filter Determines which track types are shown in the track list.
Project Window Project Zone RESULT Tracks of the filtered type are removed from the track list and the color of the Set Track Type Filter button changes to indicate that a track type is hidden. Finding Tracks The Find Tracks function allows you to find specific tracks. This is useful if you have a large project with many tracks or if you have hidden tracks using the Visibility tab. PROCEDURE 1. Click Find Tracks above the track list to open a selector that lists all tracks. 2.
Project Window Project Zone ● Ruler ● Info line ● Tooltip position values The following options are available: Bars+Beats Sets the ruler to display bars, beats, sixteenth notes, and ticks. By default, there are 120 ticks per sixteenth note. To change this, adjust the MIDI Display Resolution setting in the Preferences dialog (MIDI page). Seconds Sets the ruler to display hours, minutes, seconds, and milliseconds. Timecode Sets the ruler to display hours, minutes, seconds, and frames.
Project Window Project Zone Project Frame Rate Displays the frame rate used in the project. Click in this field to open the Project Setup dialog. Project Pan Law Displays the current pan law setting. Click in this field to open the Project Setup dialog. RELATED LINKS Project Window Toolbar on page 45 Info Line The info line shows information about the event or part that you selected in the project zone. To activate the info line, click Set up Window Layout on the toolbar and activate Info Line.
Project Window Left Zone ● To navigate to another section of the event display, drag the rectangle to the left or right, or click in the upper part of the overview. RELATED LINKS Project Window Toolbar on page 45 Transport Bar The Transport Bar allows displaying the transport functions in an integrated and fixed zone of the Project window. ● To activate the Transport Bar, click Set up Window Layout on the Project window toolbar and activate Transport Bar.
Project Window Left Zone RELATED LINKS Inspector on page 60 Visibility on page 64 Project Window Toolbar on page 45 Inspector The Inspector allows you to show controls and parameters for either the selected track in the track list or the event or part that is shown in the editor in the lower zone. ● To show/hide the Inspector, click Show/Hide Left Zone in the Project window toolbar. 60 Cubase Pro 10.5.
Project Window Left Zone The following tabs are available: Track Opens the Track Inspector for the selected track. Editor Opens the Editor Inspector for the event or part that is shown in the editor in the lower zone. RELATED LINKS Opening the Track Inspector on page 61 Opening the Editor Inspector on page 62 Opening the Editor in the Lower Zone on page 71 Opening the Track Inspector The Track Inspector shows controls and parameters for the selected track in the track list. PROCEDURE 1.
Project Window Left Zone RESULT The Track Inspector for the selected track opens. If more than one track is selected in the track list, the controls and parameters for the topmost selected track are shown. NOTE In this documentation we use Inspector to refer to the Track tab of the Inspector. Opening the Editor Inspector The Editor Inspector shows controls and parameters for the event or part that is shown in the editor in the lower zone.
Project Window Left Zone RESULT The Editor Inspector for the event or part opens. NOTE The Editor Inspector only contains information if the lower zone shows an editor. Otherwise, it is empty. RELATED LINKS Opening the Editor in the Lower Zone on page 71 Opening the Symbols Tab for the Score Editor The Score Editor Inspector allows you to select the following tabs: Inspector and Symbols. PREREQUISITE The Score Editor is shown in the lower zone. PROCEDURE 1.
Project Window Left Zone RELATED LINKS Key Editor Inspector on page 827 Inspector Sections The Track tab and the Editor tab of the Inspector are divided into a number of sections that each contain different controls for the track, event or part. Not all Inspector sections are shown by default. The available sections depend on the type of the selected track, event, or part, and on the settings in the setup dialog for the Track tab and the Editor tab of the Inspector.
Project Window Left Zone The following tabs are available: Track Allows you to show or hide individual tracks from the track list. Zones Allows you to determine and lock the position of certain MixConsole channels in the lower zone. RELATED LINKS Opening the MixConsole in the Lower Zone on page 70 Opening the Visibility The Visibility tab allows you to show or hide individual tracks from the track list. PROCEDURE 1. Click Show/Hide Left Zone on the Project window toolbar to activate the Left Zone. 2.
Project Window Left Zone RELATED LINKS Showing/Hiding Individual Tracks on page 66 Showing/Hiding Individual Tracks The Visibility tab shows a list of all tracks of your project. This list allows you to show and hide individual tracks. ● To show/hide a track in the track list, check/uncheck it by clicking to the left of the track name. ● To activate/deactivate several tracks at the same time, select them and press Return.
Project Window Left Zone RELATED LINKS Synchronizing Track and Channel Visibility on page 67 Synchronizing Track and Channel Visibility You can synchronize the track visibility in the Project window with the channel visibility in a separate MixConsole window. PROCEDURE 1. At the top of the left zone, select the Visibility tab. 2. At the bottom of the left zone, select the Track tab. 3. Click the equals sign to open the Sync Visibility of Project and MixConsole: On/Off menu. 4.
Project Window Lower Zone RESULT The MixConsole opens in the lower zone. RELATED LINKS Opening the MixConsole in the Lower Zone on page 70 Lower Zone The lower zone of the Project window allows you to display specific windows and editors in an integrated and fixed zone of the Project window. This is useful if you work on single screen systems and notebooks, for example. To show/hide the lower zone, click Show/Hide Lower Zone on the Project window toolbar.
Project Window Lower Zone RELATED LINKS Opening Chord Pads on page 69 Opening the MixConsole in the Lower Zone on page 70 Opening Sampler Control on page 71 Opening the Editor in the Lower Zone on page 71 Project Window Toolbar on page 45 Setting up the Lower Zone In the lower zone, the MixConsole, Editor, Sampler Control, and Chord Pads tabs are shown. You can change their order, and you can hide tabs that you do not need. PROCEDURE 1. Click Set up Lower Zone in the bottom right of the lower zone. 2.
Project Window Lower Zone RESULT The Chord Pads are opened. RELATED LINKS Chord Pads on page 930 Setting up the Lower Zone on page 69 Project Window Toolbar on page 45 Opening the MixConsole in the Lower Zone The MixConsole in the lower zone allows you to perform all basic mixing procedures from within the lower zone of the Project window, and at the same time to see the context of your tracks and events. PROCEDURE 1. Click Show/Hide Lower Zone on the Project window toolbar to activate the lower zone.
Project Window Lower Zone RELATED LINKS MixConsole in Lower Zone on page 347 Project Window Toolbar on page 45 Opening Sampler Control Sampler Control allows you to display and edit the waveform of an audio sample on a sampler track. PROCEDURE 1. Click Show/Hide Lower Zone on the Project window toolbar to activate the lower zone. 2. At the bottom of the lower zone, click the Sampler Control tab. RESULT Sampler Control is opened.
Project Window Lower Zone ● Select an audio event. ● Select an audio part. RESULT Depending on your event or part selection, the lower zone shows either the Audio Part Editor, the Sample Editor, or one of the MIDI editors. NOTE To change the default MIDI editor, select MIDI > Set up Editor Preferences, and select an option from the Default MIDI Editor pop-up menu. NOTE If you open the editor and no event or part is selected, the editor in the lower zone is empty.
Project Window Lower Zone RESULT The MIDI part is displayed in the selected editor. NOTE This selection is temporary. Next time you open the MIDI part, the default MIDI editor is used. Link Project and Lower Zone Editor Cursors You can link cursors and zoom factors of the project zone and the Key Editor, Drum Editor, and the Audio Part Editor in the lower zone. NOTE Link Project and Lower Zone Editor Cursors is not available in the Sample Editor.
Project Window Right Zone If you activate Link Project and Lower Zone Editor Cursors , the cursors and zoom factors are linked in the event displays of the project zone and the lower zone. This is useful if you edit in both zones and you want to keep the same position in view. NOTE In the Key Commands dialog in the Edit category, you can assign a key command for this.
Project Window Right Zone NOTE You can show/hide specific tabs in the right zone by right-clicking a tab and activating/ deactivating the options in the context menu. RELATED LINKS VSTi Rack in the Right Zone on page 76 Media Rack in the Right Zone on page 78 Project Window Toolbar on page 45 Opening the VSTi Rack in the Right Zone You can show the VSTi rack in the right zone of the Project window.
Project Window Right Zone RESULT The VSTi rack is opened in the right zone of the Project window. RELATED LINKS VSTi Rack in the Right Zone on page 76 VST Instruments on page 719 Project Window Toolbar on page 45 VSTi Rack in the Right Zone The VSTi rack in the right zone of the Project window allows you to add and edit VST instruments in the context of the Project window. The following sections are available: ● Track Shows the associated VST instrument for an instrument track.
Project Window Right Zone Opens the Settings menu where you can activate/deactivate the following modes: ● Show VST Quick Controls for One Slot Only shows the VST Quick Controls exclusively for the selected instrument. ● MIDI Channel follows track selection ensures that the Channel selector follows the MIDI track selection in the Project window. Use this mode if you work with multitimbral instruments.
Project Window Right Zone Project Window Toolbar on page 45 Media Rack in the Right Zone The Media rack in the right zone of the Project window allows you to drag audio events, MIDI parts, or instrument presets into the event display. It lists Steinberg factory content and any installed Steinberg content sets. The Media rack Home tab shows the following tiles: VST Instruments Shows all included VST instruments. VST Effects Shows all included VST effects.
Project Window Right Zone File Browser Shows your file system and the pre-defined folders Favorites, This Computer, VST Sound, Factory Content, and User Content where you can search for media files and access them immediately. RELATED LINKS Media Rack in Right Zone on page 620 MediaBay and Media Rack on page 620 Opening the Control Room in the Right Zone You can show the Control Room in the right zone of the Project window. PROCEDURE 1.
Project Window Keyboard Focus in the Project Window RESULT The Meter is opened in the right zone of the Project window. It has exactly the same features as the Meter that you open in the right zone of the MixConsole. RELATED LINKS Metering and Loudness on page 436 Project Window Toolbar on page 45 Keyboard Focus in the Project Window The different zones in the Project window can be controlled by using key commands.
Project Window Zooming in the Project Window Lower Zone on page 68 Right Zone on page 74 Project Window on page 43 Activating Keyboard Focus for a Zone You can activate the keyboard focus for a zone by clicking with the mouse and by using key commands. PROCEDURE ● Do one of the following: ● To activate any zone, click in it. ● To activate the next zone, press Tab. This allows you to cycle forward through the zones. ● To activate the previous zone, press Shift-Tab.
Project Window Zooming in the Project Window Zooming Vertically ● Select the Zoom tool, click in the event display, and drag a selection rectangle to zoom in vertically and horizontally. NOTE For this to work, you must deactivate the Zoom Tool Standard Mode: Horizontal Zooming Only option in the Preferences dialog (Editing—Tools page). ● Use the vertical zoom sliders to zoom in and out. If you have made any individual track height adjustments, the relative height differences are maintained.
Project Window Zooming in the Project Window Zoom to Selection Zooms in horizontally and vertically so that the current selection fills the screen. Zoom to Selection (Horiz.) Zooms in horizontally so that the current selection fills the screen. Zoom to Event Zooms in to show the currently selected event. This option is available in the Sample Editor and in some MIDI editors. Zoom In Vertically/Zoom Out Vertically Zooms in/out one step vertically.
Project Window Zooming in the Project Window ● To zoom out so that the whole project is visible, open the Zoom Presets pop-up menu and select Zoom Full. This displays the project from the Project Start Time to the Project Length that is set in the Project Setup dialog. ● To delete a preset, open the Zoom Presets pop-up menu and select Organize. In the dialog that opens, select the preset in the list and click Delete. ● To rename a preset, open the Zoom Presets pop-up menu and select Organize.
Project Window Snap Function Snap Function The Snap function helps you to find exact positions when editing in the Project window. It does this by restricting horizontal movement and positioning to certain positions. Operations affected by Snap include moving, copying, drawing, sizing, splitting, range selection, etc. ● To activate/deactivate Snap, activate/deactivate Snap on the toolbar. Setting the Snap Point You can set the snap point at any position of the audio event. PROCEDURE 1. Select an event.
Project Window Snap Function NOTE This only applies when dragging existing events or parts. When you create new events or parts, this Snap Type works like Grid. Events If this option is activated, the start and end positions of other events and parts become magnetic. This means that if you drag an event to a position near the start or end of another event, it is automatically aligned with the start or end of the other event. For audio events, the position of the snap point is also magnetic.
Project Window Cross-Hair Cursor Use Quantize Sets the grid and snap resolution to the value that is activated in the Quantize Presets pop-up menu. Adapt to Zoom Sets the grid and snap resolution to the horizontal zoom level. The more you zoom in on the event display, the finer the resolution. High zoom levels allow you to snap to 64th notes, low zoom levels allow you to snap to bars. NOTE Adapt to Zoom is only available if Bars+Beats is set as ruler display format.
Project Window Edit History Dialog Cross-hair cursor when moving an event. ● When the Object Selection tool, the Split tool, or any other tool that makes use of this function is selected, the cross-hair cursor appears as soon as you move the mouse over the event display. ● The cross-hair cursor is only available for tools where such a function is of any use. The Mute tool, for example, does not use a cross-hair cursor, as you have to click directly on an event to mute it.
Project Window Color Handling NOTE ● You can also undo applied plug-in effects or audio processes. However, we recommend to modify or delete these using the Direct Offline Processing window. ● All offline processing that you have applied permanently to the audio using the Make Direct Offline Processing Permanent function cannot be undone. Therefore, it is not shown in the Edit History dialog.
Project Window Color Handling NOTE If you want to select colors by names instead, activate the Select Colors by Name option in the Project Colors Setup dialog (Options page). 4. Select a color. RESULT The selected tracks are colorized, and the events and parts get the track color. NOTE If you assign a different color to individual events or parts with the Color tool, events or parts no longer follow color changes of the track.
Project Window Color Handling Resetting the Track Color You can reset the color of a track to the default color. PROCEDURE 1. In the Project window, select the track that you want to reset to the default color, and deselect all events or parts. 2. On the Project window toolbar, select Select Color for Selected Tracks or Events. 3. In the Colorize pane, click Set Track Color to Default. RESULT The default color is assigned to the selected track.
Project Window Color Handling This is only necessary if you want to colorize multiple events or parts. 4. On the Project window toolbar, select the Color tool. 5. Click the events or parts that you want to colorize. RESULT The events or parts are colorized and no longer follow color changes of the track. NOTE You can also Ctrl/Cmd-click an event or part with the Color tool to open the Colorize pane or to select colors by names.
Project Window Color Handling RELATED LINKS Color Picker on page 95 Color Set Tab on page 93 Presets Tab on page 94 Options Tab on page 95 Color Set Tab The Color Set tab allows you to change the color set that is used in the project. The following options are available: 93 Cubase Pro 10.5.
Project Window Color Handling Color fields Click a field to open the Color Picker that allows you to specify a new color. Name Shows the name of the color. Double-click to change it. Set up Allows you to add or remove color fields. ● Insert Color Adds a new color field. ● Duplicate Color Duplicates the selected color field. ● Remove Color Removes the selected color field. ● Reset Color Resets the selected color field to the factory settings. Apply Applies your changes and closes the dialog.
Project Window Color Handling Sort Colors by Allows you to sort the colors of the color set by their basic color or by their color tint. The New Color Set section displays the current colors of the new color set. The Missing Current Project Colors section shows which missing colors will be replaced. Move the mouse pointer over the color field of a color that is missing to highlight the color that is used to replace it in the New Color Set section. Apply Applies your changes and closes the dialog.
Project Window Color Handling Color selectors Allow you to select a color shade and the nuance of the shade. Context menu Allows you to copy, paste, or reset colors. Current Color/New Color Shows the current color and the new color. Hue/Saturation/Value Allow you to edit the colors numerically. Red/Green/Blue Allow you to edit the colors numerically. OK Confirms the color changes. NOTE You must restart the application for some changes to take effect. 96 Cubase Pro 10.5.
Project Handling In Cubase, projects are the central documents. You must create and set up a project to work with the program. Creating New Projects You can create empty projects or projects that are based on a template. PROCEDURE 1. Select File > New Project. Depending on your settings, either the Hub or the Project Assistant dialog opens. 2. 3. In the location options section, select where to store the new project. ● To use the default location, select Use default location.
Project Handling Hub News and Tutorials Section The News and Tutorials section displays Steinberg news, tutorial videos as well as links to the user forum, downloads, and the Help Center. NOTE Ensure that you have an active Internet connection to access this material. Projects Section The Projects section lets you create new projects, which can either be empty or based on a template. It lets you specify where to save the projects.
Project Handling Project Assistant Dialog Deactivating the Hub To start Cubase or to create new projects without the Hub, you can deactivate it. PROCEDURE 1. In the Preferences dialog, select General. 2. Deactivate Use Hub. RESULT Cubase starts without opening a project and opens the Project Assistant dialog when you create a new project using the File menu. However, you can still open the Hub through the Hub menu.
Project Handling Project Files Template list When you click on one of the category items, the list below the category bar shows the available factory templates for this category. Any new templates that you create are added at the top of the corresponding list. Location options This section allows you to specify where the project is stored. Open Other This button allows you to open any project file on your system. This is identical to using the Open command from the File menu.
Project Handling Template Files The following options are available in the Current Presets section: New Folder Allows you to add and name a folder to the template list. Template list Lists the templates and the folders. The following options are available in the Attribute Inspector section: Value Click this field to enter a description for the Content Summary attribute, or to select a template category for Template Category attribute.
Project Handling Template Files Saving a Project Template File You can save the current project as a template. When you create a new project, you can select this template as a starting point for your new project. PREREQUISITE You have removed all clips from the Pool. This ensures that references to media data from the original project folder are deleted. PROCEDURE 1. Set up a project. 2. Select File > Save as Template. 3.
Project Handling Project Setup Dialog Project Setup Dialog The Project Setup dialog allows you to make general settings for your project. ● To open the Project Setup dialog, select Project > Project Setup. ● To open the Project Setup dialog automatically when you create a new project, activate the Run Setup on Create New Project option in the Preferences dialog (General page).
Project Handling Project Setup Dialog Project Time Displays In the Project Time Displays section, the following options are available: Display Format Allows you to specify the global display format that is used for all rulers and position displays in the program, except the ruler tracks. However, you can make independent display format selections for the individual rulers and displays.
Project Handling Project Setup Dialog Record File Type Allows you to specify the file type of the audio files that you record in Cubase. NOTE ● For wave file recordings larger than 4 GB, the EBU RIFF standard is used. If a FAT 32 disk is used (not recommended), audio files are split automatically. In the Preferences dialog, you can specify what happens if your recorded Wave file is larger than 4 GB. ● You can set up embedded strings in the Preferences dialog.
Project Handling Opening Project Files Opening Project Files You can open one or several saved project files at the same time. IMPORTANT If you open a project saved with a different program version that contains data for functions that are not available in your version, this data may be lost when you save the project with your version. NOTE ● If you open an external project, the last used view that was saved on your computer is used. You can change this setting in the Preferences dialog (General page).
Project Handling Saving Project Files Opening Recent Projects You can open recent projects directly from the recent projects list. PROCEDURE ● Do one of the following: ● In the category bar of the Hub or the Project Assistant dialog, click Recent, select a project from the projects list, and click Open. ● Select File > Recent Projects and select a recently opened project.
Project Handling Reverting to the Last Saved Version ● To specify how many backup files are created with the Auto Save function, use the Maximum Backup Files option. When the maximum number of backup files is reached, the existing files are overwritten, starting with the oldest file. Saving Project Files As a New Version You can create and activate a new version of an active project file.
Project Handling Self-Contained Projects ● Select one of the template projects and click Create to create a project based on a template. RESULT The project is created and saved in the specified location. Self-Contained Projects If you want to share your work or transfer it to another computer, your project must be selfcontained.
Project Handling Self-Contained Projects RESULT A copy of the project is saved in the new folder. The original project remains unaffected. NOTE VST Sound content provided by Steinberg is copy-protected and is not included in the backup project. If you want to use a backup copy that uses VST Sound content on a different computer, make sure that the corresponding content is also available on that computer.
Tracks Tracks are the building blocks of your project. They allow you to import, add, record, and edit parts and events. Tracks are listed from top to bottom in the track list and extend horizontally across the Project window. Each track is assigned to a particular channel strip in the MixConsole. If you select a track in the Project window, the controls, settings, and parameters displayed in the Inspector and the track list allow you to control the track.
Tracks Track Inspector Settings Dialog Hidden Items Displays sections that are hidden in the Inspector. Visible Items Displays sections that are visible in the Inspector. Pin Activate Pin by clicking the column for a section to exclude this section from being closed automatically. Add Allows you to move an item selected in the hidden sections list to the list of visible sections. Remove Allows you to move an item selected in the visible sections list to the list of hidden sections.
Tracks Track Inspector Settings Dialog Equalizers Allows you to adjust the EQs for the track. You can have up to four bands of EQs for each track. Sends Allows you to route the track to one or several FX channels. Cue Sends Allows you to route cue mixes to Control Room cues. Strip Allows you to set up the channel strip modules. Direct Routing Allows you to set up direct routing. Surround Pan Shows the panner for a track. Fader Shows a duplicate of the corresponding MixConsole channel.
Tracks Track Controls Settings Dialog Equalizers (EQ) on page 387 Chords Section for MIDI Tracks on page 923 Chords Section for Audio Tracks on page 923 Cue Sends on page 398 Channel Strips on page 390 Direct Routing on page 399 Miniature Views on page 670 Device Panels on page 781 Track Quick Controls on page 742 Expression Maps on page 873 Note Expression on page 885 MIDI Modifiers Section on page 767 MIDI Inserts on page 771 MIDI Sends on page 772 Track Controls Settings Dialog The Track Controls Settin
Tracks Track Controls Settings Dialog Track type Allows you to select the track type to which your settings are applied. Hidden Controls Displays controls that are hidden in the track list. Visible Controls Displays controls that are visible in the track list. Width If you click in this column, you can set the maximum length for the track name. Group Displays the group number. Add Allows you to move an item selected in the hidden controls list to the list of visible controls.
Tracks Track Controls Settings Dialog Ungroup Allows you to ungroup grouped controls in the visible controls list. To remove an entire group, select the first (topmost) element belonging to this group and click Ungroup. Reset Allows you to restore all default track controls settings for the selected track type. Controls Area Preview Shows a preview of the customized track controls. Presets Allows you to save track controls settings as presets.
Tracks Track Controls Settings Dialog Audio-Related Tracks The following track controls are specific to audio-related tracks, that is, audio tracks, instrument tracks, sampler tracks, group channel tracks, FX channel tracks: Bypass Inserts Bypasses the inserts for the track. Bypass EQs Bypasses the equalizers for the track. Bypass Sends Bypasses the sends for the track. Freeze Channel Opens a dialog that allows you to set the Tail Size time in seconds.
Tracks Track Controls Settings Dialog Monitor For audio-related tracks, this routes incoming signals to the selected output. For MIDI and instrument-related tracks, this allows you to route incoming MIDI signals to the selected MIDI output. For this to work, activate MIDI Thru Active in the Preferences dialog (MIDI page). Edit Channel Settings Opens the Channel Settings window for the track. Show Lanes Divides the tracks in lanes. Lock Disables all editing of all events on the track.
Tracks Track Controls Settings Dialog Bypass Inserts Bypasses the inserts for the track. Bypass Sends Bypasses the sends for the track. Group/FX/VCA Tracks The following track controls are specific to group/FX/VCA tracks: Mute Automation Deactivates the automation read function for the selected parameter. Lock Automation Disables all editing of all events on the track. Automation parameter Allows you to select a parameter for automation. Parameter Allows you to select a parameter value for automation.
Tracks Add Track Dialog Folder Tracks The following controls are specific to folder tracks: Group Editing Allows you to activate the group editing mode. Expand/Collapse Folder Shows/Hides the tracks in the folder. Hidden tracks are played back as usual. Add Track Dialog The Add Track dialog allows you to set up and add tracks. To open the Add Track dialog, click Add Track in the global track controls area of the track list. The More Tracks section shows track types that can only be added once.
Tracks Audio Tracks Arranger Track on page 151 Transpose Track on page 157 Chord Track on page 152 Video Track on page 158 Audio Tracks You can use audio tracks for recording and playing back audio events and audio parts. Each audio track has a corresponding audio channel in the MixConsole. An audio track can have any number of automation tracks for automating channel parameters, effect settings, etc. You can add audio tracks via the Add Track dialog.
Tracks Audio Tracks The following settings are available: Audio Inputs Opens a window where you can select an input of your connected audio hardware. If you have added an input bus in the Audio Connections window, you can connect to that input bus. The Open Audio Connections button opens the Audio Connections window. Configuration Allows you to set the channel configuration. Audio-related tracks can be configured as mono, stereo, or surround tracks. Audio Outputs Allows you to set the output routing.
Tracks Audio Tracks Audio Track Inspector The Inspector for audio tracks contains controls and parameters that allow you to edit your audio track. The top section of the audio track Inspector contains the following basic track settings: Track name Click once to show/hide the basic track settings section. Double-click to rename the track. Colorize Selected Track Allows you to colorize the selected track. Edit Channel Settings Opens the Channel Settings window for the track. Mute Mutes the track.
Tracks Instrument Tracks Activates the track for recording. Monitor Routes incoming signals to the selected output. Toggle Time Base Switches between musical (tempo-related) and linear (time-related) time base for the track. Lock Disables all editing of all events on the track. Show Lanes Divides the tracks in lanes. Freeze Audio Channel Allows you to freeze the audio channel. Volume Allows you to adjust the level of the track. Pan Allows you to adjust the panning of the track.
Tracks Instrument Tracks RELATED LINKS Add Track Dialog – Instrument on page 125 Add Track Dialog – Instrument The Instrument page of the Add Track dialog allows you to set up and add instrument tracks. To open the Instrument page of the Add Track dialog, do one of the following: ● Click Add Track in the global track controls area of the track list, and click Instrument. This opens the global Add Track dialog on the Instrument page.
Tracks Instrument Tracks Keep Dialog Open Activate this to keep the dialog open after clicking Add Track. This allows you to click the page of another track type to set up and add more tracks. NOTE This is only available if you open the Add Track dialog from the global track controls. Add Track Adds one or more tracks, according to the track type and settings of the active page, and closes the dialog.
Tracks Instrument Tracks Write Automation Allows you to write track automation. Open Device Panels Allows you to open the instrument panel. Input Transformer Opens a pop-up menu that allows you to transform incoming MIDI events in real time. Record Enable Activates the track for recording. Monitor Routes incoming MIDI to the selected MIDI output. For this to work, activate MIDI Thru Active in the Preferences dialog (MIDI page).
Tracks Sampler Tracks Allows you to specify the input bus for the track. Activate Outputs This control is only available if the instrument provides more than one output. It allows you to activate one or more outputs for the instrument. Edit Instrument Allows you to open the instrument panel. Programs Allows you to select a program. Drum Maps Allows you to select a drum map for the track.
Tracks Sampler Tracks ● Select Project > Add Track > Sampler or right-click in an empty area of the track list, and select Add Sampler Track. This opens only the Sampler page of the Add Track dialog. The following settings are available: Name Allows you to specify a track name. Count Allows you to enter the number of tracks that you want to add. Keep Dialog Open Activate this to keep the dialog open after clicking Add Track.
Tracks Sampler Tracks Sampler Track Inspector The Inspector for sampler tracks contains controls and parameters that allow you to edit your sampler track. The top section of the sampler track Inspector contains the following basic track settings: Track name Click once to show/hide the basic track settings section. Double-click to rename the track. Colorize Selected Track Allows you to colorize the selected track. Edit Channel Settings Opens the Channel Settings window for the track. Mute Mutes the track.
Tracks MIDI Tracks Routes incoming MIDI to the selected MIDI output. For this to work, activate MIDI Thru Active in the Preferences dialog (MIDI page). Toggle Time Base Switches between musical (tempo-related) and linear (time-related) time base for the track. Lock Disables all editing of all events on the track. Show Lanes Divides the tracks in lanes. Freeze Sampler Channel Allows you to freeze the sampler track. Volume Allows you to adjust the level of the track.
Tracks MIDI Tracks Add Track Dialog – MIDI The MIDI page of the Add Track dialog allows you to set up and add MIDI tracks. To open the MIDI page of the Add Track dialog, do one of the following: ● Click Add Track in the global track controls area of the track list, and click MIDI. This opens the global Add Track dialog on the MIDI page. ● Select Project > Add Track > MIDI or right-click in an empty area of the track list, and select Add MIDI Track.
Tracks MIDI Tracks Add Track Adds one or more tracks, according to the track type and settings of the active page, and closes the dialog. MIDI Track Inspector The Inspector for MIDI tracks contains controls and parameters that allow you to control your MIDI track. These affect MIDI events in real time, on playback, for example. The top section of the MIDI track Inspector contains the following basic track settings: Track name Click once to show/hide the basic track settings section.
Tracks MIDI Tracks Input Transformer Opens a pop-up menu that allows you to transform incoming MIDI events in real time. Record Enable Activates the track for recording. Monitor Routes incoming MIDI to the selected MIDI output. For this to work, activate MIDI Thru Active in the Preferences dialog (MIDI page). Toggle Time Base Switches between musical (tempo-related) and linear (time-related) time base for the track. Lock Disables all editing of all events on the track.
Tracks Group Channel Tracks Allows you to open the instrument panel. Bank Selector Allows you to set a bank select message that is sent to your MIDI device. Programs Allows you to select a program. Program Selector Allows you to set a program change message that is sent to your MIDI device. Drum Maps Allows you to select a drum map for the track.
Tracks Group Channel Tracks ● Select Project > Add Track > Group. This opens only the Group page of the Add Track dialog. The following settings are available: Configuration Allows you to set the channel configuration. Audio-related tracks can be configured as mono, stereo, or surround tracks. Audio Outputs Allows you to set the output routing. Folder Setup Allows you to select whether you want to create the effect inside or outside a dedicated folder. Name Allows you to specify a track name.
Tracks Group Channel Tracks NOTE This is only available if you open the Add Track dialog from the global track controls. Add Track Adds one or more tracks, according to the track type and settings of the active page, and closes the dialog. Group Channel Track Inspector The Inspector for group channel tracks shows the settings for the group channel. Track name Click once to show/hide the basic track settings section. Double-click to rename the track.
Tracks FX Channel Tracks Volume Allows you to adjust the level of the track. Pan Allows you to adjust the panning of the track. Output Routing Allows you to specify the output bus for the track. NOTE When you select the group folder track instead, the Inspector shows the folder and the group channels it contains. You can click one of the group channels shown in the folder to have the Inspector show the settings for that group channel.
Tracks FX Channel Tracks ● Select Project > Add Track > Effect. This opens only the Effect page of the Add Track dialog. The following settings are available: Effect Allows you to select an effect. Configuration Allows you to set the channel configuration. Audio-related tracks can be configured as mono, stereo, or surround tracks. Audio Outputs Allows you to set the output routing. Folder Setup Allows you to select whether you want to create the effect inside or outside a dedicated folder.
Tracks FX Channel Tracks Keep Dialog Open Activate this to keep the dialog open after clicking Add Track. This allows you to click the page of another track type to set up and add more tracks. NOTE This is only available if you open the Add Track dialog from the global track controls. Add Track Adds one or more tracks, according to the track type and settings of the active page, and closes the dialog.
Tracks VCA Fader Track Write Automation Allows you to write track automation. Toggle Time Base Switches between musical (tempo-related) and linear (time-related) time base for the track. Lock Disables all editing of all events on the track. Volume Allows you to adjust the level of the track. Pan Allows you to adjust the panning of the track. Output Routing Allows you to specify the output bus for the track.
Tracks VCA Fader Track ● Select Project > Add Track > VCA. This opens only the VCA page of the Add Track dialog. The following settings are available: Folder Setup Allows you to select whether you want to create the effect inside or outside a dedicated folder. Name Allows you to specify a track name. Count Allows you to enter the number of tracks that you want to add. Keep Dialog Open Activate this to keep the dialog open after clicking Add Track.
Tracks Marker Track VCA Fader Track Inspector The Inspector for VCA fader tracks shows the settings for the VCA faders. Track name Click once to show/hide the basic track settings section. Double-click to rename the track. Colorize Selected Track Allows you to colorize the selected track. Read Automation Allows you to read track automation. Write Automation Allows you to write track automation. Toggle Time Base Switches between musical (tempo-related) and linear (time-related) time base for the track.
Tracks Marker Track Add Track Dialog – Marker The Marker page of the Add Track dialog allows you to set up and add marker tracks. To open the Marker page of the Add Track dialog, do one of the following: ● Click Add Track in the global track controls area of the track list, and click Marker. This opens the global Add Track dialog on the Marker page. ● Select Project > Add Track > Marker. This opens only the Marker page of the Add Track dialog.
Tracks Ruler Track Add Track Adds one or more tracks, according to the track type and settings of the active page, and closes the dialog. RELATED LINKS Marker Track on page 143 Marker Track Inspector The marker track Inspector displays the marker list. Track name Double-click to rename the track. Colorize Selected Track Allows you to colorize the selected track. Open Marker Window Opens the Markers window. Marker attributes Shows the markers, their IDs, and their time positions.
Tracks Ruler Track ● Select Project > Add Track > Ruler. This opens only the Ruler page of the Add Track dialog. The following settings are available: Count Allows you to enter the number of tracks that you want to add. Keep Dialog Open Activate this to keep the dialog open after clicking Add Track. This allows you to click the page of another track type to set up and add more tracks. NOTE This is only available if you open the Add Track dialog from the global track controls.
Tracks Folder Tracks The following display formats are available: Bars+Beats Activates a display format of bars, beats, sixteenth notes, and ticks. By default there are 120 ticks per sixteenth note. To adjust this, change the MIDI Display Resolution in the Preferences dialog (MIDI page). Seconds Activates a display format of hours, minutes, seconds, and milliseconds. Timecode Activates a display format of hours, minutes, seconds, and frames.
Tracks Folder Tracks ● Select Project > Add Track > Folder. This opens only the Folder page of the Add Track dialog. The following settings are available: Name Allows you to specify a track name. Count Allows you to enter the number of tracks that you want to add. Keep Dialog Open Activate this to keep the dialog open after clicking Add Track. This allows you to click the page of another track type to set up and add more tracks.
Tracks Folder Tracks Folder Track Inspector The Inspector for folder tracks shows the folder and its underlying track, much like a folder structure in the File Explorer/macOS Finder. When you select one of the tracks shown under the folder, the Inspector shows the settings for that track. Track name Double-click to rename the track. Colorize Selected Track Allows you to colorize the selected track. Mute Mutes the track. Solo Solos the track. Record Enable Activates the track for recording.
Tracks More Tracks Folder Track Controls The track list for folder tracks contains controls and parameters that allow you to edit all tracks in the folder. Expand/Collapse Folder Shows/Hides the tracks in the folder. Hidden tracks are played back as usual. Track name Double-click to rename the track. Mute Mutes the track. Solo Solos the track. Record Enable Activates the track for recording. Monitor For audio-related tracks, this routes incoming signals to the selected output.
Tracks More Tracks Arranger Track You can use the arranger track for arranging your project by marking out sections and determining in which order they are to be played back. ● To add the arranger track to your project, select Project > Add Track > Arranger. Arranger Track Inspector The arranger track Inspector displays the lists of available arranger chains and arranger events. The arranger track Inspector contains the following settings: Track name Double-click to rename the track.
Tracks More Tracks Allows you to select the active arranger chain, to rename it, to create a new one, to duplicate, or to flatten it. Current Arranger Chain Shows the active arranger chain. Arranger Events Lists all arranger events in your project. Click the arrow of an arranger event to play it back and start the live mode. Stop Allows you to stop the live mode. Jump Mode Allows you to define how long the active arranger event is played before jumping to the next one.
Tracks More Tracks Chord Track Inspector The chord track Inspector contains settings for the chord events. The top section of the chord track Inspector contains the following settings: Track name Click to show/hide the basic track settings section. Colorize Selected Track Allows you to colorize the selected track. Mute Chord Track Mutes the track. Record Enable Activates the track for recording. Acoustic Feedback Allows you to audition the events on the chord track.
Tracks More Tracks Adaptive Voicings If this option is activated, the voicings are set automatically. Automatic Scales If this option is activated, the program creates scale events automatically. Mapping Offset Allows you to specify an offset value to make sure that chord events also affect the MIDI notes that have been triggered too early (enter a negative value) or too late (enter a positive value).
Tracks More Tracks Toggle Time Base Switches between musical (tempo-related) and linear (time-related) time base for the track. Signature Track You can use the signature track to add and edit signature events, and to set up click patterns for them. The signature track’s background always shows bars. This is independent of the ruler display format setting. ● To add the signature track to your project, select Project > Add Track > Signature.
Tracks More Tracks Lock Disables all editing of all events on the track. Signature Track Options ● Copy Click Pattern to Clipboard Copies the click pattern of the selected signature event to the clipboard. ● Paste Click Pattern to Selected Signatures Pastes the click pattern from the clipboard to selected signature events. NOTE This only works if the selected signature events are equal.
Tracks More Tracks Colorize Selected Track Allows you to colorize the selected track. Open Tempo Track Editor Opens the Tempo Track Editor. Tempo event list Shows a list of all tempo events that allows you to edit tempo events and their positions. Tempo Track Controls The track list for the tempo track contains controls and parameters that allow you to edit the tempo track. Activate Tempo Track Allows you to activate the tempo track. In this mode, the tempo cannot be changed on the Transport panel.
Tracks More Tracks Transpose Track Inspector The transpose track Inspector contains parameters to control the transpose track. Colorize Selected Track Allows you to colorize the selected track. Keep Transpose in Octave Range Allows you to keep the transposition in the octave range and ensures that nothing is transposed by more than seven semitones. Toggle Time Base Switches between musical (tempo-related) and linear (time-related) time base for the track.
Tracks More Tracks Video Track Inspector The video track Inspector contains parameters to control the video track. Colorize Selected Track Allows you to colorize the selected track. Reveal Video Window Opens the Video Player window. Mute Video Track Mutes the track. Lock Disables all editing of all events on the track. Show Frame Numbers Allows you to show each thumbnail with the corresponding video frame number. Show Thumbnails Allows you to activate/deactivate the thumbnails of the video track.
Tracks More Tracks Show Frame Numbers Allows you to show each thumbnail with the corresponding video frame number. 160 Cubase Pro 10.5.
Track Handling Tracks are the building blocks of your project. In Cubase, events and parts are placed on tracks. Adding Tracks via the Add Track Dialog You can add tracks via the Add Track dialog. PROCEDURE 1. In the global track controls area of the track list, click Add Track 2. Do one of the following: 3. . ● Click the track type and set up the options according to your needs. ● To add track types that can only be added once, open the More Tracks section and click the track type.
Track Handling Adding Tracks Using Track Presets Adding Tracks Using Track Presets You can add tracks based on track presets. Track presets contain sound and channel settings. PROCEDURE 1. In the global track controls area of the track list, click Use Track Preset 2. Select Using Track Preset. 3. In the Choose Track Preset dialog, select a track preset. . The number and type of the added tracks depend on the selected track preset. 4. Click OK.
Track Handling Track Import Track Import You can import tracks from other Nuendo or Cubase projects or track archives. This allows you, for example, to import premixed tracks or stems to your active project, or to reuse the mix settings of a previous project for a new song. You can decide for each individual track whether to create a new track in your active project or to replace data on an existing track.
Track Handling Track Import Video tracks ● If New Track is selected as destination, a new video track is created. If your project already contains a video track, you cannot import a video track from another project. In this case, you must remove the existing video track first. NOTE Projects from Nuendo projects can contain more than one video track. If you import video tracks from these projects to Cubase, only the first selected video track in the Import Options dialog is imported to your project.
Track Handling Track Import RELATED LINKS Import Options Dialog for Tracks on page 165 Track Versions on page 185 Import Options Dialog for Tracks The Import Options dialog allows you to activate tracks for import, to specify the destination in the active project and the track data that is to be imported, and to set up further import options.
Track Handling Track Import Search field Allows you to filter the track list. Clear Search resets the filter. Track list Shows the tracks that are selected in the project. The Source Track column allows you to select the tracks that you want to import into your project. The Destination Track column allows you to choose a destination for the corresponding track. Track Data to be Imported Events and Parts Imports only events and parts.
Track Handling Track Export Import at Cursor Position Places imported track data relative to the cursor position in your active project, taking the source project start time into account. For example, if the source project starts at timecode 01:00:00:00 with an event located at 02:00:00:00, and if the cursor in your active project is located at 02:00:00:00, the imported event is placed at timecode 03:00:00:00.
Track Handling Exporting MIDI Tracks as Standard MIDI Files Exporting Tracks as Track Archives You can export selected tracks as track archives. PROCEDURE 1. Select the tracks you want to export. 2. Select File > Export > Selected Tracks. 3. In the file dialog that opens, select or create a folder for saving the track archive as a single .xml file. 4. Enter a file name and click Save.
Track Handling Exporting MIDI Tracks as Standard MIDI Files NOTE If you want to include other Inspector settings than those specified in the Export Options, use Merge MIDI in Loop to convert these settings to real MIDI events. RELATED LINKS Export Options Dialog for MIDI Files on page 169 Merging MIDI Events into a New Part on page 785 Export Options Dialog for MIDI Files The Export Options for MIDI files allow you to specify what data is included in the exported MIDI files.
Track Handling Splitting Multi-Channel Audio Tracks Export Resolution Allows you to set a MIDI resolution between 24 and 960 for the MIDI file. The resolution is the number of pulses, or ticks, per quarter note (PPQ) and determines the precision with which you will be able to view and edit the MIDI data. The higher the resolution, the higher the precision.
Track Handling Merging Mono Audio Tracks to Multi-Channel Tracks during the split, the volume of the new mono file may not correspond to that of the file on the original track. Split Multi-Channel to Mono Dialog The Split Multi-Channel to Mono dialog allows you to specify how multi-channel tracks are converted to mono tracks. ● To open the Split Multi-Channel to Mono dialog, select Project > Convert Tracks > MultiChannel to Mono.
Track Handling Merging Mono Audio Tracks to Multi-Channel Tracks PROCEDURE 1. Optional: Select the tracks that you want to convert in the Project window. 2. Select Project > Convert Tracks > Mono to Multi-Channel. 3. In the Merge Mono to Multi-Channel dialog, make your changes and click OK. RESULT ● The tracks are converted into as many multi-channel tracks as corresponds to the destination format. ● The names of the multi-channel tracks derive from the mono source tracks.
Track Handling Removing Selected Tracks ● Keep Source Tracks Inserts new tracks below the source tracks. ● Mute Source Tracks Inserts new tracks below the source tracks and mutes the source tracks. ● Delete Source Tracks Inserts new tracks and deletes the source tracks. ● Create New Project Creates a new project containing only the resulting tracks. Destination Format Allows you to select the format for the multi-channel file. NOTE The number of selected tracks must match this format.
Track Handling Renaming Tracks Renaming Tracks You can rename tracks. PROCEDURE 1. Double-click the track name and type in a new name for the track. 2. Press Return. If you want all events on the track to get the same name, hold down any modifier key and press Return. AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK If the Parts Get Track Names option is activated in the Preferences dialog (Editing page), and you move an event from one track to another, the moved event will automatically be named according to its new track.
Track Handling Showing Track Pictures RELATED LINKS Track Pictures Browser on page 175 Track Pictures Browser The Track Pictures Browser allows you to set up and select pictures that can be shown in the track list and in the MixConsole. Track pictures are useful to recognize tracks and channels easily. You can select pictures from the factory content or add new ones to the user library. ● To open the Track Pictures Browser for a track, double-click in the lower left side of the track list.
Track Handling Setting the Track Height Intensity Allows you to apply the track color to the track picture and set the color intensity. Zoom Allows you to change the size of the track picture. Rotate Allows you to rotate the track picture. Setting the Track Height You can enlarge the track height to show the events on the track in detail, or you can decrease the height of several tracks to get a better overview of your project.
Track Handling Selecting Tracks Zoom Tracks N Rows Allows you to set the number of rows to fit in the active Project window. Zoom x Tracks Zooms the specified number of tracks to fit in the active Project window. Zoom N Tracks Allows you to set the number of tracks to fit in the active Project window. Zoom Tracks Minimal Zooms all track heights to the minimum size. Snap Track Heights Changes the track height in fixed increments when you resize it.
Track Handling Deselecting Tracks Deselecting Tracks You can deselect tracks that are selected in the track list. PROCEDURE ● Shift-click a selected track. RESULT The track is deselected. Duplicating Tracks You can duplicate a track with all contents and channel settings. PROCEDURE ● Select Project > Duplicate Tracks. RESULT The duplicated track appears below the original track.
Track Handling Handling Overlapping Audio ● To mute/solo all tracks in a folder track, click the Mute or Solo button for the folder track. NOTE Hidden tracks are played back as usual. RELATED LINKS Group Editing Mode on page 220 Moving Tracks to Folder Tracks You can move your tracks to folder tracks to organize them and to perform editing on several tracks as one entity. You can move any type of track including other folder tracks to folder tracks.
Track Handling Track Folding Menu Track Folding Menu You can show, hide, or invert tracks that are displayed in the Project window event display. This allows you to divide the project into several parts by creating several folder tracks for the different project elements and showing/hiding their contents by selecting a menu function or using a key command. You can also fold in automation tracks this way. ● To open the Track Folding menu, select Project > Track Folding.
Track Handling Modifying Event Display on Folder Tracks Modifying Event Display on Folder Tracks You can modify the event display on folder tracks. PROCEDURE 1. Right-click the folder track. 2. On the context menu, select Show Data on Folder Tracks. You have the following options: ● Always Show Data Displays data blocks or event details always. ● Never Show Data Displays nothing. ● Hide Data When Expanded Hides the display of events when you open folder tracks.
Track Handling Lanes, Takes and Overlapping Events To solo a lane, you can activate the Solo button for it. This allows you to hear the lane in the project context. If you want to hear the take without the project context, you also have to activate the main track’s Solo button. Assembling a Perfect Take You can play back, split, and activate takes to combine the best parts of your recording in a final take. PROCEDURE 1. Select the Comp tool or the Object Selection tool. 2.
Track Handling Lanes, Takes and Overlapping Events NOTE If you assemble stacked events on an audio track, deactivate Treat Muted Audio Events like Deleted in the Preferences dialog (Editing—Audio page). You can perform the following operations: Assembling Operations Operation Comp tool Select Hold down Shift and click on a Click on a take. take. (Project window only) Bring to front Click on a take. Click twice to toggle.
Track Handling Defining the Track Time Base Operation Comp tool Object Selection/Range Selection tool Split Alt-click on a take. If you split a MIDI part and the split position intersects one or several MIDI notes, the result depends on the Split MIDI Events option in the Preferences dialog (Editing— MIDI page). See left. Adjust splits Position the mouse pointer over a split and drag to the left or to the right. See left. Gluing splits Bring a new range to front.
Track Handling Track Versions Defining the Default Track Time Base You can specify the default track time type for new tracks (audio, group/FX, MIDI, and marker tracks). PROCEDURE 1. In the Preferences dialog, select Editing. 2. Open the Default Track Time Type pop-up menu and select a default track time type. RESULT If you selected Follow Transport Main Display, the primary time format setting on the Transport panel is used. When this is set to Bars+Beats, tracks with musical time base are added.
Track Handling Track Versions The following options are available: Track Version list Lists all track versions of the track for which you opened the Track Versions pop-up menu and allows you to activate a track version. New Version Creates a new, empty track version for all selected tracks. Duplicate Version Creates a copy of the active track version for all selected tracks. Rename Version Opens a dialog that allows you to change the track version name for the selected tracks.
Track Handling Track Versions Duplicate Version Creates a copy of the active track version for all selected tracks. Delete Version Deletes the active track version for all selected tracks. This function is only available if the track has more than one track version. Creating New Track Versions You can create new, empty track versions for selected tracks. PROCEDURE 1. In the track list, select the tracks for which you want to create a new track version. 2. Select Project > Track Versions > New Version.
Track Handling Track Versions 2. Select Project > Track Versions > Assign Common Version ID. RESULT A new ID is assigned to all active track versions on the selected tracks. The tracks are now marked as belonging together. You can now activate them together. Active Track Version If you created more than one track version for a track, you can show the events of a specific track version in the event display. This process is referred to as activating track versions.
Track Handling Track Versions NOTE If you work with audio tracks, MIDI tracks, instrument tracks, or the chord track, you can also use the Track Versions Inspector to activate a track version. Duplicating Track Versions You can duplicate a track version by creating a new track version that contains a copy of the active track version. PROCEDURE 1. In the track list, select the tracks and activate the track version that you want to duplicate. 2. Select Project > Track Versions > Duplicate Version.
Track Handling Track Versions RESULT The copied range from the first track version is pasted to the second track version at the exact same position. NOTE If you want to perform more complicated comping tasks, we recommend that you select Project > Track Versions > Create Lanes from Versions and proceed with the Comp tool. Copying and Pasting Selected Events between Track Versions You can copy and paste selected events between different track versions, even across multiple tracks.
Track Handling Track Versions Renaming Track Versions on Multiple Tracks You can rename track versions on multiple tracks. PROCEDURE 1. Activate all track versions that you want to rename, and select the corresponding tracks. 2. Select Project > Track Versions > Rename Version. 3. Enter a new track version name and click OK. RESULT In the track list, the new track version name is shown.
Track Handling Track Presets Creating Track Versions from Lanes If your project contains lanes and you want to continue working with the track version functions, you can create track versions from lanes. PROCEDURE 1. Select the tracks for which you want to create track versions. If you only want to convert specific lanes, select these lanes. 2. Select Project > Track Versions > Create Versions from Lanes. RESULT New track versions are added, one for each separate lane. The original lanes are kept.
Track Handling Track Presets NOTE To access the track presets functions for input and output channels, activate the Write buttons for input and output channels in the MixConsole. This creates input and output channel tracks in the track list. MIDI Track Presets You can use MIDI track presets for multitimbral VST instruments. You can also use them for external instruments. When creating MIDI track presets, you can either include the channel or the patch.
Track Handling Track Presets Loading Presets for Tracks You can choose from a variety of track presets. PROCEDURE 1. In the Inspector, click the Preset Management icon on the right of the Inserts section. 2. Select From Track Preset. 3. In the Results browser, double-click a track preset to apply it. RELATED LINKS Track Presets on page 192 Loading Presets for VST Instruments When working with VST instruments, you can choose from a variety of presets via the Results browser. PROCEDURE 1.
Track Handling Track Presets ● VST instrument settings NOTE Modifiers, inserts, and EQ settings are not saved. VST effect plug-ins are available in VST 3 and VST 2 format. NOTE In this manual, VST presets stands for VST 3 instrument presets, unless stated otherwise. Extracting the Sound from an Instrument Track or VST Preset For instrument tracks, you can extract the sound of an instrument track preset or VST preset. PROCEDURE 1. Select the instrument track to which you want to apply a sound. 2.
Track Handling Track Presets RESULT The preset is applied. Sampler Track Presets You can use sampler track presets to reuse created sounds in later projects or newly created sampler tracks.
Track Handling Track Presets Loading Track or VST Presets You can apply track or VST presets to selected tracks. PROCEDURE 1. In the Project window, select a track. 2. Do one of the following: ● In the Inspector, click Load Track Preset. ● In the track list, right-click the track and select Load Track Preset. ● In the Sampler Control toolbar, click the Preset Management button next to the Preset Name field and select Load Track Preset. 3.
Track Handling Track Presets 2. Click Preset Management in the top right corner of the Quick Controls section and select one of the presets. The Track Quick Control assignment changes and gives you access to the channel parameters. NOTE You can also make your own assignments and save them as presets, and delete, rename, or reset the presets to the default assignments. 198 Cubase Pro 10.5.
Parts and Events Parts and events are the basic building blocks in Cubase. Events In Cubase, most event types can be viewed and edited on their specific tracks in the Project window. Events can be added by importing or recording. RELATED LINKS Audio Regions on page 201 MIDI Events on page 202 Audio Events Audio events are created automatically when you record or import audio in the Project window. You can view and edit audio events in the Project window and in the Sample Editor.
Parts and Events Events ● Copy an event from a different Cubase project and paste it in the event display. RELATED LINKS Basic Recording Methods on page 264 Audio File Import on page 285 Importing Audio CD Tracks on page 288 Importing Audio from Video Files on page 291 MediaBay and Media Rack on page 620 Audio Part Editor on page 572 Sample Editor on page 506 Creating New Files From Events An audio event plays a section of an audio clip, which in turn refers to one or more audio files on the hard disk.
Parts and Events Events correct positions. You will hear this as a single recording, with processing applied to one section only. This allows you to undo processing at a later stage, and to apply different processing to different audio clips that refer to the same original file. You can view and edit audio clips in the Pool. RELATED LINKS Pool on page 601 Audio Regions on page 201 Replacing Clips in Events on page 201 Replacing Clips in Events You can replace the clips in audio events.
Parts and Events Events 3. In the Create Regions dialog, enter a name for the regions, and click OK. RESULT A region is created in the corresponding clip, with the start and end position of the region determined by the start and end position of the event or selection range within the clip. RELATED LINKS Creating Regions on page 524 Creating Events from Regions You can create events from regions. These replace the original event. PROCEDURE 1.
Parts and Events Parts MediaBay and Media Rack on page 620 Parts Parts are containers for MIDI or audio events, and for tracks. RELATED LINKS Audio Parts on page 203 MIDI Parts on page 203 Folder Parts on page 203 Audio Parts Audio parts are containers for audio events. If you want to treat several audio events as one unit in the Project window, you can convert them to a part. You can create audio parts in the following ways: ● Select the Draw tool and draw on the audio track.
Parts and Events Editing Techniques for Parts and Events NOTE If you want to edit the individual tracks within the folder, you can double-click the folder part. This opens the editors for the events and parts that are present on the tracks. RELATED LINKS Event Colors Menu on page 796 Group Editing Mode on page 220 Editing Techniques for Parts and Events This section describes techniques for editing in the Project window.
Parts and Events Editing Techniques for Parts and Events RELATED LINKS Project Window Toolbar on page 45 Previewer Section on page 641 Scrubbing The Scrub tool allows you to locate positions in events by playing back, forwards or backwards. PROCEDURE 1. Click Play. 2. Click again to open a pop-up menu. 3. Select Scrub. 4. Click the event and keep the mouse button pressed. 5. Drag to the left or right. RESULT The project cursor moves correspondingly and the event is played back.
Parts and Events Editing Techniques for Parts and Events Combine Selection Tools Mode The Combine Selection Tools mode allows you to combine the Object Selection tool and the Range Selection tool. This is useful in situations where you often switch between these tools. If you activate Combine Selection Tools on the Project window toolbar and the track height is set to at least 2 rows, the vertical track height of each track is divided into two areas.
Parts and Events Editing Techniques for Parts and Events From Cursor to End Selects all events that start to the right of the project cursor. Equal Pitch all Octaves/Equal Pitch same Octave These functions are available in the MIDI editors and the Sample Editor. Select Controllers in Note Range This function is available in the MIDI editors. All on Selected Tracks Selects all events on the selected track.
Parts and Events Editing Techniques for Parts and Events RELATED LINKS Moving Events with the Object Selection Tool on page 208 Moving Events with the Nudge Buttons on page 208 Move to Submenu on page 208 Moving Events via the Info Line on page 209 Setting Spacers between Events on page 209 Moving Events with the Object Selection Tool You can select one or several events with the Object Selection tool and drag them to a new position. PROCEDURE 1. Select Object Selection . 2.
Parts and Events Editing Techniques for Parts and Events Cursor Moves the selected event to the project cursor position. If you selected several events on the same track, the following events keep their relative position. Origin Moves the selected events to the positions at which they were originally recorded. Selected Track Moves the selected events to separate tracks, starting on the selected track. The events are placed at their current positions.
Parts and Events Editing Techniques for Parts and Events Audio Alignment The Audio Alignment tool allows you to automatically match the timing of similar audio events or selection ranges that you want to play back simultaneously. Audio Alignment allows you to match the timing of different instrument or vocal tracks. You can also solve phasing problems that occur when using different microphones on the same take.
Parts and Events Editing Techniques for Parts and Events Audio Alignment Selection In this section, you define the reference and target events or selection ranges for the alignment operation. In the waveform displays, the overlapping time range between reference and target is highlighted. If multiple targets are selected, a pop-up menu allows you to toggle between their waveforms. Audio Alignment Settings Allow you to activate/deactivate options for analyzing and aligning.
Parts and Events Editing Techniques for Parts and Events NOTE ● If the audio already contains real-time effects, the Audio Alignment tool allows you to bounce it first, keeping the existing effects, or overwrite the existing processing. ● If the audio is in Musical Mode, you must bounce it first. PROCEDURE 1. Select the event or range that you want to use as alignment reference. 2. On the Project window toolbar, click Open Audio Alignment Panel. 3.
Parts and Events Editing Techniques for Parts and Events ● Change the track name, hold down a modifier key, and press Return to rename all events according to the track. Event Resize Options You can resize events by moving their start or end positions individually. To resize events, you can use the Object Selection, the Scrub tool or the Trim tools on the Nudge palette. Resizing also works, if the Combine Selection Tools mode is active.
Parts and Events Editing Techniques for Parts and Events RESULT The event is resized and the content follows. If several events are selected, they are all resized in the same way. RELATED LINKS Project Window Toolbar on page 45 Resizing Events with the Object Selection Tool - Sizing Applies Time Stretch You can move the start or end point of the event and time stretch the content to fit the new event length. PROCEDURE 1. Select Object Selection. 2.
Parts and Events Editing Techniques for Parts and Events ● Click Trim Start Right. ● Click Trim End Left. ● Click Trim End Right. RESULT The start or end position of the selected events are moved by the amount set on the Grid Type pop-up menu. RELATED LINKS Project Window Toolbar on page 45 Resizing Events with the Scrub Tool You can scrub the event when moving the start or end point of the event. PROCEDURE 1. Click Play. 2. Click Play again to open a pop-up menu. 3. Select Scrub. 4.
Parts and Events Editing Techniques for Parts and Events NOTE If you split a MIDI part so that the split position intersects one or several MIDI notes and Split MIDI Events is activated in the Preferences dialog (Editing—MIDI page), the intersected notes are split and new notes are created at the beginning of the second part. If it is deactivated, the notes remain in the first part, but stick out after the end of the part.
Parts and Events Editing Techniques for Parts and Events RELATED LINKS Project Window Toolbar on page 45 Pasting Events You can paste events from the clipboard. PROCEDURE ● Do one of the following: ● Select the events and select Edit > Functions > Paste at Origin to paste the event at the same position from which you cut or copied it.
Parts and Events Editing Techniques for Parts and Events NOTE If you duplicate audio events, the copies always refer to the same audio clip. Repeating Events PROCEDURE ● Do one of the following: ● Select the events and select Edit > Functions > Repeat to open the Repeat Events dialog, that allows you to create a number of real or shared copies of the selected events.
Parts and Events Editing Techniques for Parts and Events Shared Copies Shared copies are useful if you want to create copies that are automatically edited in the same way as the original event. You can convert a shared copy to a real copy by selecting Edit > Functions > Convert to Real Copy. This creates a new version of the clip that you can edit independently. The new clip is automatically added to the Pool.
Parts and Events Editing Techniques for Parts and Events Grouped Events If you edit one of the grouped events in the Project window, all other events in the same group are affected too.
Parts and Events Editing Techniques for Parts and Events 4. Move the tracks that contain the events that you want to edit as a group into the folder track. 5. In the track list for the folder track, click Group Editing . RESULT All events, parts, or ranges inside the folder that have the same start and end time and the same playback priority are temporarily grouped. Locking Events If you want to make sure that you do not edit or move an event by accident, you can lock it.
Parts and Events Editing Techniques for Parts and Events Inverting the Phase of Audio Events You can invert the phase of audio events in the Project window. PROCEDURE 1. In the Project window, select one or multiple audio events. 2. On the info line, click the Invert Phase field. RESULT The phase of the events is inverted. This is reflected on the info line. RELATED LINKS Info Line on page 58 Muting Events You can mute events in the Project window.
Range Editing Editing in the Project window is not restricted to handling whole events and parts. You can also work with selection ranges, which are independent from the event/part and track boundaries. Creating a Selection Range PROCEDURE 1. On the Project window toolbar, select Range Selection. 2. Do one of the following: ● Draw a selection rectangle around the range that you want to select. ● Select Edit > Select, and select one of the menu functions.
Range Editing Creating a Selection Range From Start to Cursor Makes a selection on all tracks, from the start of the project to the project cursor. From Cursor to End Makes a selection on all tracks, from the project cursor to the end of the project. Equal Pitch - all Octaves This function requires that a single note is selected. It selects all notes of this part that have the same pitch in any octave as the selected note. Equal Pitch - same Octave This function requires that a single note is selected.
Range Editing Editing Selection Ranges Selecting Ranges for Several Tracks You can create selection ranges that cover several tracks. It is also possible to exclude tracks from a selection range. PROCEDURE 1. Create a selection range from the first to the last track. 2. Press Ctrl/Cmd and click in the selection range on the tracks that you want to exclude from the selection. Editing Selection Ranges You can edit selection ranges, that is, adjust their size, move or duplicate them, split them, etc.
Range Editing Editing Selection Ranges Moving Selection Ranges PREREQUISITE You have created a selection range. PROCEDURE ● Click the selection range and drag it to a new position. RESULT The contents of the selection range are moved to the new position. If the range intersected events or parts, these are split before moving, so that only the sections within the selection range are affected.
Range Editing Editing Selection Ranges This option is available in Edit > Range. Paste Time Pastes the selection range from the clipboard to the start position and track of the current selection. Existing events are moved to make room for the pasted data. This option is available in Edit > Range. Paste Time at Origin Pastes the selection range from the clipboard to its original position. Existing events are moved to make room for the pasted data. This option is available in Edit > Range.
Playback and Transport Cubase offers multiple methods and functions to control playback and transport. RELATED LINKS Transport on page 1141 Transport Panel The Transport panel contains the main transport functions as well as many other options related to playback and recording. ● To show the Transport panel, select Transport > Transport Panel or press F2.
Playback and Transport Transport Panel Allow you to select what happens when you record over existing MIDI parts. MIDI Auto Quantize Automatic MIDI Record Quantize Activates automatic quantizing during a MIDI recording. Locators Go to Left Locator Position Allows you to go to the left locator position. Left Locator Position Shows the left locator position. Go to Right Locator Position Allows you to go to the right locator position. Right Locator Position Shows the right locator position.
Playback and Transport Transport Panel Punch Out Position Allows you to set up the punch out position. For this to work, Lock Punch Points to Locators must be deactivated. To show/hide this, click the points on the divider. Transport Controls Go to Previous Marker/Zero Moves the project cursor to the previous marker/zero position on the timeline. Go to Next Marker/Project End Moves the project cursor to the next marker/project end. Rewind Moves backward. Forward Moves forward.
Playback and Transport Transport Panel Secondary Time Display Shows the position of the project cursor in the selected time format. Markers Jump to Marker Allows you to set and locate marker positions. Open Markers Window Opens the Markers window. Pre-roll & Post-roll Activate Pre-roll Activates pre-roll. Pre-roll Amount Allows you to set the pre-roll position. To show/hide this, click the points on the divider. Activate Post-roll Activates post-roll.
Playback and Transport Transport Panel Open Synchronization Setup Allows you to open the Project Synchronization Setup dialog. Click & Count-In & Click Pattern Activate Metronome Click Activates the metronome click. Activate Count-in Activates the metronome click in count-in. Click Pattern Allows you to set up a click pattern. To show/hide this, click the points on the divider. Open Metronome Setup Opens the Metronome Setup dialog. To show/hide this, click the points on the divider.
Playback and Transport Transport Menu Opens a pop-up menu where you can set up which elements are visible. RELATED LINKS Transport on page 1141 Transport - Scrub on page 1142 Transport Menu The Transport menu contains several transport functions as well as many other options related to playback and recording. Transport Panel Opens the Transport panel. Transport Commands Start Starts playback. Stop Stops playback. Start/Stop Starts/Stops playback. Cycle Activates/Deactivates cycle mode.
Playback and Transport Transport Menu Go to Project Start Moves the project cursor position to the start of the project. Go to Project End Moves the project cursor position to the end of the project. Exchange Time Formats Switches the primary and the secondary time display. Locators Go to Left Locator Position Moves the project cursor position to the left locator. Go to Right Locator Position Moves the project cursor position to the right locator.
Playback and Transport Transport Menu Set Punch In to Project Cursor Position Moves the punch in position to the project cursor position. Set Punch Out to Project Cursor Position Moves the punch out position to the project cursor position. Enter Punch In Position Allows you to enter the punch in position manually. Enter Punch Out Position Allows you to enter the punch out position manually. Set Punch Points to Selection Range Sets the punch in and the punch out position to the selected event range.
Playback and Transport Transport Menu Play Selection Range Activates playback from the start of the current selection and stops at the selection end. Pre-roll & Post-roll Use Pre-roll Activates/Deactivates the pre-roll. Use Post-roll Activates/Deactivates the post-roll. Post-roll from Selection Start Starts playback from the beginning of the selected range and stops after the time set in the post-roll field on the Transport panel.
Playback and Transport Transport Menu MIDI Record Mode These options allow you to select what happens when you record over existing parts. New Parts Keeps existing parts and saves the new recording as a new part. Merge Keeps existing events in parts and adds the newly recorded events. Replace Replaces existing events in parts by the new recording. Auto Quantize in Record Activates automatic quantizing during recording. MIDI Cycle Record Mode Mix Adds everything you record to what was previously recorded.
Playback and Transport Transport Bar Use Video Follows Edit Mode If this option is activated, the project cursor automatically follows when you make selections or when you perform editing operations. Metronome Setup Opens the Metronome Setup dialog. Activate Metronome Activates/Deactivates the metronome click. Project Synchronization Setup Opens the Project Synchronization Setup dialog. Activate External Sync Sets Cubase to be synchronized externally.
Playback and Transport Transport Bar ● To show/hide tools, open the Transport Bar context menu by right-clicking in an empty area of the Transport Bar and activate the tools that you want to display. To show all tools, select Show All. Constrain Delay Compensation Constrain Delay Compensation Minimizes the latency effects of the delay compensation.
Playback and Transport Transport Bar Shows the left locator position. Go to Right Locator Position Allows you to go to the right locator position. Right Locator Position Shows the right locator position. Locator Range Duration Locators to Selection Allows you to set the locators to the selection. Locator Range Duration Shows the duration of the locator range. Punch Points Punch In Activates Punch In. Punch Out Activates Punch Out.
Playback and Transport Transport Bar Rewind Moves backward. Forward Moves forward. Cycle Activates/Deactivates cycle mode. Stop Stops playback. Start Starts playback. Transport Record Activates/Deactivates record mode. Retrospective Record Insert Retrospective Recording from All MIDI Inputs on Selected Track Allows you to recover MIDI notes that you played in stop mode or during playback. Time Displays Select Primary Time Format Allows you to select a time format for the primary time display.
Playback and Transport Transport Bar Open Markers Window Opens the Markers window. Pre-roll & Post-roll Activate Pre-roll Activates pre-roll. Pre-roll Amount Allows you to set the pre-roll position. To show/hide this, click the points on the divider. Activate Post-roll Activates post-roll. Post-roll Amount Allows you to set the post-roll position. To show/hide this, click the points on the divider. Tempo & Time Signature Activate Tempo Track Allows you to activate/deactivate the tempo track.
Playback and Transport Transport Bar Click & Count-in Activate Metronome Click Activates the metronome click. Activate Count-in Activates the metronome click in count-in. Click Pattern Allows you to set up a click pattern. To show/hide this, click the points on the divider. Open Metronome Setup Opens the Metronome Setup dialog. To show/hide this, click the points on the divider. Input/Output Activity MIDI In Activity Displays the MIDI input signals. MIDI Out Activity Displays the MIDI output signals.
Playback and Transport Transport Pop-Up Window Transport Pop-Up Window The Transport pop-up window allows you to access specific transport commands if the Transport panel, the Transport Bar, and theTransport Controls in the Project window toolbar are closed or hidden.
Playback and Transport Left and Right Locators Right-click the window to access the following options: Bars+Beats Displays the time in bars and beats. Seconds Displays the time in seconds. fps Displays the time in frames per second. Samples Displays the time in samples. Show Beat Count Only Shows the beat counts only. This is useful if you want to use the Time Display window as a visual metronome. Increase Window Size Increases the size of the window and the displayed values.
Playback and Transport Left and Right Locators ● Defining start and stop positions for recording. ● Defining start positions for importing or exporting events. ● Setting up a cycle range. ● Selecting, copying, creating or splitting events. Locators are indicated by the flags in the ruler. The area between the left and the right locator is the locator range. The locator range is highlighted in the ruler and the event display.
Playback and Transport Left and Right Locators Setting the Left Locator Setting the left locator can be useful if you want to add a reference position in the Project window and in the editors. PROCEDURE ● Do one of the following: ● ● Press Ctrl/Cmd and click in the upper part of the ruler to set the left locator to that position. Adjust the Left Locator Position value. This is available in the Locators section of the Project window toolbar, the editor toolbars, the Transport panel, and the Transport Bar.
Playback and Transport Setting the Project Cursor RESULT The locator range is set up and highlighted in the ruler and the event display. Moving Locator Ranges In the ruler, you can move the locator range. PREREQUISITE You have set up a locator range. PROCEDURE 1. Move the mouse pointer to the upper part of the ruler inside a locator range. A hand symbol is shown. 2. Click and drag to the left or to the right to move the locator range.
Playback and Transport Time Formats The project cursor moves from the left side to the right side of the window. When the project cursor reaches the right side of the window, the ruler and the project cursor jump to the left side of the window and start over again. This behavior can be compared to turning a page of a book. Stationary Cursor The project cursor is kept in the middle of the window and the ruler scrolls continuously to the left.
Playback and Transport Pre-Roll and Post-Roll Independent Time Displays You can show time displays that are independent from the global display format. To select an independent time display, do one of the following: ● In the ruler of the Project window or any editor, click the arrow button to the right of the ruler. ● Select Project > Add Track > Ruler to add a ruler track, and right-click the ruler. ● In the Main Transport section of the Transport panel, click Select Secondary Time Format.
Playback and Transport Punch In and Punch Out 6. In the Pre-roll & Post-roll section, activate Pre-roll and Post-roll . 7. In the Pre-roll Amount and Post-roll Amount fields, enter the pre-roll and post-roll values. 8. Activate Record. RESULT The project cursor rolls back by the specified pre-roll value and playback starts. When the cursor reaches the left locator, recording is automatically activated.
Playback and Transport Metronome Click ● To set up the sounds for the metronome click, select Transport > Metronome Setup and make your changes on the Click Sounds tab. RELATED LINKS Transport Panel Sections on page 228 Project Tempo Modes on page 989 Click Patterns Click patterns allow you to create a custom metronome click. By default, the metronome click in Cubase has a 4/4 pattern with a fixed number of 4 clicks. The click level of the first click is high, while the level of the other beats is low.
Playback and Transport Metronome Click Setting up Metronome Click Patterns for Signature Events on page 254 Project Window Toolbar on page 45 Click Pattern Editor The Click Pattern Editor allows you to set up a click pattern for your project to create new grooves and feels for the metronome click. This is useful if you want to create a triplet pattern for a 4/4 signature, for example. The Click Pattern Editor is available in the Transport Bar.
Playback and Transport Metronome Click ● Use the Clicks setting to define the number of clicks that you want to hear, and click in the event display to set up a new click pattern. 4. When you are done, click outside the Click Pattern Editor to close it. 5. Activate the metronome click. RESULT The metronome click is played back with the defined click pattern.
Playback and Transport Metronome Click RELATED LINKS General Tab on page 256 Click Sounds Tab on page 257 Click Patterns Tab on page 259 Transport Bar Sections on page 238 255 Cubase Pro 10.5.
Playback and Transport Metronome Click General Tab The General tab allows you to make basic metronome settings. In the topmost section, the following options are available: Activate Metronome Click Activates/Deactivates the metronome click. In the Click Destinations section, the following options are available: Use MIDI Click Activates a MIDI click for the metronome. Use Audio Click Activates an audio click for the metronome that is output via the audio hardware.
Playback and Transport Metronome Click In the Count-In section, the following options are available: ● Number of Bars in Count-In Allows you to set the number of bars that the metronome counts in before recording starts. ● Time Signature at Record Start Position Activate this to let the count-in automatically use the time signature and tempo set at the position where recording starts. ● Time Signature at Project Position Activate this to let the count-in use the time signature at the project position.
Playback and Transport Metronome Click Note Allows you to set the MIDI note number, that is, the pitch from C-2 to G8. Set the note number for the first beat in a bar in the top row, and the note numbers for the other beats in the rows below. Velocity Allows you to set the velocity of the MIDI click sound. Set the velocity for the first beat in a bar in the top row, and the velocities for the other beats in the rows below.
Playback and Transport Metronome Click 2. In the Sound column, click the top row. 3. In the file dialog, navigate to the audio file that you want to use as a custom sound for the first beat and select it. 4. Click Open. 5. Click the other rows to select audio files for the other beats. 6. Set the level of the sounds by clicking the respective rows in the Level column and adjusting the value. 7. Optional: Click Play to audition the custom sounds.
Playback and Transport Chase 4 Add New Pattern Double-click to add a new click pattern for the time signature. 5 Clicks Allows you to change the number of clicks used in the click pattern. 6 Click Pattern Shows the click pattern. You can open the Click Pattern Editor by clicking the pattern. 7 Remove Click Pattern Removes the click pattern from the list of available patterns. 8 Add New Pattern Adds a new default click pattern for the time signature.
Playback and Transport Chase The Chase function takes care of that. If program change events are set to be chased, Cubase tracks the music back to the beginning, finds the first program change, and transmits it to your synth, setting it to the correct sound. The same can apply to other event types as well. In the Preferences dialog (MIDI page), the Chase Events settings determine which event types are chased when you locate to a new position and start playback.
On-Screen Keyboard The On-Screen Keyboard allows you to play and record MIDI notes by using your computer keyboard or mouse. This is useful if you have no external MIDI instrument at hand and you do not want to draw in notes with the Draw tool. When the On-Screen Keyboard is displayed, the usual key commands are blocked because they are reserved for the On-Screen Keyboard.
On-Screen Keyboard On-Screen Keyboard Options On-Screen Keyboard Options The On-Screen Keyboard offers different display modes as well as other options. ● To open the On-Screen Keyboard, select Studio > On-Screen Keyboard. 1 Note Velocity Level This slider allows you to adjust the volume of the On-Screen Keyboard. You can also use Up Arrow or Down Arrow for this. 2 Change On-Screen Keyboard Type This button allows you to switch between computer keyboard and piano keyboard display mode.
Recording In Cubase, you can record audio and MIDI. Make the following initial preparations: ● Set up, connect, and calibrate your audio hardware. ● Open a project and set up the parameters in the Project Setup dialog according to your specifications. The parameters in the Project Setup dialog determine the record file format, sample rate, project length, etc. that affect the audio recordings that you make during the course of the project.
Recording Basic Recording Methods RELATED LINKS Editing - Project & MixConsole on page 1126 VST on page 1144 Record Enabling Tracks on Selection You can set up a preference so that tracks are record-enabled when you select them. PROCEDURE 1. Select Edit > Preferences. 2. Open the Editing—Project & MixConsole page and activate Enable Record on Selected Audio Track or Enable Record on Selected MIDI Track. RESULT The tracks are record-enabled when you select them.
Recording Basic Recording Methods If cycle mode is activated, and the punch in point corresponds to the left locator position, and the punch out point is positioned before the right locator, recording is stopped at the punch out position and resumed at the punch in position. If the punch positions are locked to the locators, recording is automatically activated when the project cursor reaches the left locator.
Recording Basic Recording Methods Stopping Recording and Playback You can stop recording and playback manually. PROCEDURE ● Do one of the following: ● Click Stop on the Transport panel. ● Press Num 0. RESULT Recording and playback stops. Cycle Recording You can record in a cycle, that is, you can record a selected section repeatedly and seamlessly. PREREQUISITE A cycle is set up with the left and right locators. PROCEDURE 1. Click Activate Cycle on the Transport panel to activate cycle mode. 2.
Recording Basic Recording Methods RESULT The project cursor rolls back and starts playback at the time that has been set as pre-roll amount. When the cursor reaches the left locator, recording is automatically activated. When the cursor reaches the right locator, recording is deactivated, and playback continues for the time that has been set as post-roll amount. Common Record Modes Menu The Common Record Modes determine what happens if you click Record during an audio or MIDI recording.
Recording Monitoring Monitoring In Cubase, monitoring means listening to the input signal while preparing to record or while recording. The following ways of monitoring are available. ● Via Cubase. ● Externally by listening to the signal before it reaches Cubase. ● By using ASIO Direct Monitoring. This is a combination of both other methods. Monitoring via Cubase If you use monitoring via Cubase, the input signal is mixed with the audio playback.
Recording Monitoring ASIO Direct Monitoring If your audio hardware is ASIO 2.0 compatible, it may support ASIO Direct Monitoring. This feature may also be available for audio hardware with macOS drivers. In ASIO Direct Monitoring mode, the monitoring is done in the audio hardware, and monitoring is controlled from Cubase. The latency value of the audio hardware configuration does not affect the monitor signal when using ASIO Direct Monitoring. PROCEDURE 1. In the track list, activate Monitor. 2.
Recording Audio Recording Specifics RESULT Incoming MIDI is echoed back out again. RELATED LINKS MIDI on page 1132 Audio Recording Specifics Specific preparations and settings are required for audio recording. Audio Recording Preparations Before you can record audio, you must make some preparations. Selecting a Record File Format You can set up the record file format, that is, the sample rate, bit depth, and record file type for new audio files. PROCEDURE 1. Select Project > Project Setup. 2.
Recording Audio Recording Specifics Getting the Track Ready for Recording Before you can record audio, you must add a track and set it up. Adding a Track and Setting the Channel Configuration To record audio, you must add an audio track and set up its channel configuration. The channel configuration of the track determines the channel configuration of the recorded audio file. PROCEDURE 1. In the global track controls area of the track list, click Add Track . 2. Click Audio. 3.
Recording Audio Recording Specifics Audio Recording You can record audio using any of the basic recording methods. When you finish recording, an audio file is created in the Audio folder within the project folder. In the Pool, an audio clip is created for the audio file, and an audio event that plays the whole clip appears on the recording track. Finally, a waveform image is calculated for the audio event. If the recording was very long, this may take a while.
Recording Audio Recording Specifics When you are recording with effects, consider using 32-bit float or 64-bit float format. This way, the bit depth will not be reduced, which means there is no risk of clipping at this stage. Also, this preserves the signal quality perfectly. If you record in 16-bit or 24-bit format, the available headroom is lower, which means clipping can occur if the signal is too loud.
Recording Audio Recording Specifics ● You hit Record too late. For this to work, you must specify an audio pre-record time. ● The system failed during recording. Specifying an Audio Pre-Record Time You can capture up to 1 minute of any incoming audio that you play in stop mode or during playback. This is possible because Cubase can capture audio input in buffer memory, even when not recording. PROCEDURE 1. In the Preferences dialog, select Record > Audio. 2.
Recording MIDI Recording Specifics MIDI Recording Specifics Specific preparations and settings are required for MIDI recordings. RELATED LINKS MIDI Recording Specifics on page 276 Recording in MIDI Editors on page 277 MIDI Record Modes on page 280 MIDI Recording Preparations The preparations described in the following sections mainly focus on external MIDI devices. MIDI Instruments and Channels Most MIDI synthesizers can play several sounds at the same time, each on a different MIDI channel.
Recording MIDI Recording Specifics NOTE If you select All MIDI Inputs, the track will receive MIDI data from all available MIDI inputs. Setting the MIDI Channel and Output The MIDI channel and output settings determine where the recorded MIDI is routed during playback. They are also relevant for monitoring MIDI in Cubase. You can select the channel and output in the track list or in the Inspector. PROCEDURE 1. In the track list, select the track to which you want to assign a MIDI channel and output. 2.
Recording MIDI Recording Specifics PROCEDURE 1. Click in the MIDI editor so that it gets the focus. 2. In the MIDI editor toolbar, activate Record in Editor. 3. Do one of the following to activate recording: ● Click Record on the Transport panel. ● Click Record on the toolbar. RESULT The MIDI data is recorded into the MIDI part that is opened in the MIDI editor. If you record outside the part borders, the part is automatically enlarged.
Recording MIDI Recording Specifics Note Messages Cubase records note on, note off, and MIDI channel messages. If you press and release a key on your synthesizer or on another MIDI keyboard, the following messages are recorded: ● Note On (key down) ● Note Off (key up) ● MIDI channel NOTE Normally, the MIDI channel information is overridden by the MIDI channel setting for the track. However, if you set the track to the Any MIDI channel, the notes will be played back on their original channels.
Recording MIDI Recording Specifics ● If you want Cubase to insert a reset event at the end of a recorded part, activate Insert Reset Events after Record in the Preferences dialog (MIDI page). This resets controller data such as sustain, aftertouch, pitchbend, modulation, and breath control. This is useful if a MIDI part is recorded and the sustain pedal is still held after stopping recording. Usually, this would cause all following parts to be played with sustain, as the pedal off command was not recorded.
Recording MIDI Recording Specifics Stacked Each recorded cycle lap is turned into a separate MIDI part, and the track is divided into lanes, one for each cycle lap. The parts are stacked above each other, each on a different lane. All takes but the last one are muted. Mix-Stacked (No Mute) Same as Stacked, but parts are not muted.
Recording MIDI Recording Specifics RELATED LINKS Record - MIDI on page 1138 Emptying the Retrospective Record Buffer on page 284 Inserting a Retrospective Recording from All MIDI Inputs on the Selected Track You can insert a retrospective recording, that is, MIDI data that was sent to All MIDI Inputs in Stop mode or during playback, on the selected track. PREREQUISITE You have played some MIDI notes in Stop mode or during playback, and you want to recover them. PROCEDURE 1.
Recording MIDI Recording Specifics 3. From the pop-up menu, select one of the following: ● To insert the MIDI data as one, continuous MIDI part, select Insert as Linear Recording. ● To insert the MIDI data as stacked MIDI parts, select Insert as Cycle Recording. NOTE This is only available if your MIDI data was captured during playback, and cycle mode was active. RESULT The MIDI data that was captured at the track input is inserted on the track.
Recording Remaining Record Time Emptying the Retrospective Record Buffer You can empty the retrospective record buffer manually. PROCEDURE ● Do one of the following: ● In the top section of the MIDI track Inspector, open the Retrospective Recording pop-up menu, and select Empty Retrospective Record Buffer. ● Select a track, and select Transport > MIDI Retrospective Recording > Empty All Buffers. Remaining Record Time The Max. Record Time display lets you see how much time you have left for recording.
Importing Audio and MIDI Files You can add audio and MIDI files to your project by importing them. Audio File Import You can import compressed and uncompressed audio files in a variety of different formats. You can also import audio from audio CDs or extract the audio of video files.
Importing Audio and MIDI Files Audio File Import Import Options Dialog for Audio Files The Import Options dialog allows you to make specific settings for the audio import. ● When you import audio files and Open Options Dialog is activated in the On Import Audio Files section of the Preferences dialog (Editing—Audio page), the Import Options dialog opens.
Importing Audio and MIDI Files Audio File Import The Name Format pop-up menu allows you to specify how the split files are named. This allows for compatibility with other products when exchanging audio files. Do not ask again Always imports files according to the settings without opening the dialog again. You can reset this option in the Preferences dialog (Editing—Audio page).
Importing Audio and MIDI Files Audio File Import NOTE If Use Settings is activated in the Preferences dialog (Editing—Audio page), the corresponding import settings are used instead. RESULT In the Project window, an event referencing the audio file is inserted on the selected track at the project cursor position. If no track was selected, a new track is created. A new audio clip is created and added to the Pool.
Importing Audio and MIDI Files Audio File Import 4. Click the Copy button to create a local copy of the audio files or sections. 5. Click OK. RESULT The copied audio files are imported into the Project window and inserted on new tracks at the project cursor position. By default, imported audio CD tracks are saved as wave files (Windows) or AIFF files (macOS) in the Audio folder of the current project. New audio clips are created and added to the Pool.
Importing Audio and MIDI Files Audio File Import Secure Mode (Windows only) Activates error checking and correction when reading the CD. Columns The columns in the dialog have the following functions: Copy Activate this option for the tracks that you want to copy/import. # Shows the track number. CD Track The name of the CD track. On import, this is used as file name. It is provided automatically from CDDB, if available. To rename a track, click the track name and enter a new name.
Importing Audio and MIDI Files Audio File Import Destination Folder Allows you to select a folder for the imported files. Copy Copies the files. Copied Files Lists the files that you copied for import. Importing Audio from Video Files You can import the audio from a video file without importing the video itself. PROCEDURE 1. Select File > Import > Audio from Video File. 2. In the file dialog that opens, locate and select the video file, and click Open.
Importing Audio and MIDI Files MIDI File Import AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK Open the part in the Audio Part Editor to edit each slice separately by muting, moving, and resizing events, adding effects and processing, for example. You can also adjust the tempo and have the REX file automatically follow, provided that its track is set to a musical time base. NOTE You can achieve similar results by using Cubase’s own loop slicing features.
Importing Audio and MIDI Files MIDI File Import Auto Dissolve Format 0 Automatically dissolves imported MIDI files of type 0. Each embedded MIDI channel in the file is placed on a separate track in the Project window. Destination Allows you to specify what happens when you drag a MIDI file into the project. ● MIDI Tracks creates MIDI tracks for the imported file.
Importing Audio and MIDI Files MIDI File Import MIDI Loops In Cubase, you can import MIDI loops. To import MIDI loops, use the MediaBay. MIDI loops have the file extension .midiloop. RELATED LINKS Importing MIDI Loops on page 730 294 Cubase Pro 10.5.
Quantizing MIDI and Audio Quantizing means moving recorded audio or MIDI and positioning it on the nearest grid position that is musically relevant. Quantizing is designed to correct errors, but you can also use it in a creative way. You can quantize audio and MIDI to a grid or to a groove. You can also quantize multiple audio tracks simultaneously. Audio and MIDI can be quantized at the same time.
Quantizing MIDI and Audio Quantizing MIDI Event Starts Cuts off the ends of selected MIDI events so that the events match the length quantize value. The start positions are kept. ● Quantize MIDI Event Ends Moves the ends of MIDI events to the nearest grid positions. ● Freeze MIDI Quantize Makes the start and end positions of MIDI events permanent. This function is useful in situations where you want to quantize a second time, based on the current quantized positions rather than the original positions.
Quantizing MIDI and Audio Quantizing MIDI Event Lengths Quantizing MIDI Event Lengths You can quantize the MIDI event lengths. PREREQUISITE You have set up a length quantize value on the Length Quantize pop-up menu on the Key Editor toolbar. PROCEDURE 1. 2. Perform one of the following actions: ● In the Key Editor, select the MIDI events that you want to quantize. ● In the Project window, select a MIDI part. Select Edit > Advanced Quantize > Quantize MIDI Event Lengths.
Quantizing MIDI and Audio Quantizing Audio Event Lengths (AudioWarp Quantizing) PROCEDURE 1. In the Project window, select an audio event, a sliced loop, or an audio part. 2. Select Edit > Quantize. RESULT The event snap point, or, if not available, the start of the audio event, is quantized. Event starts that do not match exact note positions are moved to the closest grid positions. NOTE If you use the Quantize function on an audio part, the starts of the events inside the part are quantized.
Quantizing MIDI and Audio Quantizing Multiple Audio Tracks 2. Click Folder. 3. Click Add Track. 4. Move all audio tracks that you want to quantize into the folder track. NOTE The audio on all tracks must have the same start and end positions. 5. Select the folder track and activate Group Editing in the track list. 6. In the event display, select one of the events. All audio events contained in the folder track are selected. 7.
Quantizing MIDI and Audio Quantize Panel RESULT AudioWarp quantizing is applied to all tracks in the edit group. RELATED LINKS Quantize Panel on page 300 Group Editing Mode on page 220 Quantize Panel The Quantize Panel allows you to define how to quantize audio or MIDI to the grid or to a groove. Depending on what method you choose, different parameters are shown. To open the Quantize Panel, perform one of the following actions: ● Click Open Quantize Panel on the toolbar. ● Select Edit > Quantize Panel.
Quantizing MIDI and Audio Quantize Panel Quantize Presets To the top of the Quantize Panel the quantize presets are shown. Here, you can load and save presets that include all settings for quantizing. Select Preset Allows you to select a preset. Save Preset Allows you to save the current settings as a preset, so that they become available on all Quantize Presets pop-up menus. Remove Preset Allows you to remove the selected preset. Rename Preset Opens a dialog where you can rename the selected preset.
Quantizing MIDI and Audio Quantize Panel The hitpoints for the audio event are detected and displayed automatically. 3. Click Create Groove. The groove is extracted. RESULT The groove is extracted from the audio event and made available in the Quantize Presets popup menu on the Project window toolbar. AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK Open the Quantize Panel and save the groove as a preset.
Quantizing MIDI and Audio Quantize Panel NOTE Swing is only available if Grid is set to a straight value and Tuplet is deactivated. Catch Range Allows you to set a value that determines that quantizing affects only audio or MIDI within the set distance from the grid lines. This is reflected in the grid display. Non-Quantize Range Creates a safe zone before and after the quantize positions. If you specify a distance in ticks (120 ticks = one 16th note), events that lie within this zone are not quantized.
Quantizing MIDI and Audio Quantize Panel Quantize Applies your settings. Options for Quantizing to a Groove You can generate a timing grid from a MIDI part or an audio loop, and use this groove to quantize your recorded music. This way, you can recreate the rhythmic feel of this specific event or part.
Quantizing MIDI and Audio Quantize Panel Pre-Q Allows you to select a musical grid to which you can quantize your audio or MIDI first. This gets the notes closer to their groove destination. NOTE If you apply a shuffle groove to a 16th-note pattern, for example, set up a prequantize value of 16 to straighten up the timing before applying the groove quantizing. Max. Move Allows you to select a note value to specify a maximum distance that the audio or MIDI can be moved. Orig.
Quantizing MIDI and Audio Quantize Panel RELATED LINKS Creating Groove Quantize Presets on page 301 Options for Quantizing Multiple Audio Tracks If you quantize multiple audio tracks, the Slice Rules section becomes available in the Quantize Panel. Here, you determine how the audio events are sliced at the hitpoints. ● To access the Slice Rules section, move your audio tracks to a folder track, activate Group Editing, and open the Quantize Panel.
Quantizing MIDI and Audio Quantize Panel Group Editing Mode on page 220 Crossfades Section The Crossfades section becomes available after you have sliced the audio events. The functions in this section allow you to correct the overlaps or the gaps that might appear due to the repositioning of your audio.
Quantizing MIDI and Audio Quantize Panel If no star is shown, the hitpoints on the corresponding track are not taken into account. Range Two hitpoints on different tracks are considered to mark the same beat if they are located within a certain distance from each other. The Range parameter specifies this distance. The following rules apply: ● If one of the tracks has a higher priority, its hitpoint is used to create the warp marker.
Fades, Crossfades, and Envelopes Fades allow you to gradually increase or decrease the volume at the start or end of audio events or audio clips, and to create smooth transitions. You can create the following fades: ● Fade ins/fade outs Fade ins and fade outs allow you to gradually increase or decrease the volume of audio events or audio clips. Fade ins and fade outs can be either event-based or clip-based. Event-based fades are calculated in real time when you play back audio events.
Fades, Crossfades, and Envelopes Event-Based Fades ● By using range selections You can edit event-based fades in the Fade dialogs. RELATED LINKS Creating and Editing Fades with the Handles on page 310 Creating and Editing Fades with the Range Selection Tool on page 311 Fade Dialog for Event-Based Fades on page 312 Creating and Editing Fades with the Handles You can create and edit event-based fade ins and fade outs using the event handles.
Fades, Crossfades, and Envelopes Event-Based Fades In the upper left and right corners, you find triangular fade handles that allow you to change the fade-in or fade-out length. In the top middle, you find a square handle that allows you to change the volume. ● To change the fade-in length, drag the fade handle in the upper left to the right or to the left. ● To change the fade-out length, drag the fade handle in the upper right to the left or to the right.
Fades, Crossfades, and Envelopes Event-Based Fades 2. Select Audio > Remove Fades. Fade Dialog for Event-Based Fades The fade dialog for event-based fades allows you to set up the selected event-based fades. ● To open the dialog for event-based fades, create a fade for one or more audio events, select the events and select Audio > Open Fade Editor(s). NOTE If you select several events, you can adjust the fade curves for all selected events at the same time.
Fades, Crossfades, and Envelopes Creating Clip-Based Fades 6 Length field Allows you to enter fade lengths numerically. The format of values displayed here is determined by the time display on the Transport panel. 7 ● If you activate Apply Length, the value entered in the Fade Length value field is used when clicking Apply or OK. ● If you set the current fade as the default fade, the length value is included as part of the default settings. As Default Saves the current settings as default fade.
Fades, Crossfades, and Envelopes Crossfades New Version Click New Version to create a separate, new version of the audio clip for the selected event. Crossfades Crossfades allow you to create smooth transitions for consecutive audio events on the same track. Crossfades are always event-based. You can only create crossfades if the consecutive events or their respective clips overlap. ● If the audio events overlap, a crossfade of the default shape (linear, symmetric) is applied in the overlapping area.
Fades, Crossfades, and Envelopes Crossfades 2. Select a range between two events that covers the length of the crossfade you want to apply. 3. Select Audio > Adjust Fades to Range. RESULT The crossfade length is adjusted to the selected range. Crossfade Editor The Crossfade editor allows you to edit crossfades. It contains fade-in and fade-out curve settings, and common settings.
Fades, Crossfades, and Envelopes Crossfades Default buttons Click As Default to store the current settings as default. Default settings are used whenever you create new crossfades. Click Recall Default to apply the curves and settings of the default crossfade. Length Specifies the length of the crossfade area. Cubase tries to center the crossfade, that is, the length change is applied equally to both sides. To be able to resize a crossfade, it must be possible to resize the corresponding event.
Fades, Crossfades, and Envelopes Auto Fades and Crossfades RESULT The selected crossfades are removed. NOTE You can also remove a crossfade by clicking and dragging it outside the track. Auto Fades and Crossfades Cubase features an Auto Fade function that can be set both globally and separately for each audio track. Auto fades allow you to create smoother transitions between events by applying fade ins and fade outs with a length between 1 and 500 ms.
Fades, Crossfades, and Envelopes Auto Fades and Crossfades 1 Auto Fade In Activates auto fade ins. 2 Auto Fade Out Activates auto fade outs. 3 Auto Crossfades Activates auto crossfades. 4 Use Project Settings This is only available if you opened the Auto Fades dialog for individual tracks. Deactivate this to set up and apply the settings to individual tracks only. If you want a track with individual auto fade settings to use the global settings again, activate Use Project Settings.
Fades, Crossfades, and Envelopes Event Envelopes Provides the settings for auto crossfades. Equal Gain allows you to adjust the fade curves so that the summed fade-in and fade-out amplitudes are the same all along the crossfade region. Equal Power allows you to adjust the fade curves so that the energy (power) of the crossfade is constant all along the crossfade region. Making Global Auto Fade Settings You can set up auto fades and crossfades for the whole project. PROCEDURE 1.
Fades, Crossfades, and Envelopes Event Envelopes Creating Event-Based Volume Changes You can create volume changes for the audio event. PROCEDURE 1. Zoom in on the event so that you can view its waveform properly. 2. Select the Draw tool and click at the position in the event where you want to change the volume. 3. Click with the Draw tool. A curve point is added to the envelope curve. 4. Drag the curve point to adjust the volume curve. RESULT The volume change is created.
Arranger Track The arranger functions in Cubase allow you to work in a non-linear fashion. Using an arranger track allows you to specify how and when specific sections are played back, even in live performances. This way, you do not need to move, copy, and paste events in the Project window. NOTE There can be only one arranger track in a project. To use the arranger functions, you must add an arranger track and define arranger events. Arranger events can be of any length.
Arranger Track Arranger Editor AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK Use the functions of the Arranger Editor to arrange the events. RELATED LINKS Arranger Track on page 151 Setting up an Arranger Chain and Adding Events on page 325 Snap Function on page 85 Snap Types Menu on page 85 Renaming Arranger Events When you add arranger events, they are automatically named in alphabetical order. You can change the names so that they reflect the structure of your project, such as Intro, Chorus, Bridge, for example.
Arranger Track Arranger Editor Arranger Events Lists the available arranger events in the order they appear on the timeline. Arranger Editor Toolbar The Arranger Editor contains tools and shortcuts for setting the flatten options. ● To open the Arranger Editor, select an arranger track, and click Open Arranger Editor in the track list. Stop Stops playback. Play Starts playback. Previous Chain Step Navigates to the previous entry in the current arranger chain list.
Arranger Track Arranger Editor Remove Current Chain Removes the selected arranger chain. This is only available if you have created more than one arranger chain. Flatten Converts the current arranger chain into a linear project. Flatten (with Options & Preferences) Allows you to set up the flatten options. Arranger Chain Repeat Modes The Arranger Editor features a function that allows you to repeat and loop your arranger events. This way, you can create a sketch of a song structure.
Arranger Track Setting up an Arranger Chain and Adding Events Checked Chains Opens a list of the available arranger chains where you can activate the arranger tracks that you want to flatten. All Chains Flattens all arranger chains of the current project. The Destination section allows you to choose where the result of the flattening is saved. Current Project This is only available if Source is set to Current Chain. Activate this option if you want to save the flattened chain in the current project.
Arranger Track Setting up an Arranger Chain and Adding Events 4. ● Select one or more events in the Arranger Events list, right-click, and select Append Selected In Arranger Chain. ● Drag an arranger event from the Arranger Events list and drop it in the Current Arranger Chain list. ● Drag an arranger event from the Project window and drop it in the Current Arranger Chain list. Click Play. RESULT The arranger events are played back in the order that you specified in the arranger chain.
Arranger Track Jump Mode Flattening the Arranger Chain When you have set up an arranger chain that you like, and you are sure that you do not want to edit it any more, you can convert it to a linear project. PREREQUISITE You have saved a copy of the project before flattening the arranger chain. NOTE Flattening the arranger chain may remove events and parts from the project. Only use Flatten when you know you do not want to edit the arranger track/chain any more.
Arranger Track Jump Mode RESULT The arranger event is looped according to your settings, until you click another arranger event. NOTE You can assign key commands to trigger arranger events in the Arranger category of the Key Commands dialog. AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK ● To stop Jump Mode, click Stop. ● To continue playback from a specific arranger event, click the arranger event in the Current Arranger Chain list.
Arranger Track Arranging Music to Video End Plays the current section to the end, then jumps to the next section. Arranging Music to Video When you compose music for video, you can use arranger events to fill a specific video section with music. The following is an example on how you could do that. PREREQUISITE You have connected and set up an external sync master device to your computer. You have created a new, empty project and added a MIDI track. PROCEDURE 1.
Transpose Functions The transpose functions for audio and MIDI in Cubase allow you to change the pitches of audio and MIDI for playback without changing the actual MIDI notes or the audio. You can transpose the following: ● An entire project by changing the Project Root Key on the Project window toolbar. ● Specific sections of your project by creating a transpose track and adding transpose events. ● Individual parts or events by changing their transpose value on the Project window info line.
Transpose Functions Project Root Key Transposing with the Project Root Key The loops included in Cubase already contain root key information. If you change the project root key, these loops will follow automatically. PREREQUISITE You have opened a project that contains audio loops with different root keys. PROCEDURE 1. Optional: Select the drum and percussion loops in your project and set the Global Transpose setting on the info line to Independent. This setting excludes the loops from being transposed.
Transpose Functions Project Root Key This setting excludes the loops from being transposed. 3. Select Project > Add Track > Transpose. The transpose track is added to the track list. You can only have one transpose track in a project. 4. In the track list, right-click the transpose track, and from the context menu select Set root key for unassigned events. RESULT All parts or events that do not contain any root key information are set to the project root key.
Transpose Functions Transpose Track 3. Click the Key column for the audio event or part that you want to assign a different root key to, and select a key from the pop-up menu. RESULT The root key of the audio event or part is changed. The corresponding audio file, however, remains unchanged. If you change the project root key, the audio events or parts keep their own root key settings, and are transposed to match the Project Root Key. NOTE You can also assign root keys in the MediaBay.
Transpose Functions Transpose Track Transposing Sections of a Project with Transpose Events You can transpose specific sections of your project by creating transpose events on the transpose track. PROCEDURE 1. Select Project > Add Track > Transpose. The transpose track is added to the track list. You can only have one transpose track in a project. 2. Select the Draw tool and click on the transpose track. A transpose event is created from the point where you clicked until the end of the project. 3.
Transpose Functions Keep Transpose in Octave Range Keep Transpose in Octave Range Keep Transpose in Octave Range on the transpose track keeps the transposition in the octave range. This ensures that nothing is transposed by more than seven semitones, and that your music never sounds unnatural because the pitch was raised too high or too low. We also recommend activating this function, when you work with audio loops. EXAMPLE You have opened the Key Editor and activated Indicate Transpositions .
Transpose Functions Transpose on the Info Line Transpose Track and Recording The transpose track affects the result of the recorded parts or events. If your project contains a transpose track with transpose events, and you record audio or MIDI, the following happens: ● Global Transpose is automatically set to Independent for the recorded parts or events. ● The project root key is not taken into account.
Transpose Functions Excluding Individual Parts or Events from Global Transpose Excluding Individual Parts or Events from Global Transpose If you add global transposition, for example, by changing the root key or by creating transpose events, you can exclude specific events from being transposed. This is useful for drum and percussion loops or special effects (FX) loops. PROCEDURE 1. Select the event or part that you want to exclude from being transposed. 2.
Markers Markers are used to locate certain positions quickly. There are two types of markers: position markers and cycle markers. If you often find yourself jumping to a specific position within a project, you should insert a marker at this position. You can also use markers to make range selections or for zooming. Markers are located on the marker track. You can add up to 10 marker tracks.
Markers Markers Window RESULT The left and right locators are moved to encompass the cycle marker. AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK Now you can move the project cursor position to the start or the end of the cycle marker by moving it to the corresponding locator or use cycle markers to export specific ranges of your project with the Export Audio Mixdown dialog. Editing Cycle Markers When editing cycle markers on a marker track, snap is taken into account.
Markers Markers Window Auto-Scroll with Project Cursor Allows you to keep track of the locate arrow, even if your project contains a large number of markers. If this option is activated, the Marker window is automatically scrolled to keep the locate arrow visible. Markers list Shows the markers in the order in which they occur in the project. Marker Settings Shows the marker settings. Editing in the Markers Window In the Markers window, you can select, edit, add, move, and remove markers.
Markers Markers Window Marker Settings You can make general marker settings for your project. ● To open the marker settings, select Project > Markers, and click Marker Settings . Cycle follows when locating to Markers This sets the left and right locators automatically to a position or cycle marker, when locating to this marker. This is useful if you need to set the locators on the fly during recording for Punch In/Punch Out, for example.
Markers Marker Track NOTE To navigate in the list of marker attributes, you can also use the Tab key and the Up Arrow, Down Arrow, Left Arrow, and Right Arrow keys. Sorting and Reordering Columns You can customize the display of the marker attributes in the marker list by sorting or reordering the columns. ● To sort the marker list by a specific attribute, click on the corresponding column header. NOTE No matter by which attribute you sort, the second sort criterion will always be the position attribute.
Markers Marker Track 1 Add Marker Adds a position marker at the cursor position. 2 Add Cycle Marker Adds a cycle marker at the cursor position. 3 Locate pop-up menu If you select a position or a cycle marker in this pop-up menu, the corresponding marker in the event display or in the Markers window is selected. 4 Activate this track Activates the marker track.
Markers Marker Track NOTE When you remove all marker tracks, the marker track that you removed last (including all its markers) is moved to the clipboard. If you later insert a new marker track, this track is pasted from the clipboard into the track list. Multiple Marker Tracks You can create up to 10 marker tracks. Naming Marker Tracks By default, the first marker track you create is called “Markers”, the second “Marker 01”, and so on.
Markers Importing and Exporting Markers ● To remove a marker, select it and press Delete or use the Erase tool. RELATED LINKS Marker Track on page 342 Using Markers to Select Ranges Markers can be used in conjunction with the Range Selection tool to make range selections in the Project window. This is useful if you quickly want to make a selection that spans all tracks in the project. PROCEDURE 1. Set markers at the start and end of the section that you want to move or copy. 2.
Markers Importing and Exporting Markers Exporting Markers via MIDI You can export your markers as part of a MIDI file. ● To include any markers in the MIDI file, activate Export Markers in the Export Options dialog. The following settings are exported: ● The start position of position markers and cycle markers ● The track assignment of markers ● All marker tracks NOTE To be able to export markers via MIDI export, your project must contain at least one marker track.
MixConsole The MixConsole provides a common environment for producing mixes in stereo or surround. It allows you to control level, pan, solo/mute status, etc. for audio and MIDI channels. Furthermore, you can set up the input and output routing for multiple tracks or channels at the same time. You can undo/redo MixConsole parameter changes for an open project at any time. You can open the MixConsole in a separate window or in the lower zone of the Project window.
MixConsole MixConsole in Lower Zone 1 Page selector Allows you to select what page is displayed in the fader section: the channel faders, the insert effects for a channel, or the send effects. The top button allows you to show/hide the toolbar. 2 Toolbar The toolbar shows tools and shortcuts for settings and functions in the MixConsole. 3 Fader section The fader section is always visible and shows all channels in the same order as in the track list.
MixConsole MixConsole in Lower Zone RESULT The track in the track list and the corresponding MixConsole channel are shown/hidden in the lower zone of the Project window. RELATED LINKS Opening the Visibility on page 65 Showing/Hiding Individual Tracks on page 66 Visibility on page 64 Determining the MixConsole Channel Order in the Lower Zone You can determine and lock the position of MixConsole channels in the lower zone of the Project window. PROCEDURE 1.
MixConsole MixConsole Window MixConsole Window You can open the MixConsole in a separate window. To open the MixConsole, do one of the following: ● Press F3. ● Select Studio > MixConsole. ● On the Project window toolbar, click Open MixConsole. NOTE This is only visible on the toolbar if the Media & MixConsole Windows section is activated. The MixConsole is divided into the following sections: 1 Toolbar The toolbar shows tools and shortcuts for settings and functions in the MixConsole.
MixConsole MixConsole Window The fader section is always visible and shows all channels in the same order as in the track list. Apart from the main sections, you can also access the following sections from within the MixConsole window: 1 Channel overview Displays all channels as boxes. If you have more channels than can be displayed in the window, you can use the channel overview to navigate to other channels and select them. 2 Meter bridge Allows you to monitor the levels of your channels.
MixConsole MixConsole Window 5 Pictures Allows you to add a picture to the selected channel. Pictures can help you identify your MixConsole channels quickly. 6 Notepads Allows you to enter notes and comments about a channel. Each channel has its own notepad. 7 Channel Latencies Allows you to show the latencies caused by insert effects or channel strip modules.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Snapshots Lists all MixConsole snapshots that you saved, and allows you to recall snapshots. The following tabs are available at the bottom of the left zone: Channel Lists all channels contained in your project. Zones Allows you to lock the position of specific channels.
MixConsole MixConsole Window NOTE Channels that are locked on the Zones tab are not synchronized. RELATED LINKS MixConsole Visibility on page 353 Synchronizing Track and Channel Visibility on page 67 MixConsole Zones The Zones tab lists all channels contained in your project, and allows you to lock the position of specific channels. ● To lock channels on the left/right of the fader section, click the left or right dots next to the channel names. Locked channels are excluded from scrolling.
MixConsole MixConsole Window ● To undo MixConsole parameter actions, click the orange line in the history list and drag it up. ● To redo MixConsole parameter actions, click the orange line in the history list and drag it down. NOTE You can also undo/redo MixConsole parameter actions by using the corresponding buttons in the MixConsole toolbar.
MixConsole MixConsole Window MixConsole Snapshots Save MixConsole Snapshot Saves a MixConsole snapshot. MixConsole Snapshot Functions Opens the MixConsole Snapshot Functions menu. Left Divider Left Divider Allows you to use the left divider. Tools that are placed to the left of the divider are always shown. Search Find Track/Channel Opens a selector that lists all tracks/channels.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Left Locator Position Shows the left locator position. Go to Right Locator Position Allows you to go to the right locator position. Right Locator Position Shows the right locator position. Locator Range Duration Locators to Selection Allows you to set the locators to the selection. Locator Range Duration Shows the duration of the locator range. Transport Buttons Go to Previous Marker/Zero Moves the project cursor to the previous marker/zero position on the timeline.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Activates/Deactivates record mode. Time Displays Primary Time Display Shows the position of the project cursor in the selected time format. Select Primary Time Format Allows you to select a time format for the primary time display. Secondary Time Display Shows the position of the project cursor in the selected time format. Select Secondary Time Format Allows you to select a time format for the secondary time display.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Bypass Inserts Bypasses all inserts. Bypass EQs Bypasses all EQs. Bypass Channel Strip Bypasses all channel strip modules. Bypass Sends Bypasses all sends. Link Group Link/Unlink Selected Channels Links the selected channels/removes their link. Edit Link Group Settings Allows you to change the link group settings. Suspend All Channel Linking Suspends all channel linking. Absolute Mode Enables absolute value changes.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Allows you to reduce the rack height. Increase Rack Height Allows you to increase the rack height. System Performance Meter System Performance Meter Shows the meters for average audio processing load and the disk cache load. Right Divider Right Divider Tools that are placed to the right of the divider are always shown. Mixer Functions Menu Functions Menu Opens a pop-up menu where you can select a MixConsole function.
MixConsole MixConsole Window 3. In the selector, select the channel and press Return. RESULT The channel is selected in the channel list. NOTE If the channel was outside the view or hidden, it is now shown. Channels that are hidden using Set Channel Type Filter are not shown. Undoing/Redoing MixConsole Parameter Changes You can undo/redo MixConsole parameter changes and experiment with different MixConsole settings.
MixConsole MixConsole Window RESULT The MixConsole settings are saved in a snapshot. You can save up to 10 snapshots. These are shown on the Snapshots tab in the left zone of the MixConsole. NOTE Automation data is not saved in MixConsole snapshots. AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK You can open the MixConsole Snapshot Recall Settings dialog, and activate the settings that you want to recall.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Recalling MixConsole Snapshots via the Snapshots Tab You can recall MixConsole snapshots via the Snapshots tab. PREREQUISITE You have saved at least one MixConsole snapshot. PROCEDURE 1. In the left zone of the MixConsole, open the Snapshots tab. 2. Optional: Click MixConsole Snapshot Functions and select MixConsole Snapshot Recall Settings to open a dialog where you can activate the settings that you want to recall, and click OK. 3.
MixConsole MixConsole Window RELATED LINKS MixConsole Snapshot Recall Settings on page 364 Adding Notes to Snapshots You can add notes and comments to a snapshot. PREREQUISITE You have saved at least one MixConsole snapshot. PROCEDURE 1. In the left zone of the MixConsole, open the Snapshots tab. 2. Select the snapshot for which you want to add comments. 3. In the Snapshot Notes section of the Snapshots tab, type in your notes.
MixConsole MixConsole Window EQ Activate this to recall the equalizers. Channel Strip Activate this to recall the channel strip modules. Sends Activate this to recall the sends. Pan Activate this to recall the panorama. Volume Activate this to recall the volume. Selected Channels only Activate this to recall the settings only for selected channels. Warn Before Deleting Plug-in Automation If this option is activated, a warning opens if plug-in automation might be deleted.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Add Configuration Opens the Add Configuration dialog that allows you to save the configuration and enter a name for it. Update Configuration If you change the active configuration, this is indicated by an asterisk after the configuration name. Use this function to save changes to the active configuration. Rename Configuration Opens the Rename Configuration dialog that allows you to rename the active configuration.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Show Only Selected Channels Shows only channels that are selected. Hide Selected Channels Hides all channels that are selected. Show Channels for Tracks with Data Shows all channels for tracks with events or parts. Show Channels for Tracks with Data at the Cursor Position Shows all channels for tracks with events or parts at the cursor position. Show Channels for Tracks with Data between the Locators Shows all channels for tracks with events or parts between the locators.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Pre (Filters/Gain/Phase) For audio-related channels, it contains input filter and gain controls along with Phase and Gain controls. For MIDI channels, it contains an Input Transformer control. Inserts Allows you to select insert effects for your channel. Equalizers (audio-related channels only) Allows you to set the channel EQ.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Show All Channel Strip Controls Shows all available controls on the Channel Strip rack. Show One Channel Strip Type Shows only one channel strip type at a time. Show Sends as Select Send Destination & Gain if you want to show the destination and the gain in one line. Select Send Destination, Gain & Send Controls if you want to show the destination, the gain and the send controls.
MixConsole MixConsole Window The following options are available: New Link Group Name Allows you to enter a name for the link group. Use VCA Fader Activate this option to assign the link group to a VCA fader. Select VCA Fader Allows you to select a VCA fader channel. Volume Activate this to link the volume of the linked channels. Pan Activate this to link the panorama of the linked channels. EQ Activate this to link the equalizers of the linked channels. Dynamics (Compressor, Gate, etc.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Routing Activate this to link the routing of the linked channels. Selection Activate this to link the selection of the linked channels. Record Enable/Monitor Activate this to link the record enable/monitor states of the linked channels. NOTE By default, the volume, sends, routing, and selection settings are activated. If you associate a link group to a VCA fader, only the sends and the routing parameters are activated.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Creating Link Groups You can link several channels to form a link group. PROCEDURE 1. Select the channels that you want to link. 2. On the MixConsole toolbar, click Link. 3. In the Link Group Settings dialog, activate the parameters that you want to link. 4. Click OK. RESULT The number and name of the link group is indicated above the channel name in the display line. NOTE ● If you link groups, insert and channel strip module linking is applied at the slot level.
MixConsole MixConsole Window 2. Select Included in Link Group: and select the link group. RESULT The channel is added to the link group. Removing Channels from Link Groups You can remove a channel from an existing link group. PROCEDURE 1. On the display line of the channel that you want to remove, open the Link Settings pop-up menu. 2. Select Included in Link Group: , and from the link group list, select None. 3.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Zoom Opens a submenu where you can increase or reduce the channel width and the rack height. Open Audio Connections Opens the Audio Connections window. Control Room Cue Channels Opens a submenu where you can activate/deactivate cue channels and change level and panning settings.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Saving MixConsole Settings You can save MixConsole settings for selected audio-related channels and load them into any project. PROCEDURE 1. Select the channels with the settings that you want to save. 2. Select Functions Menu > Save Selected Channels. 3. In the file dialog, specify the file name and location. 4. Click Save. RESULT The settings for the selected channels are saved with the file extension .vmx. The input/output routing is not saved.
MixConsole MixConsole Window NOTE If a channel is deactivated on the Visibility tab or if its channel type is deactivated, it is not shown in the fader section. The MixConsole in the lower zone of the Project window does not follow any visibility changes you perform in the MixConsole window and vice versa. It is linked to the track visibility of the Project window.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Pan Control For each audio-related channel with at least a stereo output configuration, you can find a pan control at the top of the fader section. For MIDI channels, the pan control sends out MIDI pan messages. The result depends on how your MIDI instrument is set to respond to pan. The pan control allows you to position a channel in the stereo spectrum. This control is different for stereo and surround configurations.
MixConsole MixConsole Window ● Stereo channels are panned hard left and right. ● Surround channels are panned center. Using Solo and Mute You can silence one or several channels using Solo and Mute. ● To silence a channel, click Mute. Click again to deactivate the mute state for the channel. ● To mute all other channels, click Solo for a channel. Click again to deactivate the solo state.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Global Meter Settings Menu You can change the meter characteristics for audio channels using the context menu of the channel meter. Right-click the channel meter and select one of the following options from the Global Meter Settings menu: Meter Peak Options - Hold Peaks The highest registered levels are held and shown as static horizontal lines in the meter. Meter Peak Options - Hold Forever If this option is activated, the peak levels are shown until you reset the meters.
MixConsole MixConsole Window 4. ● Click a level position and drag it to a specific level, and press Shift for more accurate positioning. ● Click a level position and nudge it up or down with the Up Arrow/Down Arrow keys, and press Shift for faster positioning. Click the upper or lower part of a color handle so that a frame is shown, and in the color picker, select a color. Selecting the same color for the upper and lower part of the handle results in a meter that changes its colors gradually.
MixConsole MixConsole Window ● 4. If your audio hardware supports the ASIO control panel function, it may be possible to make input level settings. To open the ASIO control panel, select Studio > Studio Setup and in the Devices list, select your audio card. When this is selected, you can open the control panel by clicking Control Panel in the settings section to the right. Optional: Select Functions Menu > Global Meter Settings > Meter Position and activate Post-Fader.
MixConsole MixConsole Window RELATED LINKS Routing on page 382 Pre (Filters/Gain/Phase) on page 385 Inserts on page 386 Equalizers (EQ) on page 387 Channel Strips on page 390 Sends on page 398 Cue Sends on page 398 Direct Routing on page 399 Track Quick Controls on page 401 Device Panels on page 402 Copying and Moving Rack and Channel Settings You can use drag and drop to copy or move rack and channel settings. NOTE This function is only available in the MixConsole window.
MixConsole MixConsole Window NOTE The settings that you make for the input channel will be a permanent part of the recorded audio file. Output busses are used when you play back an audio, group, or FX channel. In this case, you must route the channel to an output bus. You can route the outputs from multiple audio channels to a group. For example, to control the channel levels using one fader, and to apply the same effects and equalization to all the channels.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Input Routing Configurations for Stereo Channels For stereo channels, the following input routing configurations are available. ● Mono or stereo input busses or stereo child busses within a surround bus. ● External inputs that are configured on the Control Room tab of the Audio Connections window. These can be mono input busses or stereo input busses. They can also be routed to the Talkback input.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Pre (Filters/Gain/Phase) The Pre rack for audio-related channels features a high-cut and a low-cut filter as well as gain and phase settings. NOTE This channel rack is only available in the MixConsole window. For MIDI channels, the Pre rack allows you to open the Input Transformer. NOTE You cannot edit the Pre rack settings in the EQ curve display.
MixConsole MixConsole Window is affected. A compressor, for example, can be driven harder by raising the input gain. Gain can also be used to boost the level of poorly recorded signals. PROCEDURE 1. On the MixConsole toolbar, click Racks and activate Pre (Filters/Gain/Phase) to show the Pre rack above the fader section. 2. Drag the Gain slider to the left or to the right to cut or boost the gain.
MixConsole MixConsole Window RESULT The number of pre-fader and post-fader slots is adjusted. The color and the separator line show which effect is pre-fader and which is post-fader. Bypassing Insert Effects You can bypass all insert effects. ● To bypass all inserts, click Bypass at the top of the Inserts rack. ● To bypass a single insert, click the button on the left of the inserts slot. ● To deactivate bypass, click the button again.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Activating Equalizer Bands On the EQ rack, you can activate up to 4 EQ bands for each audio channel. PROCEDURE 1. On the MixConsole toolbar, click Racks and activate Equalizers to show the EQ rack above the fader section. 2. Click Activate/Deactivate Band to activate an EQ band. Equalizer Settings You can make equalizer settings for the 4 bands. These have different default frequency values and different Q names.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Click on the display in a channel to show a larger version. The display is also available in the Equalizers section of the Project window Inspector and in the Channel Settings window. Clicking the curve display enlarges the view and shows a cross-hair cursor. The current mouse position shows the frequency, note value, offset, and level at the top or bottom of the display. ● Click to add a curve point and activate the corresponding EQ band.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Determines the width of the affected frequency range. Higher values give narrower frequency ranges. 5 Select EQ Band Type Opens a pop-up menu where you can select an EQ type for the band. Bands 1 and 4 can act as parametric, shelving, or high/low-cut filters. EQ bands 2 and 3 are always parametric filters. RELATED LINKS Making Filter Settings on page 385 Saving/Loading EQ Presets You can save and load EQ presets.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Noise Gate Noise gating silences audio signals below a set threshold. As soon as the signal level exceeds the threshold, the gate opens to let the signal through. Threshold Determines the level at which Gate is activated. Signal levels above the set threshold trigger the gate to open, and signal levels below the set threshold close the gate. Range Adjusts the attenuation of the gate when it is shut.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Ratio Sets the amount of gain reduction that is applied to signals above the set threshold. A ratio of 3:1 means that for every 3 dB the input level increases, the output level increases by 1 dB. Attack Determines how fast the compressor responds to signals above the set threshold. If the attack time is long, more of the early part of the signal passes through unprocessed.
MixConsole MixConsole Window RELATED LINKS Tube Compressor – Details View on page 410 VintageCompressor The VintageCompressor is modeled after vintage type compressors. Input Gain In combination with the Output Gain setting, this parameter determines the compression amount. The higher the input gain setting and the lower the output gain setting, the more compression is applied. Output Gain Sets the output gain. Attack Determines how fast the compressor responds.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Determines the width of the affected frequency range. Higher values give narrower frequency ranges. 5 Frequency Sets the center frequency of the frequency range to be cut or boosted. Tools Provides tools that allow you to reduce sibilance and attenuate or boost the gain of the attack and release phase of your audio. DeEsser This channel strip module reduces excessive sibilance, primarily for vocal and speech recordings.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Attack Length Determines the length of the attack phase. Output Gain Sets the output level. Sat Allows you to add warmth to the sound. Open the pop-up menu to select between Magneto II, Tape Saturation, and Tube Saturation. Magneto II This channel strip module simulates the saturation and compression of recording on analog tape machines. Saturation Determines the amount of saturation and the generation of overtones. This leads to a small increase in input gain.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Dual Simulates the use of two tape machines. Auto Gain Adjusts the gain automatically. Output Sets the output gain. Drive Amount LED Indicates the amount of drive of the signal. Tube Saturation This channel strip module simulates the saturation and compression of recording of analogue tube compressors. Drive Controls the amount of tube saturation. Low-Frequency This is a low shelving filter with fixed frequency. High-Frequency This is a high-cut filter.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Maximizer This channel strip module raises the loudness of audio material without the risk of clipping. Optimize Determines the loudness of the signal. Mix Amount Sets the level balance between the dry signal and the wet signal. Output Determines the maximum output level. Set this to 0 dB to avoid clipping. Gain Reduction LED Displays the amount of gain reduction.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Sends The Sends rack for audio-related channels features send effect slots that allow you to load send effects and value sliders that for determining the send level for a channel. For MIDI channels, the Sends rack features send effect slots that allow you to load send effects. Adding Send Effects On the Sends rack, you can add send effects. PROCEDURE 1. On the MixConsole toolbar, click Racks and activate Sends to show the rack above the fader section. 2.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Adding Cue Sends You can add cue sends that are routed to cue channel outputs in the Control Room. PREREQUISITE Create a cue channel in the Audio Connections window and activate the Control Room. PROCEDURE 1. On the MixConsole toolbar, click Racks and activate Cue Sends to show the rack above the fader section. 2. Click one of the slots to open the send selector. The cue sends are displayed. 3. Click on the left of the slot to activate the cue send.
MixConsole MixConsole Window 5. Do this for as many destination slots as required (up to 8). After routing your audio tracks to groups, you can route the groups to output busses. 6. For each channel, you can now activate the appropriate routing destination by clicking on the corresponding slot. The active routing destination lights up. Automating Destination Switches PROCEDURE 1. Play back your project and take note of the positions where routing changes are necessary. 2.
MixConsole MixConsole Window start with, and the signal needs to be converted accordingly by downmixing. Cubase does that automatically. NOTE Always select the output with the widest channel configuration in the first slot. It is not recommended to use a setup where the main output has fewer channels than the direct routing destination even though it is technically possible. Upmixing might lead to unexpected side effects. When performing an automatic downmix from 5.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Adding Track Quick Controls in the MixConsole You can add Track Quick Controls in the MixConsole. PROCEDURE 1. On the MixConsole toolbar, click Racks and activate Track Quick Controls to show the rack above the fader section. 2. Click one of the slots to open a selector. 3. Select a parameter from the list. RESULT The selected parameter is loaded and automatically activated as Track Quick Control.
MixConsole MixConsole Window 3. In the Colorize Tracks and MixConsole Channels section, activate MixConsole Channels. 4. Optional: To adjust the brightness of a selected channel, adjust the Selected Channel Brightness slider. NOTE By default, the selected channel is shown in gray. If you want to display the selected channel in color, activate Show Color for Selected Channel. You can then discern it from the other channels by its pronounced color strength 5. Click OK.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Total Channel Latency Shows the total latency for that channel in milliseconds and in samples. NOTE If you want any plug-in delay to be compensated during playback, make sure that Constrain Delay Compensation is deactivated. RELATED LINKS Plug-In Delay Compensation on page 444 Functions Menu on page 373 Constrain Delay Compensation on page 730 MixConsole Window on page 350 Channel Settings You can open each MixConsole channel in a separate Channel Settings window.
MixConsole MixConsole Window 1 Toolbar The toolbar shows tools and shortcuts for settings and functions in the Channel Settings window. 2 Inserts/Strip The Inserts section features insert effect slots that allow you to load insert effects for a channel. The Strip section allows you to load built-in processing modules for separate channels. 3 Channel Strip/Equalizer The Channel Strip section allows you to load built-in processing modules for separate channels.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Go to Previous MixConsole Channel Shows the previous MixConsole channel in the Channel Settings window. Go to Next MixConsole Channel Shows the next MixConsole channel in the Channel Settings window. Search Channels Allows you to search for specific channels and show them in the Channel Settings window. Left Divider Left Divider Tools that are placed to the left of the divider are always shown. Channel Sources Input Opens the name of the input channel.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Output Chain Show Output Chain Shows the output chain. This allows you to keep track of more complicated output routings. Track Templates Load/Save Track Preset Allows you to load/save track presets. Reload Track Preset Allows you to reload track presets. Channel Functions Functions Menu Opens a pop-up menu where you can select a Channel Settings function. Window Zone Controls Set up Window Layout Allows you to set up the window layout.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Move Channel Strip to Pre/Post-Inserts Position Allows you to move the channel strip to pre-fader position or to post-fader position in the signal flow. Strip Allows you to activate and set up channel strip modules for the channel. Routing Allows you to set up the routing for insert effects. RELATED LINKS Channel Settings on page 404 Channel Settings – Channel Strip The Channel Strip/Equalizer section is shown in the Channel Settings window.
MixConsole MixConsole Window You can change the position of channel strip modules in the signal chain by dragging. RELATED LINKS Noise Gate on page 391 Compressor on page 391 EQ on page 393 Tools on page 394 Sat on page 395 Limit on page 396 Channel Settings on page 404 Standard Compressor – Details View The Standard Compressor features a details view with more controls and value readouts for the meters. ● To open the details view, click Edit Module .
MixConsole MixConsole Window Tube Compressor – Details View The Tube Compressor features a details view with more controls and value readouts for the meters. ● To open the details view, click Edit Module . In the details view, the following additional parameters are available: ● Character ● Low/High switch for Ratio ● Side-chain section with Frequency, Filter Type, Q-Factor, and Monitor ● Input Gain meter ● Output Gain meter You can close the details view by clicking Close Module .
MixConsole MixConsole Window In the details view, the following additional parameters are available: ● Mix ● Ratio buttons ● Input Gain meter ● Output Gain meter ● Gain Reduction meter You can close the details view by clicking Close Module . RELATED LINKS VintageCompressor on page 393 Channel Settings – Equalizer The Channel Strip/Equalizer section is shown in the Channel Settings window. 411 Cubase Pro 10.5.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Bypass Equalizers Bypasses the equalizer settings for the channel. Preset Management Allows you to load or save equalizer presets. Activate Channel Comparison Activates the channel comparison mode that allows you to view and edit the spectral curves and EQ settings of two channels at the same time. Select Reference Channel Allows you to select the reference channel for the channel comparison. Click Solo to solo the channel.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Show Controls as Sliders Shows the equalizer controls as sliders. Show Controls as Knobs Shows the equalizer controls as knobs. Show FFT Pre EQ Curve Shows/Hides the FFT (Fast Fourier Transform) input curve for the reference channel. Hold FFT Post EQ Peak Curve Holds the peak values of the FFT (Fast Fourier Transform) output curve for the reference channel.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Channel Settings – Channel Sends The Channel Sends section is shown in the Channel Settings window. Bypass Sends Bypasses the send effects for the channel. Sends—Destinations Allows you to set up a destination for the send effects for the channel. Sends—Panning Allows you to set up panning for the send effects. Bypass Cue Sends Bypasses the cue send effects for the channel. Cue Sends Allows you to add cue send effects for the channel.
MixConsole MixConsole Window The Direct Routing section allows you to set up routing destinations that are positioned postfader and post-panner in the signal path. This way, you can switch the destination of channels and create different mix versions in one go. RELATED LINKS Channel Settings on page 404 Direct Routing on page 399 Channel Settings – Channel Faders The Channel Faders section is shown in the Channel Settings window. The controls are the same as in the MixConsole fader section.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Keyboard Focus in the MixConsole The left zone, the channel rack section, and the fader section can be controlled with the computer keyboard. For this to work, the section must have the focus. If a section has the keyboard focus, the border that surrounds it is highlighted in a specific color. Activating Keyboard Focus To be able to control the MixConsole with the keyboard, you must activate the keyboard focus. PROCEDURE 1.
VCA Faders VCA faders serve as remote controls for groups of channel faders in the MixConsole. VCA stands for Voltage-Controlled Amplifier. VCA faders were originally found on hardware mixing desks. They allowed the user to control the volume levels of several mixer channels with only one fader. To assign channel faders to a VCA fader, the respective channels must be physically connected with the VCA fader. In Cubase, the VCA fader function is based on the same concept.
VCA Faders VCA Fader Settings 1 Link group number 2 Link group name 3 VCA fader pop-up menu 4 Peak meter that displays the summed up level of all channel meters in the link group 5 Fader handle The VCA fader pop-up menu provides the following options: Edit Link Group Settings Allows you to change the link group settings. VCA Fader Controls Link Group: Shows the link group that the VCA fader controls. You can assign the VCA fader to a different link group.
VCA Faders Creating VCA Faders in the MixConsole RELATED LINKS VCA Fader Automation on page 421 Creating Smooth Transitions Between Automation Events (Bézier Automation Curves) on page 700 Link Group Settings Dialog on page 369 Creating VCA Faders in the MixConsole You can create VCA faders in the MixConsole. PROCEDURE 1. Select Studio > MixConsole. 2. Right-click in the fader section, and select Add VCA Fader.
VCA Faders Assigning VCA Faders to Link Groups Assigning VCA Faders to Link Groups You can link channels and assign VCA faders to control them. PREREQUISITE You have selected channels. PROCEDURE 1. Click Link on the MixConsole toolbar. 2. In the Link Group Settings dialog, click in the Name field to enter a name for the link group. 3. Activate Use VCA Fader. The Volume parameter is automatically deactivated. 4.
VCA Faders Nested VCA Faders NOTE You can keep the VCA fader in the fader section. In this case, open the VCA fader pop-up menu, select VCA Fader Controls Link Group: , and select None. This removes only the VCA fader assignment. RELATED LINKS Link Group Settings Dialog on page 369 Nested VCA Faders VCA faders can control other VCA faders. If you use several VCA faders that control different link groups, you can create another VCA fader that controls the VCA faders.
VCA Faders VCA Fader Automation For the channels, the original automation is adjusted by the volume level of the VCA fader track. EXAMPLE The VCA fader track automation affects an existing volume automation of an audio track. The lighter static value line displays the VCA fader automation that has not been written yet. The VCA fader track has a different automation curve that affects the automation of the audio track.
Control Room The Control Room allows you to divide the studio environment into the performing area (studio) and the engineer/producer area (control room). To open the Control Room, you have the following options: ● To open the Control Room in a separate window, select Studio > Control Room. ● To open the Control Room section in the MixConsole window, click Show/Hide Right Zone on the MixConsole toolbar.
Control Room Output Routing RESULT The Control Room functions are available for use. If you disable the Control Room, the configuration is saved and will be restored when you reenable the Control Room. Output Routing For the Control Room to function correctly, you must assign the Main Mix bus to the set of outputs that contains the mix that you want to hear. If you only have one output bus, it automatically becomes the Main Mix. All other outputs are not routed through the Control Room.
Control Room Control Room Channels Phones Channel You can use the phones channel in the Control Room to listen to cue mixes. You can create 1 phones channel for a stereo configuration. It allows you to listen to the main mix or cue mixes or to external inputs on a pair of headphones. You can also use it for previewing. Cue Channels You can use cue channels for sending cue mixes, also known as headphone mixes, to performers in the studio during recording.
Control Room Control Room - Main Tab Control Room - Main Tab The Control Room Main tab displays information and controls for the channels that you define on the Control Room tab in the Audio Connections window. The Control Room Main tab is divided into a number of sections that you open by clicking their header. To open several sections simultaneously, use Ctrl/Cmd-click. External The External section allows you to use external inputs for monitoring external devices.
Control Room Control Room - Main Tab Cue Channel The Cue Channel section allows you to set up cue channels for sending cue mixes. 1 Activate Cue Channel Allows you to activate/deactivate the cue channel. 2 Source selectors Allow you to select the source for the cue channel: monitor mix (Mix), external inputs (Ext), or the cue sends (Cues). The signal presence indicators in the upper left corner light up when the source channel is sending data to the cue channel.
Control Room Control Room - Main Tab Allows you to listen to all soloed speakers in the center channel. If the center channel is not available, the channels are distributed equally to the left and right. 5 Listen to Surround Channels on Front Channels Allows you to solo the surround channels and route them to the front speakers. 6 Solo LFE Channel Allows you to solo the LFE channel. To open the Main Mix bus in the MixConvert V6 plug-in, double-click the channel display.
Control Room Control Room - Main Tab Phones The Phones section allows you to use the phones channel in the Control Room to listen to cue mixes. 1 Activate Phones Channel Allows you to activate/deactivate the phones channel. 2 Activate Metronome Click Activates/Deactivates the metronome click. 3 Source selectors Allow you to select the source for the phones channel: monitor mix (Mix), external inputs (Ext), or the cue sends (Cues).
Control Room Control Room - Main Tab 1 Activate Control Room Channel Allows you to activate/deactivate the Control Room channel. 2 Signal Level Allows you to set the volume for the Control Room output. This does not affect the recording input level or the Main Mix level for exporting mixdowns. Ctrl/Cmd-click to set the level to the reference level specified in the Preferences dialog (VST—Control Room page). 3 Signal meter Shows the volume for the Control Room output.
Control Room Control Room - Inserts Tab 1 Click Level/Click Pan Use the Click Level and Click Pan controls to set the volume and the pan position of the metronome click for the Control Room channel. 2 AFL/PFL Allows you to determine whether the signal of a listen-enabled channel is routed to the Control Room channel after applying the fader and pan settings AFL or before applying the fader and pan settings PFL. 3 Enable Listen for Output Enables the listen bus function for the Control Room output.
Control Room Control Room - Inserts Tab Input Gain Setting up the input gain can be useful in the following situations: ● To balance the level of external inputs, for example, CD players and other sources to the Main Mix level, for A/B comparisons. 432 Cubase Pro 10.5.
Control Room Control Room - Inserts Tab ● To balance the level of your monitor systems, so that switching between sets of speakers does not change the playback volume. Input Phase Inverting the input phase can be useful for external inputs and monitor speaker outputs. Insert Effects Each Control Room channel has a set of insert effect slots. Control Room Channel Inserts For metering and spectral analysis plug-ins.
Control Room Setting up a Cue Mix Setting up a Cue Mix You can create a cue mix from the fader and pan levels that are used in the MixConsole and change them to meet the needs of the individual performers. PROCEDURE 1. In the MixConsole, select the channels from which you want to copy the settings. 2. In the Control Room, do one of the following: 3. ● To apply the function only to this cue channel, right-click on a cue channel to open the context menu.
Control Room Adjusting the Overall Cue Send Level Adjusting the Overall Cue Send Level You can adjust multiple send levels at the same time for the cue send mix, keeping the blend intact while lowering the overall volume. This is sometimes necessary, because the levels in the main mix are often optimized for the loudest possible signal level without clipping.
Metering and Loudness Cubase provides a master meter that works as a multichannel true peak meter, and a loudness meter that allows you to measure the loudness in compliance with the loudness recommendation R 128 of the European Broadcasting Union (EBU). Metering Cubase provides a master meter and a loudness meter that can be shown in the right zone of the Project window and the MixConsole, or in a separate window in the Control Room. Master Meter The master meter is a multichannel true peak meter.
Metering and Loudness Metering Alignment level standards Allows you to select an alignment level (offset) for your scale. This is unavailable for digital and K-System scales. The broadcast meter scales DIN, EBU, Nordic, and British have a default alignment level of -18 dBFS. Configure Meter Settings Opens the Meter Settings pane. Here, you can change the RMS settings for the master meter. Reset RMS Max. and PPM Max. Resets the measurement.
Metering and Loudness Metering ● Momentary Loudness Maximum value of all momentary loudness values that are measured every 100 ms in an audio range of 400 ms. Loudness Range The loudness range measures the dynamic range over the whole program in LU (Loudness Units). It reports the ratio between the loudest and the quietest non-silent sections. The audio is divided into small blocks. There is one audio block every second, and each block lasts 3 seconds so that the analyzed blocks overlap.
Metering and Loudness Metering Activate Control Room View Shows/Hides the Control Room section. Loudness meter Shows the Integrated value as a triangle in the left meter scale and the Short-Term value as a triangle in the right meter scale. Measure Loudness Activates the loudness measurement. Switch between LU and LUFS Switches the meter scale between LUFS (absolute values) and LU (relative values). Configure Loudness Settings Allows you to specify a threshold value for the Momentary Max.
Metering and Loudness Metering Short-Term Shows the maximum value of all short-term loudness values, based on a time window of 3 s. The measurement is not gated. Integrated Shows the average loudness measured from start to stop. The period of measurement is shown in the Time display. The recommended value for the integrated loudness is -23 LUFS. This absolute value is the reference point for the relative LU scale where -23 LUFS equals 0 LU.
Metering and Loudness Metering Save Preset/Remove Preset Allows you to create, load, and remove loudness presets. Momentary Max. Allows you to specify a reference value and a tolerance value for the maximum momentary loudness. If higher values are detected, the clipping indicator in the loudness meter turns red. Short-Term Allows you to specify a reference value and a tolerance value for the short-term loudness. If higher values are detected, the clipping indicator in the loudness meter turns red.
Audio Effects Cubase comes with a number of included effect plug-ins that you can use to process audio, group, instrument, and ReWire channels. The effects and their parameters are described in the separate document Plug-in Reference. Insert Effects and Send Effects You can apply effects to audio channels by using insert effects or send effects. NOTE To apply audio effects to individual audio events, use Direct Offline Processing.
Audio Effects Insert Effects and Send Effects Each audio channel has 8 sends, each of which can be freely routed to an effect (or to a chain of effects). Use send effects in the following cases: ● To control the balance between the dry and wet sound individually for each channel. ● To use the same effect for several different audio channels. To edit send effects, you can use the following sends sections: ● The Sends rack in the MixConsole. ● The Sends section in the Channel Settings window.
Audio Effects Insert Effects Side-Chain Inputs Several VST 3 effects feature side-chain inputs. These allow you to control the operation of the effect via external signals that are routed to the side-chain input. The effect processing is still applied to the main audio signal. RELATED LINKS Side-Chain Input on page 457 Plug-In Delay Compensation Some audio effects, especially dynamics processors that feature a look-ahead functionality, may take a brief time to process the audio fed into them.
Audio Effects Insert Effects NOTE To show all post-fader slots in the MixConsole, open the Rack Settings and activate Fixed Number of Slots. Use post-fader slots for insert effects where you want the level to remain unchanged after the effect. Dithering and maximizers are typically used as post-fader insert effects for output busses, for example. NOTE If you want to use an effect with identical settings on several channels, set up a group channel and apply your effect as a single insert for this group.
Audio Effects Insert Effects ● Locate the output channel and click Edit Channel Settings to edit the output bus. The Channel Settings window for the selected channel opens. 3. In the Inserts section, click the first insert slot on the Inserts tab, and select an effect from the selector. RESULT The selected insert effect is added to the bus and activated. The effect control panel is opened.
Audio Effects Insert Effects RELATED LINKS Add Track Dialog – Group Channel on page 135 Copying Insert Effects You can add insert effects to audio channels by copying them from other audio channels or from other slots of the same audio channel. PREREQUISITE You have added at least one insert effect to an audio channel. PROCEDURE 1. Select Studio > MixConsole. 2. In the Inserts rack, locate the insert effect that you want to copy. 3. Hold down Alt, and drag the insert effect on an insert slot.
Audio Effects Insert Effects RESULT The effect is deactivated and all processing is terminated, but the effect is still loaded. Bypassing Insert Effects If you want to listen to the track without having it processed by a particular effect, but do not want to remove this effect completely from the insert slot, you can bypass it. A bypassed effect is still processing in the background. This allows for crackle-free comparison of the original and the processed signal.
Audio Effects Insert Effects Freezing Insert Effects Freezing an audio track and its insert effects allows you to reduce processor power. However, frozen tracks are locked for editing. You cannot edit, remove, or add insert effects for the frozen track. PREREQUISITE You have made all settings for the track and you are sure that you do not need to edit it anymore. PROCEDURE 1. In the Inspector for the audio track that you want to freeze, click Freeze Audio Channel. 2.
Audio Effects Insert Effects 2. In the Inserts section, click Routing to open the Routing tab. 3. Double-click the signal diagram for the insert effect to open the Routing Editor. The first speaker channels of the track are routed through the available effect channels. 4. Optional: Activate Link to link the input and output channel assignment. 5. Click the arrow buttons to route different speaker channels through the effect. RESULT The effect is routed through different channels of the audio.
Audio Effects Insert Effects 3 Inputs The upper squares represent the inputs to the effect plug-in. 4 Connections The lines represent the connections. 5 Input channel assignment These buttons allow you to assign the input channels. 6 Link Activate this to link the input and output channel assignment. 7 Output channel assignment These buttons allow you to assign the output channels. 8 Reset This button allows you to reset the original channel setup.
Audio Effects VST Effect Selector VST Effect Selector The VST effect selector allows you to select VST effects of the active collection. ● To open the VST effect selector, open the Inserts section of the audio track Inspector, and on an insert slot, click Select Insert. The following controls are available: 1 Expand Tree/Collapse Tree Expands/Collapses the tree. 2 Search VST Effect Allows you to search for VST effects by typing in the name or parts of the name, or the category.
Audio Effects Send Effects FX Channel Tracks You can use FX channel tracks as routing destinations for audio sends. The audio is sent to the FX channel and through any insert effects set up for it. ● You can add several insert effects to an FX channel. The signal passes through the effects in series, from the top downward. ● You can rename FX channel tracks as any other tracks. ● You can add automation tracks to FX channel tracks. ● You can route the effect return to any output bus.
Audio Effects Send Effects Adding FX Channels to Selected Channels PREREQUISITE Your project contains some tracks to which you want to add an FX channel. PROCEDURE 1. In the track list, right-click the tracks to which you want to add an FX channel, and select Add Track > FX Channel to Selected Channels. 2. In the Add Track dialog, open the Effect pop-up menu and select an effect for the FX channel track. 3.
Audio Effects Send Effects 4. On the send slot, click Activate/Deactivate Send. RESULT The audio is routed through the FX channel. AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK In the Channel Settings window for the audio channel, you can hold down Alt and double-click to show the send destination. If you have routed the send to an FX channel, the effect control panel is opened.
Audio Effects Send Effects ● To move a send to post-fader position, open the Channel Settings window for the audio channel, right-click a send and select Move to Post-Fader. The Pre-/Post-Fader button indicates that the send is in post-fader position. NOTE If you activate Mute Pre-Send when Mute in the Preferences dialog (VST page), sends in prefader mode are muted if you mute their channels. Setting Pan for the Sends PROCEDURE 1. Select the audio track. 2.
Audio Effects Side-Chain Input NOTE You can reset the pan control to the center position by Ctrl/Cmd-clicking on the pan control. RELATED LINKS Surround Sound on page 662 Setting the Level for the Sends PROCEDURE 1. In the track list, select the FX channel track that contains the effect for which you want to set the level. 2. Open the Inserts section of the Inspector and click the effect slot to open the effect control panel. 3. In the effect control panel, set the Mix control to 100.
Audio Effects Side-Chain Input ● Delay ● Filter By activating the side-chain input you can do the following: ● Use the side-chain signal as a modulation source. ● Apply ducking to the instrument, that is, reduce the volume of the instrument track when a signal is present on the audio track. ● Compress the signals on one audio track when a second audio track starts. This is typically used to add compression on a bass sound when the drums are hit.
Audio Effects Side-Chain Input 6. Click Set Up Side-Chain Inputs. 7. Click Add Side-Chain Input, and select the duplicate track from the selector. 8. Optional: Adjust the send level in the Level value field. 9. In the Project window, select the duplicate track. 10. In the Inspector, click Output Routing and select the side-chain node for the PingPongDelay effect. RESULT The signals from the duplicated track are routed to the effect.
Audio Effects Side-Chain Input RESULT You have connected the bass drum track side-chain to the Compressor on the destination track. The bass drum signal triggers the Compressor on the bass guitar track. When you now play back the project, the bass guitar is compressed whenever the signals on the bass drum track exceed the set threshold. Side-Chain Inputs The Side-Chain Inputs panel allows you to set up the side-chain input for the selected plug-in.
Audio Effects Dither Effects Dither Effects Dither effects allow you to control the noise that is produced by quantization errors that can occur when you mix down to a lower bit depth. Dithering adds a special kind of noise at an extremely low level to minimize the effect of quantization errors. This is hardly noticeable and preferable to the distortion that otherwise occurs. Applying Dither Effects PROCEDURE 1. Select Studio > MixConsole. 2. Open the Rack Settings and activate Fixed Number of Slots.
Audio Effects Effect Control Panel 1 Activate Effect Activates/Deactivates the effect. 2 Bypass Effect Allows you to bypass the effect. 3 Read Automation/Write Automation Allows you to read/write automation for the effect parameter settings. 4 Switch between A/B Settings Switches to setting B when setting A is active, and to setting A when setting B is active. 5 Copy A to B Copies the effect parameters of effect setting A to effect setting B.
Audio Effects Effect Control Panel Fine-Tuning Effect Settings You can take your effect parameter settings as a starting point for further fine-tuning and then compare the new settings with the original settings. PREREQUISITE You have adjusted the parameters for an effect. PROCEDURE 1. On the control panel for the effect, click Switch between A/B Settings. This copies the initial parameter setting A to setting B. 2. Fine-tune the effect parameters. These parameter settings are now saved as setting B.
Audio Effects Effect Presets NOTE This also closes VST instrument control panels. RESULT The control panels are closed. RELATED LINKS Effect Control Panel on page 461 Effect Presets Effect presets store the parameter settings of an effect. The included effects come with a number of presets that you can load, adjust, and save. The following effect preset types are available: ● VST presets for a plug-in. These are plug-in parameter settings for a specific effect.
Audio Effects Effect Presets Loading Presets for Effects Most VST effect plug-ins come with a number of useful presets that you can instantly select. PREREQUISITE You have loaded an effect, either as a channel insert or into an FX channel, and the effect control panel is open. PROCEDURE 1. Click the preset browser field at the top of the control panel. 2. In the Results section, select a preset from the list. 3. Double-click to load the preset that you want to apply. RESULT The preset is loaded.
Audio Effects Effect Presets 2. Select Save Preset. The Save Preset dialog opens. 3. In the New Preset section, enter a name for the new preset. 4. Optional: Click New Folder to add a subfolder inside the effect preset folder. 5. Optional: Click Show Attribute Inspector in the bottom left corner of the dialog and define attributes for the preset. 6. Click OK. RESULT The effect preset is saved.
Audio Effects Effect Presets Saving Insert Presets You can save the inserts of the inserts effect rack for a channel as an inserts preset, together with all parameter settings. Insert presets can be applied to audio, instrument, FX channel, or group tracks. PREREQUISITE You have loaded a combination of insert effects and the effect parameters are set up for each effect. PROCEDURE 1. Select the track. 2. In the Inspector, open the Inserts section. 3.
Audio Effects System Component Information Window 5. Double-click to apply the preset and close the pane. RESULT The effects of the insert effect preset are loaded and any plug-ins that were previously loaded for the track are removed. Loading Insert Effect Settings from Track Presets You can extract the effects that are used in a track preset and load them into your inserts rack. PROCEDURE 1. Select the track to which you want to apply the new preset. 2. In the Inspector, open the Inserts section.
Audio Effects System Component Information Window Update (only available for MIDI Plug-ins) Re-scans the designated plug-in folders for updated system component information. The following columns are available: Active Allows you to activate or deactivate a plug-in. Instances The number of plug-in instances that are used in Cubase. Name The name of the plug-in. Vendor The manufacturer of the plug-in. File The name of the plug-in, including its file name extension.
Audio Effects System Component Information Window NOTE A plug-in may be in use even if it is not activated in the left column. The left column only determines whether or not the plug-in is visible on the effect selectors. Exporting System Component Information Files You can save system component information as an XML file, for example, for archiving purposes or troubleshooting. ● The system component information file contains information on the installed/available plug-ins, their version, vendor, etc.
Direct Offline Processing Direct Offline Processing allows you to instantly add plug-in effects and audio processes to the selected audio events, clips, or ranges, without destructing the original audio. Applying offline effects is common practice in dialogue editing and sound design. Offline processing has several advantages over applying real-time mixer effects: ● The workflow is clip-based. This allows you to apply different effects to events on the same track.
Direct Offline Processing Direct Offline Processing Workflow Direct Offline Processing Workflow on page 472 Direct Offline Processing Window on page 473 Direct Offline Processing Workflow You can perform offline processing operations in the Direct Offline Processing window. The window always shows the processing of the selected audio. When you add or modify offline processing, the following applies: ● You can add processing by adding plug-ins or audio processes.
Direct Offline Processing Direct Offline Processing Window NOTE If the Direct Offline Processing window has the focus, you can also press Return to apply the processing. ● You must click Discard or use the corresponding key command to cancel processing. IMPORTANT Audio processes without adjustable parameters, for example, Reverse or Silence, are instantly applied to the audio, even if Auto Apply is deactivated.
Direct Offline Processing Direct Offline Processing Window Toolbar Allows you to add audio processing, to audition the audio with the current edits, and to make global settings for offline processing. Process list Lists all plug-in effects and built-in audio processes that you add to the selected event, clip, or range. You can bypass items in this list. An icon at the right of each process shows the status.
Direct Offline Processing Direct Offline Processing Window Select Preset Allows you to select a plug-in preset. Add Process Allows you to add a built-in audio process to the selected event or clip. Apply Options Auto Apply If this option is activated and you add or modify a plug-in effect or an audio process, it is instantly rendered into the audio and added to the process list in the left zone of the Direct Offline Processing window.
Direct Offline Processing Direct Offline Processing Window Tail Tail in ms Allows you to add time at the end of the rendered files. This way, reverb and delay effects can fully fade out. Right Divider Right Divider Tools that are placed to the right of the divider are always shown. Window Zone Controls Show/Hide Left Zone Shows/Hides the left zone of the Direct Offline Processing window that contains the process list. NOTE This setting is saved globally.
Direct Offline Processing Direct Offline Processing Window ● In the Media rack, click the VST Effects tile, select a plug-in effect, and drag it to the process list in the left zone. IMPORTANT ● You can select all installed VST plug-ins for offline processing. However, not every plug-in is suited for offline processing. ● If you apply a stereo effect to mono audio material, the left side of the effect’s stereo output is used. The selected plug-in effect or audio process is added to the process list.
Direct Offline Processing Direct Offline Processing Window Applying Insert Effects as Offline Processing You can apply audio effects from MixConsole or Inspector insert slots or entire plug-in chains with their current parameter settings as offline processing. PREREQUISITE Your project contains tracks with audio insert plug-in effects. PROCEDURE 1. Select an audio event, clip, or range. 2. Select Audio > Direct Offline Processing. 3.
Direct Offline Processing Direct Offline Processing Window Favorites For plug-ins or audio processes that you use frequently, you can create favorites in the Direct Offline Processing window. Favorites allow you to instantly apply single or multiple plug-ins and audio processes with dedicated parameter settings to the selected audio. You can create up to 36 favorites on 4 banks by dragging plug-ins and audio processes to the favorites section below the process list.
Direct Offline Processing Direct Offline Processing Window 2. Select Audio > Direct Offline Processing. 3. Do one of the following: ● In the MixConsole or Inspector, click an Inserts slot with a loaded plug-in and drag the plug-in to the Direct Offline Processing favorites section. ● In the MixConsole, click the Inserts rack header and drag the entire rack with all loaded plug-ins to the Direct Offline Processing favorites section.
Direct Offline Processing Direct Offline Processing Window RELATED LINKS Creating Favorites on page 479 Applying Processing via Favorites on page 480 Applying FX Chain Presets on page 481 Auto Apply on page 472 Applying FX Chain Presets You can import FX chain presets or insert effects of track presets and apply them as batch processes. NOTE Batches are instantly applied to the audio, even if Auto Apply is deactivated. PROCEDURE 1.
Direct Offline Processing Direct Offline Processing Window ● If you add tail to an event that you have manually resized before, the tail is added but the event length is not adjusted automatically. Therefore, you must adjust the event manually. In this case, the tail is mixed with the underlying audio clip. RELATED LINKS Event Resize Options on page 213 Modifying Processes You can delete or modify some or all processing from a clip in the Direct Offline Processing window.
Direct Offline Processing Direct Offline Processing Window Pool Window Columns on page 603 Reordering the Process List You can reorder the operations in the Direct Offline Processing process list by dragging. PROCEDURE ● Click a plug-in effect or an audio process and move it by dragging. RESULT The offline processing operations are rendered into the audio in the specified order. Bypass Processes In the Direct Offline Processing window, you can bypass processes.
Direct Offline Processing Built-In Audio Processes Applying Offline Processing Permanently You can apply all offline processing permanently to the audio. PREREQUISITE You have applied plug-in effects or audio processes to an event, clip, or range and you are sure that you do not need to edit the processing anymore. IMPORTANT Making offline processing permanent cannot be undone. PROCEDURE 1. Select the processed event, clip, or range. 2. Select Audio > Make Direct Offline Processing Permanent.
Direct Offline Processing Built-In Audio Processes Envelope display Shows the shape of the envelope. The resulting waveform shape is shown in a dark tone, with the current waveform shape in a light tone. ● To add a curve point, click the curve. ● To move a curve point, click and drag. ● To remove a curve point, click and drag it outside the display. Presets pop-up menu Allows you to manage your presets. ● To save a preset, select Save Preset from the pop-up menu, enter a name, and click OK.
Direct Offline Processing Built-In Audio Processes Gain Gain allows you to change the gain, that is, the level of the selected audio. Gain Allows you to set a gain value between -50 dB and +20 dB. Clipping Detection text This text is displayed if you use Audition and the gain setting results in audio levels above 0 dB. NOTE In case of clipping, lower the Gain value and use the Normalize audio process instead. This allows you to increase the level of the audio as much as possible without causing clipping.
Direct Offline Processing Built-In Audio Processes 0 dB. From this maximum level, the current maximum level of the selected audio is subtracted, and the gain is raised or lowered by the resulting amount. Loudness Normalization Allows you to normalize your audio based on the integrated loudness, according to the recommendation R 128 of the European Broadcasting Union (EBU). Integrated Loudness in LUFS sets a loudness value for the audio, between -34 LUFS and 0 LUFS. NOTE ● For audio shorter than 0.
Direct Offline Processing Built-In Audio Processes ● To specify a chord, activate Multi Shift and click several keys. To remove a transpose interval, click a blue key. Pitch Shift Settings Transpose Allows you to specify the amount of pitch shift in semitones. Fine-Tune Allows you to specify the amount of pitch shift in cents. Volume Allows you to lower the volume of the pitch-shifted sound. This is not available if Time Correction is activated.
Direct Offline Processing Built-In Audio Processes Envelope-Based Pitch Shift On the Envelope tab, you can specify an envelope curve as a base for the pitch shift. Curve Type buttons Determine whether the corresponding envelope uses Spline Interpolation, Damped Spline Interpolation, or Linear Interpolation. Envelope display Shows the shape of the envelope curve over the waveform image of the audio selected for processing.
Direct Offline Processing Built-In Audio Processes RELATED LINKS MPEX on page 495 Remove DC Offset Option Remove DC Offset allows you to remove any DC offset in the audio selection. If your audio signal contains too large a component of direct current, you may notice that it is not centered around the zero level axis. This is called DC offset. ● To verify if your audio contains DC offsets, select the audio and select Audio > Statistics.
Direct Offline Processing Built-In Audio Processes Reverse Reverse allows you to reverse the audio selection so that it sounds as if you play back a tape backwards. There are no adjustable parameters for this audio process. Silence Silence allows you to replace the selection with silence. There are no adjustable parameters for this audio process. Stereo Flip Stereo Flip allows you to manipulate the left and right channels of stereo audio selections.
Direct Offline Processing Built-In Audio Processes Bars Allows you to set the length of the selected audio in bars. Beats Allows you to set the length of the selected audio in beats. Signature Allows you to set the time signature. Original Length This section contains information and settings regarding the audio that is selected for processing. Length in Samples Shows the length of the selected audio in samples. Length in Seconds Shows the length of the selected audio in seconds.
Direct Offline Processing Key Commands for Direct Offline Processing Time Stretch Ratio Allows you to set the amount of time stretch as a percentage of the original length. If you use the settings in the Resulting Length section to specify the amount of time stretch, this value changes automatically. RELATED LINKS Time Stretch and Pitch Shift Algorithms on page 495 Key Commands for Direct Offline Processing You can apply offline processing by using key commands.
Direct Offline Processing Key Commands for Direct Offline Processing Option Key command Paste items to process list Ctrl/Cmd-V Undo Ctrl/Cmd-Z To define key commands for further Direct Offline Processing operations, and for directly adding particular plug-in effects and audio processes, use the Key Commands dialog.
Time Stretch and Pitch Shift Algorithms In Cubase, time-stretching and pitch-shifting algorithms are used for offline processes, in the Sample Editor, or for the Flattening Realtime Processing function. Depending on the feature, élastique, MPEX, or Standard algorithm presets are available.
Time Stretch and Pitch Shift Algorithms Standard MPEX – Preview Quality For preview purposes. MPEX – Mix Fast A very fast mode for preview. This mode works best with composite music signals (mono or stereo material). MPEX – Solo Fast For single instruments (monophonic material) and voice. MPEX – Solo Musical Higher quality for single instruments (monophonic material) and voice. MPEX – Poly Fast For monophonic and polyphonic material. This is the fastest setting that still gives very good results.
Time Stretch and Pitch Shift Algorithms Limitations Standard – Solo For monophonic material like solo woodwind/brass instruments or solo vocals, monophonic synths or string instruments that do not play harmonies. This mode preserves the timbre of the audio.
Audio Functions Cubase offers particular functions for analyzing the audio in your project. RELATED LINKS Detect Silence Dialog on page 498 Spectrum Analyzer Window on page 501 Statistics Window on page 503 Detect Silence Dialog The Detect Silence dialog allows you to search for silent sections in events. You can split events and remove the silent parts from the project, or create regions corresponding to the non-silent sections.
Audio Functions Detect Silence Dialog The following options are available: Waveform display Allows you to zoom in on and out of the waveform by using the zoom slider to the right or by clicking in the waveform and moving the mouse up or down. You can scroll the waveform by using the scrollbar, or by using the mouse wheel. You can adjust the Open Threshold and Close Threshold values by moving the squares at the beginning and at the end of the audio file.
Audio Functions Detect Silence Dialog NOTE If your audio contains repeated short sounds, and this results in too many short open sections, try raising this value. Minimum Time Closed Determines the minimum time that the function remains closed after the audio level has dropped below the Close Threshold value. Set this to a low value to make sure that you do not remove sounds. Pre-roll Causes the function to open slightly before the audio level exceeds the Open Threshold value.
Audio Functions Spectrum Analyzer Window RELATED LINKS Removing Silent Sections on page 501 Removing Silent Sections The Detect Silence dialog allows you to detect and remove silent sections of your audio. PROCEDURE 1. Select one or multiple audio events with silent sections in the Project window. 2. Select Audio > Advanced > Detect Silence. 3. In the Detect Silence dialog, make your changes. 4. Click Compute to analyze the audio.
Audio Functions Spectrum Analyzer Window Frequency display Shows the frequency graphs for the analyzed audio. If you move the mouse pointer over a certain position, the channel, frequency, note, and level at that position are shown in the value field at the top of the display. Channel selector For multichannel audio, this pop-up menu allows you to select which channels are shown in the frequency display. Zoom slider Allows you to zoom in and out horizontally.
Audio Functions Statistics Window Comparing Level Values You can display the difference in level between two positions on the same or different graphs in the Spectrum Analyzer window. PROCEDURE 1. Move the mouse pointer to the first position and right-click to select it. 2. Move the mouse pointer to the second frequency position. RESULT The difference in level between the positions is displayed as value D in the value field.
Audio Functions Statistics Window The Statistics window shows the following information: Channel Shows the name of the analyzed channel. Min. Sample Value Shows the lowest sample value in dB. Max. Sample Value Shows the highest sample value in dB. Peak Amplitude Shows the largest amplitude in dB. True Peak Shows the maximum absolute level of the audio signal waveform in the continuous time domain. DC Offset Shows the amount of DC offset as a percentage and in dB.
Audio Functions Statistics Window Loudness (EBU R 128) Max. Momentary Loudness Shows the maximum value of all momentary loudness values, based on a time window of 400 ms. The measurement is not gated. Max. Short-Term Loudness Shows the maximum value of all short-term loudness values, based on a time window of 3 s. The measurement is not gated.
Sample Editor The Sample Editor provides an overview of the selected audio event. It allows you to view and edit audio by cutting and pasting, removing, or drawing audio data, and by processing audio. Editing is non-destructive so that you can undo modifications at any time. You can open the Sample Editor in a separate window or in the lower zone of the Project window. This is useful if you want to access the Sample Editor functions from within a fixed zone of the Project window.
Sample Editor The Sample Editor is divided into several sections: 1 Toolbar Contains tools for selecting, manipulating, and playing back audio. 2 Info Line Shows information about the audio. 3 Overview Shows an overview of the whole audio clip and indicates which part of the clip is shown in the waveform display. 4 Inspector Contains audio editing tools and functions. NOTE The Inspector for the lower zone editor is shown in the left zone of the Project window.
Sample Editor Sample Editor Toolbar RELATED LINKS Opening the Editor in the Lower Zone on page 71 Opening the Editor Inspector on page 62 Sample Editor Toolbar on page 508 Info Line on page 512 Overview Line on page 513 Sample Editor Inspector on page 513 Ruler on page 516 Waveform Display on page 517 Regions List on page 523 Sample Editor Toolbar The toolbar contains tools for selecting, editing, and playing back audio.
Sample Editor Sample Editor Toolbar NOTE Use the Currently Edited Audio Event pop-up menu to select the audio event that you want to edit. Currently Edited Audio Event Lists all audio events that are opened in the Sample Editor, and allows you to activate an audio event for editing. Auto-Scroll Auto-Scroll Keeps the project cursor visible during playback. Select Auto-Scroll Settings Allows you to activate Page Scroll or Stationary Cursor and to activate Suspend Auto-Scroll When Editing.
Sample Editor Sample Editor Toolbar Scrub Allows you to locate positions. Time Warp Adjusts musical positions of events to time positions. Acoustic Feedback Acoustic Feedback Automatically plays back a VariAudio segment when you modify the pitch. Snap Snap to Zero Crossing Restricts editing to zero crossings, that is, positions where the amplitude is zero. Snap On/Off Restricts horizontal movement and positioning to the specific positions.
Sample Editor Sample Editor Toolbar Allows you to select a color scheme for VariAudio segments. This makes it easier to see which segments belong to which event when working with several audio events. Right Divider Right Divider Tools that are placed to the right of the divider are always shown. Window Zone Controls Open in Separate Window This button is available in the lower zone editor. It opens the editor in a separate window. Open in Lower Zone This button is available in the editor window.
Sample Editor Info Line NOTE You can determine the speed and pitch of the playback by dragging faster or slower. Editing Audio Samples with the Draw Tool You can edit the audio clip at sample level with the Draw tool. This way, you can remove audio clicks manually, for example. PROCEDURE 1. On the audio waveform, locate the sample position that you want to edit and zoom in to the highest zoom level. 2. Select the Draw tool. 3.
Sample Editor Overview Line NOTE Initially, length and position values are displayed in the format specified in the Project Setup dialog. Overview Line The overview line displays the whole clip, and indicates which part of the clip is shown in the waveform display. ● To show or hide the overview line, click Set up Window Layout on the toolbar and activate or deactivate the Overview option.
Sample Editor Sample Editor Inspector RELATED LINKS Opening the Editor Inspector on page 62 Definition Section The Definition section allows you to adjust the audio grid and define the musical context of your audio. You can use the available functions to match an audio file or audio loop to the project tempo. ● To open the Definition section, click its tab in the Inspector. AudioWarp Section The AudioWarp section allows you to perform timing settings for your audio.
Sample Editor Sample Editor Inspector RELATED LINKS VariAudio Inspector Section on page 548 Hitpoints Section The Hitpoints section allows you to edit hitpoints to slice your audio. Here you can create groove quantize maps, markers, regions, events, and warp markers based on hitpoints. ● To open the Hitpoints section, click its tab in the Inspector. Range Section The Range section allows you to edit ranges and selections or create a sampler track from the selected range.
Sample Editor Ruler Select Opens a menu with functions to select ranges. Start Shows the start position of the selection range. End Shows the end position of the selection range. Length Shows the length of the selection range. Zoom Opens a menu with the zoom functions for ranges. Create Sampler Track Allows you to create a sampler track from the range selection. Process Section The Process section regroups the most important audio editing commands from the Audio and Edit menus.
Sample Editor Waveform Display Waveform Display The waveform display shows the waveform image of the edited audio clip. 1 Level Scale menu Allow you to show the level as a percentage or in dB. Here, you can also activate the display of the half level axis. 2 Ruler Shows the project tempo grid. 3 Audio waveform Shows the waveform image of the selected audio.
Sample Editor Waveform Display To show the half level axis, open the level scale menu and select Show Half Level Axis. NOTE You can set up a wave image style in the Preferences dialog (Event Display—Audio page). Zooming Vertically You can zoom in the waveform vertically. This allows you to see a specific detail of the waveform. PROCEDURE ● Drag the vertical zoom slider down to zoom in or up to zoom out.
Sample Editor Range Editing Zoom Out Zooms out one step, centering on the project cursor. Zoom Full Zooms out so that the whole clip is visible in the waveform display. Zoom to Selection Zooms out so that the whole clip is visible in the waveform display. If the VariAudio section is open, this zooms in horizontally and vertically so that the current selection fills the waveform display. Zoom to Selection (Horiz.) Zooms in horizontally so that the current selection fills the waveform display.
Sample Editor Range Editing ● Hold down Shift and click at a new position. RESULT The selected range is highlighted in the waveform display. NOTE You can also use the functions in the Select menu to select ranges. RELATED LINKS Select Menu on page 520 Select Menu Select Menu in the Range Section On the Select menu in the Range section in the Sample Editor Inspector, the following functions are available: Select All Selects the whole clip. Select None Deselects everything.
Sample Editor Range Editing From Start to Cursor Selects the audio between the clip start and the project cursor. From Cursor to End Selects the audio between the project cursor and the clip end. This option is available if the project cursor is positioned between the clip boundaries. Equal Pitch - all Octaves/same Octave Selects all notes that have the same pitch as the selected note, in any octave or in the current octave.
Sample Editor Range Editing Creating Sampler Tracks from Selection Ranges You can create a sampler track that contains only the selected range. PROCEDURE 1. Select a range. If you select no range, the event start/end is used. 2. Open the Range section in the Inspector. 3. Click Create Sampler Track. RESULT A new Sampler Track is created and added to the track list. The new sampler track contains your range selection. Edit Menu for Selection Ranges You can edit selection ranges.
Sample Editor Regions List Direct Offline Processing for Ranges You can apply plug-in effects and audio processes to selection ranges. ● To apply a plug-in effect or an audio process to a selection range, open the Process section in the Sample Editor Inspector, and select one of the options in the Add Plug-in menu or in the Add Process menu. NOTE If you apply offline processing to ranges of events that are shared copies, you are asked whether you want to create a new version of the clip.
Sample Editor Regions List 5 Play Region Plays back the selected region. 6 Regions list Allows you to select and display regions in the audio waveform. Creating Regions PREREQUISITE You have clicked Set up Window Layout on the toolbar and activated Regions. PROCEDURE 1. On the Sample Editor toolbar, activate the Range Selection tool and in the waveform display, select the range that you want to convert into a region. 2.
Sample Editor Snap Point ● Drag the Region Start or Region End handle to a different position in the waveform display. ● Double-click the Start or End field in the regions list and enter a new value. NOTE The positions are shown in the display format selected for the ruler and info line, but are relative to the start of the audio clip. Removing Regions PREREQUISITE You have clicked Set up Window Layout on the toolbar and activated Regions. You have created regions. PROCEDURE 1.
Sample Editor Snap Point The snap point is used when Snap is activated and you insert a clip from the Sample Editor in the event display. It is also used when you move or copy events in the event display. In the Sample Editor, you can edit the following snap points: ● Event Snap Point This is shown in the Sample Editor if you open a clip from within the Project window. ● Clip Snap Point This is shown in the Sample Editor if you open a clip from the Pool.
Sample Editor Snap Point The mouse pointer becomes a hand symbol and a tooltip indicates that you can set the snap point. RESULT The event snap point is adjusted to the position where you dragged it. NOTE You can also adjust the snap point by setting the project cursor at the desired position and selecting Audio > Snap Point to Cursor. 527 Cubase Pro 10.5.
Hitpoints Hitpoints mark musically relevant positions in audio files. Cubase can detect these positions and create hitpoints automatically by analyzing onsets and melodic changes of the audio. NOTE All hitpoint operations can be performed in the Sample Editor window and in the lower zone editor. When you add an audio file to your project by recording or by importing, Cubase automatically detects hitpoints.
Hitpoints Calculating Hitpoints NOTE If your audio file is very long, this may take a while. 2. Select the audio event in the Project window and make sure the zoom factor is high enough. RESULT The calculated hitpoints for the selected event are shown in the Project window. NOTE You can disable automatic hitpoint detection by deactivating Enable Automatic Hitpoint Detection in the Preferences dialog (Editing—Audio page).
Hitpoints Calculating Hitpoints Editing Hitpoints Manually It is absolutely crucial for any further editing that the hitpoints are set at the correct positions. Therefore, if the automatic hitpoint detection does not meet your expectations, you can edit hitpoints manually. PREREQUISITE The audio event is opened in the Sample Editor, and in the Hitpoints section, hitpoints are filtered by their peak and/or intensity, by their distance, or by their musical position. PROCEDURE 1.
Hitpoints Locating to Hitpoints in the Project Window 4. Press Tab to navigate to the next slice. The slice is played back automatically. 5. To insert a hitpoint, press Alt and click at the position where you want to insert the hitpoint. The mouse pointer changes to a draw icon and the tooltip Insert Hitpoint is shown. 6. To move a hitpoint, move the mouse pointer on the vertical line that represents the hitpoint, and drag to the left or to the right.
Hitpoints Slices Slices You can create slices from hitpoints, where each slice ideally represents an individual sound or beat of the audio. You can use these slices to change tempo and timing of the audio without affecting its pitch and quality. NOTE Slices are created in the Sample Editor and edited in the Audio Part Editor. Audio that meets the following characteristics is suitable: ● Individual sounds have a noticeable attack. ● The recording quality is good.
Hitpoints Slices Slicing Multi-Track Drum Recordings You can slice all tracks of a multi-track drum recording at once. PREREQUISITE You have created a multi-track drum recording and set up an edit group for all the tracks. PROCEDURE ● Select the folder track, and select Audio > Hitpoints > Divide Audio Events at Hitpoints. RESULT The audio of all tracks in the folder track is sliced.
Hitpoints Creating a Groove Quantize Map Deleting Overlaps If the project tempo is higher than the tempo of the original audio event, the slice events in the part may overlap. You can delete these overlaps. PROCEDURE 1. Right-click the track in the track list and from the context menu, select Auto Fades Settings. 2. In the Auto Fades dialog, activate Auto Crossfades. 3. Click OK. 4. Select the overlapping events in the part and select Audio > Advanced > Delete Overlaps.
Hitpoints Creating Regions Creating Regions You can create regions at hitpoint positions. This allows you to isolate recorded sounds. PREREQUISITE The audio event from which you want to create regions is opened in the Sample Editor, and the hitpoints are set at the correct positions. PROCEDURE ● In the Hitpoints section in the Inspector, click Create Regions. RESULT Regions are created between two hitpoint positions and shown in the Sample Editor.
Hitpoints Creating MIDI Notes Creating MIDI Notes You can create MIDI notes from hitpoints. This allows you to double, replace, or enrich drum hits by triggering sounds of a VST instrument. PREREQUISITE The audio event from which you want to create MIDI notes is opened in the Sample Editor, and the hitpoints are set at the correct positions. PROCEDURE 1. In the Hitpoints section in the Inspector, click Create MIDI Notes. 2. In the Convert Hitpoints to MIDI Notes dialog, set up the parameters. 3.
Hitpoints Creating MIDI Notes Destination Allows you to select a destination: ● To place the MIDI part on the first selected MIDI or instrument track, select First Selected Track. NOTE Any MIDI parts from previous conversions on this track will be deleted. ● To create a new MIDI track for the MIDI part, select New MIDI Track. ● To copy the MIDI part to the clipboard, select Project Clipboard. 537 Cubase Pro 10.5.
Tempo Matching Audio Cubase offers several functions that allow you to match the tempo of audio in your project. In the Sample Editor window and in the lower zone editor, you can perform the following tempo matching operations: ● Stretch to Project Tempo ● Musical Mode Stretches the selected event to match the project tempo. Applies realtime time stretching to audio clips, so that they match the project tempo. ● Auto Adjust Extracts a definition grid from your audio.
Tempo Matching Audio Stretching Audio Events to the Project Tempo The algorithm preset affects warp changes in Musical Mode, FreeWarp, and Swing. For the VariAudio warping and pitching features Standard – Solo is applied automatically. RELATED LINKS Algorithm Presets on page 538 Time Stretch and Pitch Shift Algorithms on page 495 Audio Alignment on page 210 Stretching Audio Events to the Project Tempo You can stretch audio loops to the project tempo. PROCEDURE 1.
Tempo Matching Audio Musical Mode Matching Audio to the Project Tempo You can use Musical Mode to adjust audio loops to the project tempo. Loops are short audio files that have a defined number of bars. PROCEDURE 1. Select File > Import > Audio File, and select an audio loop in the file dialog. 2. In the Project window, double-click the imported audio loop to open it in the Sample Editor. 3. Open the Definition section and verify the rulers.
Tempo Matching Audio Auto Adjust 3. Move the Swing fader to the right. RESULT This offsets the grid positions and creates a swing or shuffle feel. If you selected 1/2, every second position in the grid is offset. Auto Adjust The Auto Adjust function is useful if you do not know the tempo of your audio file, or if the beat is not straight. It allows you to extract a definition grid from your audio. After that, you can tempo match the file to the project tempo with the Musical Mode.
Tempo Matching Audio Manual Adjust RESULT The definition grid is calculated for the selected section. The snap point moves to the start of the selected range. The audio tempo definition ruler changes to reflect your edits, and bars and beats positions are marked with vertical lines. Manual Adjust The Manual Adjust function is useful if you need to manually modify the grid and tempo of your audio file.
Tempo Matching Audio Free Warp 7. In the lower part of the waveform, move the mouse pointer over the grid lines. The tooltip Set Bar Position (Move Following Bars) and a green vertical line are shown. 8. For incorrect bar positions, click and drag the green vertical line to the position of the first downbeat of the following bar and release the mouse button. This also moves the bars to the right. The area to the left remains unaffected. 9. Move the mouse pointer over the grid lines for single beats.
Tempo Matching Audio Free Warp A stretch factor higher than 1.0 indicates that the audio preceding the warp marker is stretched, a stretch factor lower than 1.0 indicates that the audio is compressed. NOTE The Free Warp tool snaps to hitpoint positions and warp markers. Correcting the Timing with the Free Warp Tool PROCEDURE 1. Double-click the audio clip or event in the Project window to open it in the Sample Editor. 2. On the toolbar, activate Snap to Zero Crossing.
Tempo Matching Audio Flattening Realtime Processing A tooltip is shown to indicate that you can drag to correct the warp marker position. RESULT The warp marker moves to the new position and the audio is stretched or compressed accordingly. Deleting Warp Markers PROCEDURE 1. In the AudioWarp section, activate Free Warp. 2. Hold down Alt and click the warp marker you want to delete. NOTE To delete several markers, draw a selection rectangle. RESULT The warp marker is removed from the waveform.
Tempo Matching Audio Flatten Realtime Processing Dialog RESULT Any loop that was previously stretched in realtime plays back exactly the same, but the warp markers discarded. RELATED LINKS MPEX on page 495 Flatten Realtime Processing Dialog The Flatten Realtime Processing dialog allows you to select an algorithm. ● To open the Flatten Realtime Processing dialog, select one or more audio event in the Project window, and select Audio > Realtime Processing > Flatten Realtime Processing.
Pitch Editing and Time Correction with VariAudio The VariAudio features in Cubase allow you to edit pitch, and correct the timing and intonation of individual notes in monophonic vocal recordings. All VariAudio operations can be performed in the Sample Editor window and in the lower zone editor. Any modifications to the audio material can be undone. NOTE The VariAudio features are optimized for monophonic recordings of vocals. It may work well for other monophonic recordings, such as saxophone, as well.
Pitch Editing and Time Correction with VariAudio VariAudio Inspector Section VariAudio Inspector Section The VariAudio section allows you to edit individual notes of your audio file, change their pitch or timing, and to extract MIDI from your audio. Bypass VariAudio Changes Bypasses pitch, formant shift, and volume changes so that you can compare the changes to the original audio.
Pitch Editing and Time Correction with VariAudio Smart Controls RELATED LINKS VariAudio Section on page 514 Smart Controls on page 549 Pitch Snap Mode on page 557 MIDI Input Modes on page 559 Quantizing Pitches on page 559 Straightening Pitch Curves on page 562 Formant Shifting on page 565 Showing MIDI Reference Tracks on page 564 Editing Volume on page 566 Functions Menu on page 566 Smart Controls Each segment has smart controls that allow you to change the start and end points of the segment and to perfo
Pitch Editing and Time Correction with VariAudio Smart Controls This smart control is only shown if you select All in the Smart Controls pop-up menu in the Inspector. By default, the entire pitch curve is straightened. These smart controls allow you to set a range for Straighten Pitch Curve. Use this smart control for several selected segments to set the same range for all selected segments. 5 Warp Start/Correct Segment Start This smart control is shown by default. Allows you to warp the segment start.
Pitch Editing and Time Correction with VariAudio Segmenting Monophonic Audio Segmenting Monophonic Audio To be able to edit the pitch and correct the timing of monophonic recordings, Cubase must analyze the audio and split it into segments. PROCEDURE 1. 2. In the Project window, double-click the monophonic vocal recording to open the Sample Editor. In the Sample Editor Inspector, click VariAudio to open the VariAudio section. A waveform image of the audio is shown. 3. Activate Edit VariAudio.
Pitch Editing and Time Correction with VariAudio Segments and Gaps Segments and Gaps Cubase automatically analyzes the audio and splits it into segments. The following concepts are crucial to understand the segmentation: 1 Pitch Position The pitch position of the segments is displayed on the piano keyboard to the left of the waveform. If you move the mouse pointer over a segment, the pitch of that segment is also shown on the segment. Pitches represent the perceived fundamental frequency of the note.
Pitch Editing and Time Correction with VariAudio Auditioning VariAudio Segment Colors Menu You can select a color scheme for VariAudio segments. If you work with several audio events, this makes it easier to see which segments belong to which event. The following options are available: Auto Segments that belong to the same voice get the same color. Event Segments get the same color as the corresponding event in the Project window. Pitch Segments get colors depending on their pitches.
Pitch Editing and Time Correction with VariAudio Segment Editing Segment Editing Segment editing might be necessary if the original audio contains non-tonal portions of the analyzed audio, that is, signals or sections with unclear pitch information, such as consonants or effect sounds. Non-tonal portions of the analyzed audio might not be included in a segment. If this is the case, pitch changes, volume editing, formant shifting, or timing modifications affect only the tonal portions.
Pitch Editing and Time Correction with VariAudio Segment Editing AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK If splitting the segment results in a wrong pitch, move the segment vertically. RELATED LINKS Segmenting Monophonic Audio on page 551 Smart Controls on page 549 Gluing Segments If a single sound is spread over multiple segments, you can glue these segments. PREREQUISITE You have opened the audio in the Sample Editor and activated Edit VariAudio in the VariAudio section. PROCEDURE 1.
Pitch Editing and Time Correction with VariAudio Pitch Changes RELATED LINKS Segmenting Monophonic Audio on page 551 Changing the Start and End Point of Segments If the start or end point of a segment does not match the associated audio, you can change it. PREREQUISITE You have opened the audio in the Sample Editor and activated Edit VariAudio in the VariAudio section. PROCEDURE 1. Select one or several segments. 2. On the Sample Editor toolbar, activate Audition to audition the segments. 3.
Pitch Editing and Time Correction with VariAudio Pitch Changes To change the pitch of audio segments, you can use the VariAudio section in the Inspector, or the smart controls. RELATED LINKS VariAudio Inspector Section on page 548 Smart Controls on page 549 Pitch Snap Mode The Pitch Snap Mode defines how a segment snaps to a certain pitch. ● You can set the Pitch Snap Mode in the VariAudio section of the Inspector. The following modes are available: Absolute Segments snap to the next semitone.
Pitch Editing and Time Correction with VariAudio Pitch Changes NOTE You can change the Pitch Snap Mode on the fly. Use Shift to enter Off mode, Ctrl/Cmd to enter Absolute mode, and Alt to enter Relative mode. RESULT The Solo algorithm is selected automatically and the segment pitch is raised or lowered according to your settings. NOTE The more the pitch deviates from the original pitch, the less likely it is that your audio sounds natural.
Pitch Editing and Time Correction with VariAudio Pitch Changes ● Use the On-Screen Keyboard to change the pitch. NOTE The more the pitch deviates from the original pitch, the less likely it is that your audio sounds natural. You cannot choose pitches above C5 and below E0. RESULT The Solo algorithm is selected automatically, and the segment pitch is raised or lowered according to the note you play.
Pitch Editing and Time Correction with VariAudio Pitch Changes NOTE If you hold down Shift and double-click a segment, all following segments of the same pitch are selected. 2. In the VariAudio section of the Inspector, move the Quantize Pitch slider to the right. NOTE You can also quantize the pitch by dragging the Quantize Pitch smart control in the middle of the bottom edge of the segment upwards or downwards.
Pitch Editing and Time Correction with VariAudio Pitch Changes ● Straightening the pitch curve This allows you to reduce the degree of fluctuation or vibrato for individual segments.
Pitch Editing and Time Correction with VariAudio Pitch Changes ● To tilt the end of the curve, drag the smart control for Tilt in the upper right corner of the segment upwards or downwards. RESULT The Solo algorithm is selected automatically, and the pitch curve is tilted according to your settings. RELATED LINKS Smart Controls on page 549 Setting Tilt/Rotate Anchors on page 561 Rotating a Pitch Curve You can rotate the pitch curve to correct pitch deviations of individual segments.
Pitch Editing and Time Correction with VariAudio Timing Modifications ● In the Inspector, move the Straighten Curve slider to the right. RESULT The Solo algorithm is selected automatically, and the pitch curves are straightened. RELATED LINKS Smart Controls on page 549 Straightening Ranges of Pitch Curves on page 563 Straightening Ranges of Pitch Curves You can restrict the straightening of pitch curves to specific ranges of segments.
Pitch Editing and Time Correction with VariAudio Showing MIDI Reference Tracks PROCEDURE ● Do one of the following: ● Drag the smart control for Warp Start to the left or to the right. ● Drag the smart control for Warp End to the left or to the right. RESULT The Solo algorithm is selected automatically. The timing of the segment and the adjacent segments is changed according to your settings. Warp markers are shown below the ruler to indicate which portions of the audio are stretched.
Pitch Editing and Time Correction with VariAudio Formant Shifting RESULT The events of the selected MIDI track are shown in the Sample Editor event display as lines. Their color adapts to the VariAudio Segment Colors setting. You can use the Pitch or the Chord Track option, for example, to associate the pitches of audio and MIDI. The MIDI reference track selection applies to all Sample Editors in a project. It is saved with the project.
Pitch Editing and Time Correction with VariAudio Editing Volume NOTE If Smart Controls is set to All, you can also shift the formant by dragging the smart control in the lower left corner of the segment upwards or downwards. RESULT The Solo algorithm is selected automatically, and the formant is shifted. RELATED LINKS Smart Controls on page 549 Editing Volume You can raise or lower the volume of the audio for a segment or mute it. PREREQUISITE ● The audio file is segmented and the segments are correct.
Pitch Editing and Time Correction with VariAudio Functions Menu Flatten Realtime Processing Opens the Flatten Realtime Processing dialog that allows you to select an algorithm preset for the flattening of VariAudio and warp modifications. The entire audio event is taken into account. Reset Pitch Changes/Reset Pitch Changes for Selection Resets all segment pitches. If you select specific segments, only their pitches are reset.
Pitch Editing and Time Correction with VariAudio Functions Menu Extract MIDI Dialog The Extract MIDI dialog allows you to specify which audio data is used when creating a MIDI part with the Extract MIDI function. ● To open the Extract MIDI dialog, open the VariAudio section of the Sample Editor Inspector, activate Edit VariAudio in the VariAudio section, and in the Functions menu, click Extract MIDI.
Pitch Editing and Time Correction with VariAudio Functions Menu NOTE This works only with a connected VST instrument that is compatible with Note Expression. Volume Mode Allows you to specify how volume information from the audio is extracted. The following options are available: Fixed Velocity Assigns the same velocity to all created MIDI notes. In the Velocity field you can specify a velocity value.
Pitch Editing and Time Correction with VariAudio Harmony Voices for Audio Flattening Realtime Processing You can flatten VariAudio and AudioWarp modifications. This is useful if you want to reduce the CPU load, optimize the sound quality of the processing, or apply any offline processing. PROCEDURE 1. Optional: Select the segments that you want to flatten. If you do not select anything, all segments are flattened. 2.
Pitch Editing and Time Correction with VariAudio Harmony Voices for Audio 5. Specify the number of voices that you want to create, enter a value for the vibrato reduction, and click OK. RESULT The audio event is analyzed and VariAudio segments are created automatically. A copy of the event with altered pitches is created for every voice and placed on a newly created track.
Audio Part Editor The Audio Part Editor provides an overview of the selected audio parts. It allows you to view, audition and edit parts by cutting and pasting, crossfading, drawing level curves, or by processing parts. Editing is non-destructive so that you can undo modifications at any time. You can open the Audio Part Editor in a separate window or in the lower zone of the Project window.
Audio Part Editor The Audio Part Editor in the lower zone of the Project window: 1 Toolbar Contains tools for selecting, editing, and playing back audio parts. 2 Info Line Displays information on the audio parts. 3 Ruler Displays the timeline and the display format of the project. RELATED LINKS Opening the Editor in the Lower Zone on page 71 573 Cubase Pro 10.5.
Audio Part Editor Audio Part Editor Toolbar Opening the Editor Inspector on page 62 Ruler on page 56 Info Line on page 58 Audio Part Editor Toolbar on page 574 Audio Part Editor Toolbar The toolbar contains tools for selecting, editing, and playing back audio parts. ● To show or hide the toolbar elements, right-click the toolbar and activate or deactivate the elements. The following options are available: Info/Solo Solo Editor Solos the selected audio during playback.
Audio Part Editor Audio Part Editor Toolbar Loops the playback until you deactivate Audition. Audition Volume Allows you to adjust the volume. Tool Buttons Object Selection Selects audio parts. Range Selection Selects ranges. Zoom Zooms in. Hold Alt and click to zoom out. Erase Deletes audio parts. Split Splits audio parts. Mute Mutes audio parts. Comp Assembles takes. Draw Draws a volume curve. Play Allows you to play back the clip from the position where you click until you release the mouse button.
Audio Part Editor Audio Part Editor Toolbar Multiple Part Controls Show Part Borders Shows/Hides part borders for the active audio part, within the left and right locators. Edit Active Part Only Restricts editing operations to the active part. Currently Edited Part Lists all parts that were selected when you opened the editor, and allows you to activate a part. Nudge Palette Trim Start Left Increases the length of the selected element by moving its start to the left.
Audio Part Editor Audio Part Editor Toolbar Grid Type Grid Type Allows you to select a grid type. The options depend on the display format that is selected for the ruler. If you select Seconds as ruler format, time-based grid options are available. If you select Bars+Beats as ruler format, musical grid options are available. Quantize Iterative Quantize On/Off Activates/Deactivates iterative quantize. AudioWarp Quantize On/Off Activates/Deactivates AudioWarp quantize.
Audio Part Editor Info Line Window Zone Controls Open in Separate Window This button is available in the lower zone editor. It opens the editor in a separate window. Open in Lower Zone This button is available in the editor window. It opens the editor in the lower zone of the Project window. Show/Hide Info Allows you to activate/deactivate the info line. Set up Toolbar Opens a pop-up menu where you can set up which toolbar elements are visible.
Audio Part Editor Lanes Lanes Lanes can make it easier to work with several audio events in a part. Moving some of the events to another lane can make selecting and editing much easier. If Snap is deactivated and you want to move an event to another lane without accidentally moving it horizontally, press Ctrl/Cmd while dragging it up or down. RELATED LINKS Track Handling on page 161 Operations All operations can be performed in the Audio Part Editor window and in the lower zone editor.
Audio Part Editor Operations 2. ● To play back a range, select a range with the Range Selection tool. ● To start playback from the current cursor position, set the project cursor to that position. On the toolbar, click Audition. NOTE If you activate Audition Loop, playback continues until you deactivate Audition. RELATED LINKS Audio Part Editor Toolbar on page 574 Auditioning Using the Play Tool PROCEDURE 1. Select Play on the toolbar. 2.
Audio Part Editor Operations NOTE You can also edit the loop start and end positions numerically in the fields next to the Loop button. RESULT The loop is indicated in blue in the ruler. NOTE The events are looped as long as the Loop button is activated and the Audio Part Editor is open. RELATED LINKS Setup Options on page 1107 Audio Part Editor Toolbar on page 574 Scrub In the Audio Part Editor, the Scrub tool has a separate icon on the toolbar.
Audio Part Editor Operations Activate Previous Part. If you assign key commands to these, you can use them to cycle between parts. RELATED LINKS Key Commands on page 1084 Audio Part Editor Toolbar on page 574 582 Cubase Pro 10.5.
Extensions in Cubase Cubase supports extensions such as Audio Random Access (ARA). ARA allows you to integrate compatible programs as plug-ins into your DAW. This integration allows for random access to audio events in the musical context of your project. To be able to use a program as an extension, you must first install and register that program. After that, Cubase automatically loads the extension, and you can activate it from within the program.
Extensions in Cubase Editor for Extensions In the Project window, the audio event shows a symbol in the upper right corner. This indicates that an extension is active. For further information about the functions of the extension, refer to its documentation. RELATED LINKS Setup Context Menus on page 1107 Editor for Extensions In Cubase, extensions are integrated in the Editor. From there, you have access to all their editing functions.
Extensions in Cubase Extension Editing in the Project Window NOTE Extensions cannot be open in the lower zone Editor and in a separate window at the same time. 5 Editor Shows the user interface of the activated extension and gives you access to its functions. Cubase gives you an acoustic feedback of the changes during editing. Edits that you perform with the extension are saved with the project. For further information about the functions of the selected extension, refer to its documentation.
Extensions in Cubase Permanently Applying Extension Edits A clip for the new file is added to the Pool, and the original event is replaced by a new event playing the new clip. 586 Cubase Pro 10.5.
Sampler Tracks The sampler track features allow you to chromatically play back any audio from your audio sample library via MIDI. You can create and edit new sounds based on specific samples, and integrate them into an existing project. The sampler track features include: ● A sampler track that allows you to control the playback of the audio sample that is loaded in Sampler Control. ● Sampler Control that allows you to load and edit audio samples.
Sampler Tracks Loading MIDI Parts into Sampler Control Loading MIDI Parts into Sampler Control You can load MIDI parts from instrument tracks or MIDI tracks into Sampler Control by dragging. NOTE For this to work, the instrument track or the MIDI track must be routed to a VST instrument. ● To load a MIDI part, drag it from the MediaBay, the Project window event display, or the File Explorer/macOS Finder and drop it in Sampler Control. IMPORTANT If Sampler Control already contains MIDI, it is overwritten.
Sampler Tracks Sampler Control Sampler Control If the sampler track is selected, Sampler Control is available in the lower zone of the Project window. Sampler Control allows you to view, edit, and play back samples or specific sections of the samples. 1 Toolbar Contains tools that allow you to select and edit the audio sample, to organize track presets, and to transfer the sample with its settings to an instrument.
Sampler Tracks Sampler Control Allows you to write track automation. Switch between A/B Settings Allows you to switch between different parameter settings. Event Received Indicator This LED indicates incoming MIDI messages via the selected MIDI input. The LED lights up on receiving note-on and controller messages. This way, you can check if Cubase and your MIDI keyboard are connected to the same MIDI device input.
Sampler Tracks Sampler Control ● If this is set to Continuous, the sample is played in a continuous loop. ● If this is set to Alternate, the sample is played back in a loop that alternates forward and backward. ● If this is set to Once, the sample is looped once. ● If this is set to Until Release, the sample is looped repeatedly until you release the key on the keyboard. ● If this is set to Alternate Until Release, the loop alternates forward and backward for as long as you hold the key.
Sampler Tracks Sampler Control RELATED LINKS Setting the Root Key Manually on page 598 Setting up Loops for Audio Samples on page 598 Transferring Samples from Sampler Control to VST Instruments on page 600 Waveform Display The waveform display shows the waveform of your audio sample. It allows you to define the start and end of the audio sample, of the loop, and of the fade-in/-out. Set Sample Start Defines the sample start. On playback, all audio before the sample start is ignored.
Sampler Tracks Sampler Control Sound Parameter Section In the sound parameter section you can make settings for time stretching and formant shifting (AudioWarp section), tuning and pitch modulation (Pitch section), filtering (Filter section), or level and panorama (Amp section). AudioWarp Section In the AudioWarp section, you can apply time stretching and formant shifting to your samples. ● To activate the AudioWarp settings, click Activate/Deactivate AudioWarp.
Sampler Tracks Sampler Control NOTE This parameter is only available in Solo and in Music mode. In Music mode, the lower limit of the playback speed adjustment is 12.5 %. Values below this limit have no further effect. Formant Allows you to adjust formant shifting. Formant shifting allows you to avoid so-called Mickey Mouse effects when pitch-shifting a sample. This is especially useful with samples of human voices or acoustic instruments. This parameter is only available in Solo mode.
Sampler Tracks Sampler Control Drive Determines the level of the input signal and thus the amount of saturation. Show/Hide Filter Envelope Shows the filter envelope editor. RELATED LINKS Envelope Editors on page 595 Amp Section In the Amp section, you can set the volume and the pan of the sample. The amplifier envelope allows you to shape the volume over time. Volume Sets the level of the sample. Pan Sets the position of the sample in the stereo panorama.
Sampler Tracks Sampler Control Envelope display Shows the envelope curve. You can adjust it by adding, moving, and deleting nodes. The nodes for attack (A), sustain (S), and release (R) are always shown and cannot be deleted. Next to the release node, the release time of the envelope is shown. Mode Determines how the envelope is played back when it is triggered. ● Select Sustain to play the envelope from the first node to the sustain node. The sustain level is held for as long as you play the note.
Sampler Tracks Sampler Control Adding and Removing Nodes You can add up to 128 nodes to an envelope curve. ● To add a node, double-click at the position where you want to add the node. ● To remove a node, double-click it. ● To delete several selected nodes, press Delete or Backspace. NOTE ● You cannot remove the attack (A), the sustain (S), or the release node (R). ● All nodes added after the sustain node always affect the release phase of the envelope.
Sampler Tracks Sample Editing and Playback Functions Sample Editing and Playback Functions All sample editing in Sampler Control is non-destructive. Setting Sample Start and End By setting the sample start and end, you can define what range of the sample is played back when you press a key on your MIDI keyboard. PROCEDURE 1. Drag the Set Sample Start handle to the right to adjust the sample start point. 2. Drag the Set Sample End handle to the left to adjust the sample end point.
Sampler Tracks Sample Editing and Playback Functions Setting the Key Range You can determine the key range for the sample. This is useful for samples that only sound good within a certain key range. PROCEDURE ● In the keyboard section, adjust the key range by dragging the range handles above the keyboard display. RESULT Only keys within the determined key range play a sound when triggered.
Sampler Tracks Transferring Samples from Sampler Control to VST Instruments Transferring Samples from Sampler Control to VST Instruments You can transfer audio samples with all settings that you have made in Sampler Control to specific Steinberg VST instruments. Transferring audio samples from Sampler Control to a VST instrument creates a new instrument track in the track list. This new track is added below the sampler track. The audio sample and all its settings are loaded in the VST instrument.
Pool Every time that you record on an audio track, a file is created on your hard disk. A reference to this file, a clip, is added to the Pool. The following rules apply to the Pool: ● All audio and video clips that belong to a project are listed in the Pool. ● Every project has a separate Pool. The way the Pool displays folders and their contents is similar to the way the File Explorer/macOS Finder displays folders and file lists.
Pool Pool Window The content of the Pool is divided into the following folders: Audio folder Contains all audio clips and regions that are in the project. If the project contains one or more sampler tracks, a dedicated Sampler Track subfolder is created in the Audio folder. This subfolder contains all clips of samples that you have loaded into Sampler Control. Video folder Contains all video clips that are in the project.
Pool Pool Window Pool Window Columns The Pool window columns display information about the clips and regions. The following columns are available: Media Contains the Audio, Video, and Trash folders. If the folders are opened, the clip or region names are shown and can be edited. Used Displays how many times a clip is used in the project. If there is no entry in this column, the corresponding clip is not used. Status Displays various icons that relate to the current Pool and clip status.
Pool Pool Window Tempo Displays the tempo of audio files if available. If no tempo has been specified, the column displays “???”. Sign. Displays the time signature, for example, “4/4”. Key Displays the root key if one has been specified for the file. Algorithm Displays the algorithm preset that is used if the audio file is processed. ● To change the default preset, click the preset name and select another preset from the pop-up menu.
Pool Pool Window Audition Plays back the selected audio. Audition Loop Loops the playback until you deactivate Audition. Audition Volume Allows you to adjust the volume. View/Attributes Allows you to activate/deactivate the attributes that are displayed in the Pool window. +/- All Opens/Closes all folders. Import Allows you to import media files to the Pool. Search Allows you to search the Pool and connected disks for media files. Project Folder Displays the path to the folder of the active project.
Pool Working with the Pool Working with the Pool NOTE Most of the Pool-related main menu functions are also available on the Pool context menu. Renaming Clips or Regions in the Pool IMPORTANT Renaming clips or regions in the Pool also renames the referenced files on disk. It is recommended to rename clips or regions in the Pool. Otherwise, the reference from the clip to the file may get lost. PROCEDURE 1. In the Pool window, select a clip or region, and click the existing name. 2.
Pool Working with the Pool NOTE The clips are positioned so that their snap points are aligned with the selected insert position. If you want to adjust the snap point before inserting a clip, double-click a clip to open the Sample Editor. Here, you can adjust the snap position and then perform the insert options. RESULT The clip is inserted on the selected track or on a new audio track. If several tracks are selected, the clip will be inserted on the first selected track.
Pool Working with the Pool Deleting Files from the Hard Disk You can delete clips from the Pool by deleting the corresponding file from the hard disk. To delete a file permanently from the hard disk, you must first move the corresponding clips to the Trash folder in the Pool. IMPORTANT Make sure that the audio files that you want to delete are not used in other projects. PROCEDURE 1. In the Pool window, select the clips that you want to delete from the hard disk, and select Edit > Delete.
Pool Working with the Pool Locating Events and Clips You can quickly display to which clips the selected events belong and to which events the selected clips belong. Locating Events via Clips in the Pool You can find out which events in the project refer to a particular clip in the Pool. PROCEDURE 1. In the Pool window, select one or more clips. 2. Select Media > Select in Project. RESULT All events that refer to the selected clips are now selected in the Project window.
Pool Working with the Pool NOTE Folders that you have recently selected using the Select Search Path function appear on the pop-up menu, so that you can quickly select them again. 4. Click Search. The search is started and Search is labeled Stop. ● To cancel the search, click Stop. When the search is finished, the files that are found are listed on the right. 5. ● To audition a file, select it in the list and use the playback controls to the left (Play, Stop, Pause, and Loop).
Pool Working with the Pool Missing Files When you open a project and one or more files are missing, the Resolve Missing Files dialog opens. If you click Close, the project opens without the missing files. In the Pool, you can check which files are considered missing. This is indicated by a question mark in the Status column.
Pool Working with the Pool Removing Missing Files from the Pool If the Pool contains audio files that cannot be found or reconstructed, you may want to remove these. PROCEDURE ● In the Pool window, select Media > Remove Missing Files. RESULT All missing files from the Pool and the corresponding events from the Project window are removed. Auditioning Clips in the Pool You can audition clips in the Pool using key commands, the Audition button, or by clicking in the waveform image for a clip.
Pool Working with the Pool Importing Media The Import Medium dialog lets you import files directly into the Pool. To open the dialog, select Media > Import Medium, or click Import on the Pool toolbar. This opens a standard file dialog, where you can navigate to other folders, audition files, etc.
Pool Working with the Pool Import Options Dialog The Import Options dialog allows you to specify how audio files are imported into the Pool. ● If you select a file in the Import Medium dialog and click Open, the Import Options dialog opens. Import Options dialog for single file import Import Options dialog for multipe file import Copy File to Project Folder/Copy All Files to Project Folder Copies the audio file to the Audio folder of the project, and has the clip refer to the copy.
Pool Working with the Pool The Name Format pop-up menu allows you to specify how the split files are named. This allows for compatibility with other products when exchanging audio files. Do not ask again Always imports files according to the settings without opening the dialog again. You can reset this option in the Preferences dialog (Editing—Audio page).
Pool Working with the Pool 4. Select the new folder and select Media > Set Pool Record Folder, or click in the Status column of the new folder. RESULT The new folder becomes the Pool Record folder. Any audio recorded in the project is saved in this folder. Organizing Clips and Folders If you accumulate a large number of clips in the Pool, it can be difficult to quickly find specific items. Organizing clips in new subfolders with names that reflect the content can be a solution.
Pool Working with the Pool Minimizing Files You can minimize the audio files according to the size of the audio clips referenced in the project. The files that are produced using this option only contain the audio file portions that are actually used in the project. This can significantly reduce the size of the project if large portions of the audio files are unused. Therefore, the option is useful for archiving purposes after you have completed a project.
Pool Working with the Pool Working with Libraries You can use libraries to save sound effects, loops, video clips, etc., and transfer media from a library into a project by using drag and drop. ● To create a new library, select File > New Library. You must specify a project folder for the new library in which media files will be stored. The library appears as a separate Pool window. ● To open a library, select File > Open Library. ● To save a library, select File > Save Library.
Pool Working with the Pool Converts the original file without changing clip references. However, the references are saved with the next save action. ● New + Replace in Pool Creates a new copy with the chosen attributes, replaces the original file with the new one in the Pool and redirects the current clip references from the original file to the new file.
MediaBay and Media Rack You can manage media files on your computer as well as presets from multiple sources from within the MediaBay or the Media rack. The MediaBay window offers advanced functions for working with media files and managing database items. To show the media files on your computer in the MediaBay, you must scan the folders or volumes that contain the files so that these are added to the database.
MediaBay and Media Rack Media Rack in Right Zone The following tiles are available: VST Instruments Shows VST instruments and instrument presets. VST Effects Shows VST effects and effect presets. Loops & Samples Shows audio loops, MIDI loops, or instrument sounds ordered by content set. Presets Shows track presets, strip presets, pattern banks, FX chain presets, and VST FX presets.
MediaBay and Media Rack Media Rack in Right Zone Loading Effect Plug-In Presets on page 656 Loading FX Chain Presets on page 657 Loading Strip Presets on page 657 Loading Pattern Banks on page 657 Adding Favorites Using the Favorites Page on page 629 Adding Favorites Using the File Browser Page on page 629 Favorites Page The Favorites page allows you to add your own favorite folders to the Media rack.
MediaBay and Media Rack Media Rack in Right Zone The following options are available: 1 Media Rack navigation controls Allow you to navigate to specific folders and filter the Results list. 2 Attribute filter Allows you to view and edit some of the standard file attributes found in your media files. 3 Results list Shows all media files that are found in the selected folder and allows you to select a media file. 4 Previewer Allows you to preview the selected media file.
MediaBay and Media Rack Media Rack in Right Zone The following options are available: 1 Media Rack navigation controls Allow you to navigate to specific folders and filter the Results list. 2 Add Favorite Allows you to add the selected folder as a favorite folder. 3 Back/Forward/Up Up navigates to the parent folder. Back navigates to the previously used folder. Forward navigates to the most recent folder. 4 File browser Allows you to browse selected folders.
MediaBay and Media Rack Media Rack in Right Zone VST Instruments Page The VST Instruments page shows all VST instruments of the selected collection. ● To open the VST Instruments page, go to the Home page of the Media rack, and click VST Instruments. The following options are available: 1 Media Rack navigation controls Allow you to navigate to specific folders and filter the Results list. 2 Expand All Expands all results. 3 Collapse All Collapses all results.
MediaBay and Media Rack Media Rack in Right Zone VST Effects Page The VST Effects page shows all VST effects of the selected collection. ● To open the VST Effects page, go to the Home page of the Media rack, and click VST Effects. The following options are available: 1 Media Rack navigation controls Allow you to navigate to specific folders and filter the Results list. 2 Expand All Expands all results. 3 Collapse All Collapses all results.
MediaBay and Media Rack Media Rack in Right Zone RELATED LINKS VST Plug-in Manager Window on page 737 Adding Pictures of VST Effects to the Media Rack on page 630 Media Rack Navigation Controls The navigation controls allow you to navigate to files and folders in the Media rack. The following controls allow you to perform a text search, and to show all results on the current page. 1 Search Allows you to search media files by name or by attribute. 2 Reset Search Allows you to reset the search.
MediaBay and Media Rack Media Rack in Right Zone Working with the Media Rack The Media rack in the right zone of the Project window allows you to search for supported media files and included VST instruments, and add them to your project. The controls on the different pages of the Media rack allow you to browse, filter, select, and to preview your media files. The Favorites page and the File Browser page allow you to add folders where your media files are located as Favorites.
MediaBay and Media Rack Media Rack in Right Zone Applying Track Presets You can use the Media rack to add track presets to your project. PROCEDURE 1. In the Media rack, click the Presets tile. 2. Click Track Presets. 3. Click Audio, VST Instruments, MIDI, Multi, or Sampler depending on the track type. 4. Do one of the following: ● Drag a track preset on the Inspector or in the track list for the corresponding track type.
MediaBay and Media Rack Media Rack in Right Zone ● At the top left of the page, click Add Favorite. ● Right-click the folder, and from the context menu, select Add Favorite. 4. In the Set Name dialog that opens, enter a name for the folder. 5. Click OK. RESULT ● The favorite folder is added to the database. ● In the File Browser, a new folder with the specified name is added to the Favorites folder. ● On the Favorites page, a new tile with the specified name is added.
MediaBay and Media Rack MediaBay Window MediaBay Window To open the MediaBay in a separate window, do one of the following: ● Select Media > MediaBay. ● Press F5. The MediaBay is divided into the following sections: 1 File Browser Allows you to scan specific folders in your file system, and to add favorites. 2 Toolbar Contains tools and shortcuts for settings and functions in the MediaBay, and allows you to switch between the previously defined favorite locations.
MediaBay and Media Rack MediaBay Window Previewer Section on page 641 Attribute Inspector on page 650 Setting up the MediaBay on page 634 MediaBay Toolbar The toolbar contains tools and shortcuts for settings and functions in the MediaBay. Navigation Back Navigates to the previously used folder. Forward Navigates to the most recent folder. Up Navigates to the parent folder. Favorites Add Favorite Allows you to add the selected folder as a favorite folder.
MediaBay and Media Rack MediaBay Window Rating Filter Rating Filter Filters files according to their rating. Reset Result Filters Reset Filters Allows you to reset the filters. Results Update Results Updates the results. Shuffle Results Shuffles the Results page. Attribute Counter Attribute Counter Shows the number of attributes that are being updated. Right Divider Right Divider Tools that are placed to the right of the divider are always shown.
MediaBay and Media Rack MediaBay Window Set up Window Layout Allows you to set up the window layout. Set up Toolbar Opens a pop-up menu where you can set up which toolbar elements are visible. Setting up the MediaBay You can show and hide the different sections of the MediaBay. This saves screen space and allows you to display only the information that you need. PROCEDURE 1. Click Set up Window Layout. 2. Activate/Deactivate the checkboxes for the sections that you want to show/hide. 3.
MediaBay and Media Rack MediaBay Window RESULT All files that are found in the scanned folder are shown in the Results list. The scan result is saved in a database file. The color of the checkmark helps you to identify which folders and subfolders are scanned: ● White indicates that all subfolders are included in the scan. ● Orange indicates that at least one subfolder is excluded from the scan.
MediaBay and Media Rack MediaBay Window RELATED LINKS Scanning Folders on page 634 Refresh Views If you change already scanned folders by adding or removing files when Cubase is closed, you must rescan the corresponding media folders. This also applies if you modified attributes of your user content using another program. If you have made changes to your content and want the changes to be displayed in the MediaBay, you must refresh the views of the corresponding media folders.
MediaBay and Media Rack MediaBay Window To exclude a particular category, select Select None on the corresponding submenu. If Allow Editing in Results List is activated in the MediaBay Settings, you can also edit attributes in the Results list. Otherwise, this is only possible in the Attribute Inspector.
MediaBay and Media Rack MediaBay Window Filtering According to Media Type You can set up the Results list to display only a particular media type or a combination of media types. PROCEDURE 1. In the MediaBay toolbar, open the Show Media Types selector. 2. Activate the media types that you want to be displayed in the Results list. RESULT The files are filtered by the selected media type. Show Media Types Selector You can activate the media types that you want to be displayed in the Results list.
MediaBay and Media Rack MediaBay Window Pattern Banks Shows all pattern banks (file name extension .patternbank). Pattern banks are generated via the MIDI plug-in Beat Designer. For more information, see the separate document Plug-in Reference. Track Presets Shows all track presets for audio, MIDI, and instrument tracks (file name extension .trackpreset). Track presets are a combination of track settings, effects, and MixConsole settings that can be applied to new tracks of various types.
MediaBay and Media Rack MediaBay Window NOTE The Search MediaBay field has the same function as the matches operator of the logical filter. However, the search is applied to all file attributes. ● Click the field and enter the text that you want to find. For example, if you are looking for all audio loops relating to drum sounds, enter “drum” in the search field. The search results will contain loops called “Drums 01”, “Drumloop”, “Snare Drum”, etc.
MediaBay and Media Rack MediaBay Window IMPORTANT When you are searching for files whose names contain a hyphen, put the search text in quotation marks. Otherwise the program treats the hyphen as the boolean operator “not”. NOTE These operators can also be used for logical filtering. RELATED LINKS Applying a Logical Filter on page 647 Resetting the Results List You can reset all filter settings and filter results. ● In the MediaBay toolbar, click Reset Filter.
MediaBay and Media Rack MediaBay Window NOTE If you import an audio file into your project for which Align Beats to Project is activated in the Previewer, Musical Mode is automatically activated for the corresponding event. 5 Wait for Project Play Synchronizes the play and stop functions from the Transport panel with the play and stop buttons in the Previewer section.
MediaBay and Media Rack MediaBay Window Specifies the preview level. 3 Output Allows you to select the output device. 4 Align Beats to Project Plays back the selected file in sync with the project, starting at the project cursor position. Note that this can apply real-time time stretching to your MIDI file. 5 Auto Play New Results Selection Automatically plays back the selected file.
MediaBay and Media Rack MediaBay Window 1 Transport controls Start and stop the preview. 2 Previewer Sequence Mode Allows you to load a MIDI file to apply the selected preset to the MIDI file. You can also select the Memo Recorder mode that continually repeats a given sequence of notes as a loop. 3 MIDI Activity Allows you to monitor incoming MIDI messages. 4 Preview Level fader Specifies the preview level. 5 Keyboard You can display the Keyboard in keyboard display mode or in piano display mode.
MediaBay and Media Rack MediaBay Window Previewing Presets Using the Memo Recorder Mode The Memo Recorder mode continually repeats a given sequence of notes as a loop. NOTE You cannot use the Memo Recorder mode when previewing presets using a MIDI file. PROCEDURE 1. On the Previewer Sequence Mode pop-up menu, select Memo Recorder. 2. Activate Play. 3. Play some notes on the MIDI keyboard or on the computer keyboard.
MediaBay and Media Rack MediaBay Window One pattern bank contains 4 subbanks which in turn contain 12 patterns each. Subbanks can contain empty patterns. Selecting an empty pattern in the Previewer section has no effect. Patterns containing data are indicated by a circle in the upper part of the key in the display. 4 Auto Play New Results Selection Automatically plays back the selected file.
MediaBay and Media Rack MediaBay Window is empty Use this option to find files for which certain attributes have not been specified yet. matches The search result must include the text or number entered in the text field to the right. You can also use boolean operators. Add apostrophes to find exact matches for the entered words, for example, ‘drum’ AND ‘funky’. This option allows for a very advanced text search.
MediaBay and Media Rack MediaBay Window RESULT The Results list is automatically updated, showing only the files that correspond to your search conditions. Advanced Text Search You can perform advanced text searches using boolean operators. PREREQUISITE The folder in which you want to search for files is selected. PROCEDURE 1. In the Filters section, activate Logical. 2. Select an attribute on the Search in these Attributes pop-up menu or keep the Any Attribute setting on. 3.
MediaBay and Media Rack MediaBay Window Displays the attribute values and how often a certain attribute value is available among your media files. NOTE ● Some attributes are directly linked to each other. For example, for each category value, there are certain sub-category values available. Changing the value in one of these attribute columns displays different values in the other column. ● Each attribute column displays only the attribute values that are found.
MediaBay and Media Rack MediaBay Window Resetting the Filter PROCEDURE ● To reset the filter, click Reset Filter at the top of the Filters section. This also resets the Results list. Attribute Inspector When you have selected one or more files in the Results list, the Attribute Inspector shows a list of attributes and their values. NOTE The Attribute Inspector is not available in the Media rack in the right zone. In the Attribute Inspector, you can also edit and add new attribute values.
MediaBay and Media Rack MediaBay Window Select Media Types Allows you to select the media types that are displayed on the Results page. Add User Attribute Opens the Add User Attribute dialog, where you can add custom user attributes. You can select the Attribute Type and the Display Name. Reset to Default Resets the attribute list to the default settings. Attribute Shows the attribute name. Select Shows whether an attribute is activated or deactivated.
MediaBay and Media Rack MediaBay Window ● Some attributes cannot be edited. In this case, the file format does not permit changing this value, or changing a particular value makes no sense. For example, you cannot change the file size in the MediaBay. PROCEDURE 1. In the Results list, select the file for which you want to make settings. The corresponding attribute values are displayed in the Attribute Inspector. You can also select several files and make settings for them simultaneously.
MediaBay and Media Rack MediaBay Window RELATED LINKS MediaBay Toolbar on page 632 Editing Attributes of Write-Protected Files Media files can be write-protected due to a number of reasons: the content could have been provided by someone who write-protected the files, the file format could restrict write operations by the MediaBay, etc. In the MediaBay, the write protection status of files is shown as an attribute in the Attribute Inspector and in the Write Protection column in the Results list.
MediaBay and Media Rack MediaBay Window 3. Open the Select Media Types pop-up menu, activate the media types that you want to display, and click anywhere in the MediaBay. The Attribute Inspector now shows a list of all attributes available for these media types. 4. ● If you have activated more than one media type, your settings affect all selected types. An orange checkmark indicates that the current display settings for an attribute differ for the selected media types.
MediaBay and Media Rack MediaBay Window You can insert the files into your project by using drag and drop, by double-clicking, or by using the context menu options. Using Media Files The MediaBay window and the Media rack in the right zone of the Project window offer you multiple possibilities to search for specific files, loops, samples, presets, and patterns that you can use in your project. Once you have found the media files that you were looking for, you can load them into your project.
MediaBay and Media Rack MediaBay Window Loading Instrument Presets PROCEDURE 1. 2. Do one of the following: ● In the MediaBay, open the media types selector, click Plug-in Presets, and select a preset for an instrument plug-in. ● In the Media rack in the right zone, click the VST Instruments tile, and click the following tiles until you can select the preset in the Results list.
MediaBay and Media Rack MediaBay Window Loading FX Chain Presets PROCEDURE 1. Do one of the following: ● In the MediaBay, open the media types selector, click FX Chain Presets, and select a preset. ● In the Media rack in the right zone, click Presets > FX Chain Presets, and click the following tiles until you can select the preset in the Results list. 2. In the Project window, select an audio track. 3.
MediaBay and Media Rack Working with Volume Databases ● Double-click the pattern bank to create a new instrument track with the loaded preset. ● Drag the pattern bank and drop it on an instrument track to apply the pattern bank to the track. ● Drag the pattern bank and drop it on the track list to create a new instrument track with the loaded pattern bank. RESULT Groove Agent is loaded as a track instrument.
MediaBay and Media Rack Working with Volume Databases IMPORTANT You must select the topmost directory level for this. You cannot create a database file for a lower-level folder. NOTE If you create a volume database on a network drive, multiple users can access it. However, this can lead to write conflicts as only one user can write to the database at a time. RESULT The file information for this drive is written into a new database file.
MediaBay and Media Rack MediaBay Settings Removing Volume Databases If you have worked on another computer using an external hard disk and return to your own computer and connect the external device again as part of your system setup, you no longer need a separate volume database for it. Any data on this drive can be included in the local database file again, by removing the extra database file. PROCEDURE ● In the File Browser section, right-click the volume database and select Remove Volume Database.
MediaBay and Media Rack MediaBay Settings Allow Editing in Results List Allows you to edit attributes in the Results list. If this option is deactivated, attributes can only be edited in the Attribute Inspector. Show File Extensions in Results List Shows file name extensions in the Results list. Scan Unknown File Types When scanning for media files, the MediaBay ignores files with an unknown file extension.
Surround Sound Cubase provides integrated surround sound features with support for several formats. All audiorelated channels and busses can handle multichannel speaker configurations. A channel in the MixConsole can contain either complete surround mixes or an individual speaker channel which is part of a surround setup. Cubase offers the following surround-related features: ● You can route audio-related tracks, that is, audio, instrument, and sampler tracks, to surround channels.
Surround Sound Available Surround Channel Configurations RELATED LINKS Export Audio Mixdown on page 1020 Available Surround Channel Configurations Cubase supports several surround channel configurations. The following surround channel configurations are supported: LRC This format uses the channels left, right, and center. Quadro This is the original quadraphonic format for music, with one speaker in each corner. This format was intended for vinyl record players. 5.
Surround Sound Preparations for Creating Surround Mixes LRC+LFE This is the same format as LRC but with an additional LFE channel. LRS+LFE This is the same format as LRS but with an additional LFE channel. IMPORTANT In Cubase, the order of surround busses and side busses follows the specification of Microsoft Inc. To meet the Dolby specification for side surround busses and surround rear busses, swap the device ports of surround busses and side busses.
Surround Sound Preparations for Creating Surround Mixes Output bus in 5.1 channel configuration with stereo child bus RELATED LINKS Adding Child Busses on page 33 Surround Routing The processing format of VST MultiPanner depends on the channel routing. You can use the Routing and the Direct Routing racks in the MixConsole to route audio-related tracks to output busses or group channels with a surround configuration. For example, if a mono source channel is routed to a 5.1 bus, the panner works in 5.
Surround Sound Preparations for Creating Surround Mixes NOTE If a stereo audio channel is routed directly to a speaker channel, the left and the right channels are mixed to mono. The pan control for the audio channel determines the balance between the left and the right channel in the resulting mono mix. Center pan produces a mix of equal proportion. Routing Channels to Child Busses If you add a child bus within a surround bus, it appears as a subentry of the surround bus on the routing selector.
Surround Sound VST MultiPanner ● You want to make a live recording with a surround setup. ● You have prepared surround premixes, for example, stems, that you want to record on a new audio track with a surround configuration. RELATED LINKS Audio File Import on page 285 Adding Input and Output Busses on page 33 VST MultiPanner The VST MultiPanner plug-in allows you to position a sound source in the surround field or to modify existing premixes.
Surround Sound VST MultiPanner The following settings and options are available: Movement restriction buttons Allow you to restrict the movement to one axis when moving the sound source with the mouse. NOTE ● The movement restriction buttons do not affect the controls in the positioning section below the pan area. Reset Parameters Alt-click this button to reset all panner parameters to their default values. Input level meter Shows the input level for all speaker channels.
Surround Sound VST MultiPanner Speaker channel buttons The speaker buttons around the pan area represent the output configuration. The buttons allow you to solo, mute, and disable the corresponding channels. NOTE You cannot automate the soloing of output channels. Output level meter Shows the output level for all speaker channels. The numeric values above the meters indicate the peak levels registered for the channels. Left-Right Pan Sets the position of the signal on the x-axis.
Surround Sound VST MultiPanner LFE Level Sets the signal amount that is sent to the LFE (Low Frequency Effects) channel. NOTE The LFE channel is used as a full-range channel, no low-pass filtering is applied.
Surround Sound VST MultiPanner In the miniature views, the following applies: ● To move the signal source in the surround field, click and drag. ● In the Inspector miniature view, you can also solo, mute, and disable channels. NOTE In all miniature panner views, you can hold Shift while moving the sound source to allow for more accurate positioning.
Surround Sound VST MultiPanner Position of the Sound Source The pan area of the VST MultiPanner plug-in shows you the position of the sound source and allows you to move it. In the pan area, the virtual position of the sound source is shown as a circle. The left and right stereo channels are shown in yellow and red. Mono channels are shown in blue.
Surround Sound VST MultiPanner Movement Restriction Modes VST MultiPanner allows you to restrict the movement within the pan area. This way, you can move the sound source along a specific axis, for example, from bottom left to top right. The following positioning modes and modifier keys are available: Standard Positioning Mode Mouse movements are not restricted. Fine-Scaled Positioning Mode Mouse movements are scaled to allow very fine movements.
Surround Sound VST MultiPanner IMPORTANT ● If Position Left/Right Channels Independently is activated, automation data is written for several parameters. Due to this, specific automation rules apply. ● Automation data for the independent positioning mode is always written for the complete sound source, not for individual channels. This means it is not possible to record automation for one stereo channel and then add automation for the other stereo channel in a second go, for example.
Surround Sound VST MultiPanner 1 Acoustically effective positions of the left and right channel within the pan area 2 Theoretical positions of the left and right panning handle outside the pan area 3 Positioning handle outside the pan area Pan Controls Left-Right Pan and Rear-Front Pan allow you to pan the sound source on the x-axis and on the y-axis. NOTE The panning controls are not affected by the movement restriction buttons.
Surround Sound VST MultiPanner Orbit Controls The orbit controls allow you to rotate the sound source, including all input channels, around the center of the surround field. 1 Orbit Center This is the main control that allows you to perform the rotation. 2 Radius If you use Orbit Center, Radius allows you to control the distance of the sound source from the center of the surround field without changing the angle.
Surround Sound VST MultiPanner Divergence Controls Front Divergence, Front/Rear Divergence, and Rear Divergence determine the attenuation curves used when positioning sound sources for x-axis front, y-axis front/rear, and x-axis rear. If all divergence controls are set to 0 %, positioning a sound source on a speaker sets all other speakers to level zero. With higher values, the other speakers receive a percentage of the sound source.
Surround Sound VST MultiPanner Soloed, Muted, and Disabled Speaker Channels The speaker buttons around the pan area represent the output configuration and allow you to disable, solo, or mute channels. The speaker buttons around the Top View and the Rear View represent the output configuration and allow you to disable, solo, or mute channels. Enabled speaker This channel is enabled. Disabled speaker This channel is disabled. Its signal is distributed to the other channels instead.
Surround Sound MixConvert V6 Remote Controlling VST MultiPanner You can control the VST MultiPanner plug-in remotely with several control devices. To control all panner functions, you may need updated software for your device. Yamaha Nuage Avid The parameters of VST MultiPanner are mapped on the following devices: ● System 5-MC ● S6 ● Artist Series Panning with a Joystick You can use a joystick to remote-control Rear-Front Pan and Left-Right Pan in VST MultiPanner.
Surround Sound MixConvert V6 NOTE There is one exception to this behavior. If a stereo channel is routed to a mono destination through the channel routing or a cue send routing, a normal stereo panner is inserted. However, this stereo panner controls the balance of the left and right channels as they are blended into the mono destination. The center position blends both channels together by equal amounts. With the pan set all the way to the left, only the left channel can be heard, and vice versa.
Surround Sound MixConvert V6 RELATED LINKS MixConvert V6 Plug-in Panel on page 681 VST MultiPanner on page 667 Input and Output Channel Configurations on page 682 Miniature Views on page 670 MixConvert V6 Plug-in Panel The MixConvert V6 plug-in panel allows you to set the levels of the surround channels, and to solo or mute channels for input and output channels. ● To show/hide the Input or Output sections, click the corresponding arrow button.
Surround Sound MixConvert V6 Listen to Surround Channels on Front Channels Solos all surround channels, including the side channels, and routes or downmixes them to the front speakers. Center Level Sets the level of the front center channel. LFE Fader Level Sets the level of the LFE channel. Surround Level Sets the level of the surround channels. The level of the surround channels cannot be adjusted individually. Global Gain Level Sets the level of all output channels.
Surround Sound Surround Mix Export ● To solo a channel exclusively, Ctrl/Cmd-click the corresponding speaker icon. ● To solo all front channels or all surround channels, click the corresponding button in the center section. ● To solo the LFE channel, click the corresponding cross-hair icon in the center of the channel display. NOTE Alternatively, click the Solo Input/Output LFE Channel button in the center section. ● To mute a channel, Shift-click the corresponding speaker icon.
Surround Sound 3D Mixes for Ambisonics ● You can edit Ambisonics events like any other audio in the Project window, the Sample Editor, or the Direct Offline Processing window, for example. All signals of an Ambisonics file are edited simultaneously. NOTE Not every editing operation is suited for Ambisonics audio. For example, avoid operations that change the phase and levels of the audio signals against each other.
Surround Sound 3D Mixes for Ambisonics Channel Routing for Ambisonics Mixes You can route any channel to an Ambisonics channel. Which channel configurations are allowed in an Ambisonics mix depends on the position of the Ambisonics panner plug-in in the signal path: ● If you use the panner plug-in as a channel panner in the MixConsole, you can use any audio channel format.
Surround Sound 3D Mixes for Ambisonics Top View/Rear View Shows the sound field from the top and the rear, and allows you to position the sound source by dragging the panning handles. The orientation is bound to the head-tracking viewing angle. This means, what you see in front of you when using a VR display is also in front of the head symbol in both views. Field Size Sets the perceived size of the sound field. It is indicated by the size of the head symbol in Top View and Rear View.
Surround Sound 3D Mixes for Ambisonics VST AmbiDecoder Panel The VST AmbiDecoder plug-in converts Ambisonics audio for playback on headphones or stereo and multi-channel speaker setups. It is used automatically in the Control Room Phones and Control Room Main channels, and can also be used as an insert plug-in for mixing Ambisonics channels. Input Format > Output Format Shows the audio formats of the input and output signals.
Surround Sound 3D Mixes for Ambisonics Head Tracking If this button is activated, VST AmbiDecoder receives head-tracking data from the Head Tracking window. If this button is deactivated, you can use the Yaw, Pitch, and Roll controls on the VST AmbiDecoder panel for setting the rotation angles. Yaw Sets the yaw rotation angle. Pitch Sets the pitch rotation angle. Roll Sets the roll rotation angle.
Surround Sound 3D Mixes for Ambisonics NOTE For this to work, you must connect the VR player to Cubase and activate Send HeadTracking Data in the GoPro VR Player Remote window. RELATED LINKS Head Tracking Window on page 689 VST MultiPanner Plug-in Panel in Ambisonics Mode on page 685 360° Video Playback on page 692 GoPro VR Player Remote Window on page 693 Head Tracking Window In the Head Tracking window, you can set up Cubase for receiving positioning data from an external VR controller device.
Surround Sound 3D Mixes for Ambisonics Calibrate Yaw Defines the current yaw rotation angle as center. Monitoring Ambisonics Audio Binaurally via the Phones Channel The Control Room Phones channel allows you to listen to Ambisonics audio binaurally via headphones, automatically using VST AmbiDecoder for decoding. PREREQUISITE ● In the Audio Connections window, you have set an Ambisonics output bus as main mix and enabled the Control Room.
Surround Sound 3D Mixes for Ambisonics NOTE For details on how to use a third-party Ambisonics decoder plug-in, refer to the documentation that comes with it. PROCEDURE 1. In the MixConsole, route your audio tracks to the Ambisonics output bus. 2. In the Downmix Presets section of the Control Room, select a preset with the same Ambisonics format as the main mix. 3. In the Channels section, disable Head Tracking on the miniature view of VST AmbiDecoder. 4.
Surround Sound 3D Mixes for Ambisonics Control Room Channel on page 429 Monitoring a Head-Locked Signal in VST AmbiDecoder You may not want some audio, for example, background music tracks, to be affected by head movements. VST AmbiDecoder allows you to bypass tracking by sending a head-locked signal via side-chain. PREREQUISITE In the Audio Connections window, you have set an Ambisonics output bus as main mix and enabled the Control Room. PROCEDURE 1.
Surround Sound 3D Mixes for Ambisonics GoPro VR Player Remote Window GoPro VR Player Remote allows Cubase to control the transport and viewing angle of GoPro VR Player. ● To open the GoPro VR Player Remote window, select Project > GoPro VR Player Remote. Video File Shows the selected video file for playback in GoPro VR Player. Select Video File Allows you to select a video file that is located on your local computer or on a remote computer in your network.
Surround Sound 3D Mixes for Ambisonics 7. In the GoPro VR Player Remote window, click Select Video File, and select the video file in the file dialog. This allows Cubase to remote-control GoPro VR Player. The file selection is saved in your Cubase project. NOTE If the video file is located on a remote computer in your network that you cannot access through the file dialog, you can click the video file field and manually enter the full file path. 8. 9.
Surround Sound 3D Mixes for Ambisonics VST AmbiConverter Panel When working with Ambisonics audio, Cubase supports AmbiX format only. The VST AmbiConverter plug-in allows you to convert Ambisonics audio between Furse-Malham (FuMa) and AmbiX format. Input level meter Shows the input level for all speaker channels. Ambisonics format display Shows the order of the Ambisonics audio format. Output level meter Shows the output level for all speaker channels.
Automation In essence, automation means recording the values for a particular MixConsole or effect parameter. When you create your final mix, Cubase can adjust this particular parameter control. Automation Curves Within a Cubase project, the changes in a parameter value over time are reflected as curves on automation tracks.
Automation Writing Automation Data NOTE R is automatically enabled when you enable W. This allows Cubase to read existing automation data at any time. You can separately deactivate W if you only want to read existing data. There are also global read and write indicator buttons Activate/Deactivate Read/Write for All Tracks on the Project window toolbar and the MixConsole toolbar. These buttons light up as soon as there is an enabled R or W button on any channel/track within your project.
Automation Writing Automation Data RESULT All actions that you recorded are reproduced exactly. When you drag a plug-in to a different insert slot on the same channel, any existing automation data moves with the plug-in. When you drag it to an insert slot on a different channel, any existing automation data is not transferred to the new channel. Manual Writing of Automation Data You can add automation events manually by drawing automation curves on an automation track. PROCEDURE 1.
Automation Editing Automation Events The following Line tool modes are available: Line If you click on the automation track and drag with the Line tool in Line mode, you can create automation events in a line. This is a quick way to create linear fades, etc. Parabola If you click and drag on the automation track with the Line tool in Parabola mode, you can create more natural curves and fades. NOTE The result depends on the direction from which you draw the parabolic curve.
Automation Editing Automation Events Creating Smooth Transitions Between Automation Events (Bézier Automation Curves) Cubase supports bézier automation curves that allow you to create smooth transitions between automation events. This way, you can edit linear ramp curves with much more precision, flexibility, and intuition. PREREQUISITE The Object Selection tool is active. PROCEDURE 1. Move the mouse pointer on the linear ramp curve segment that you want to edit. A handle is shown on the curve segment.
Automation Editing Automation Events ● To select multiple events, select a range with the Range Selection tool or Shift-click the events. ● To select all automation events on an automation track, right-click the automation track and select Select All Events from the context menu. Selected events are indicated by a dark color. NOTE If you select several events of a ramp automation curve, the automation event editor becomes available.
Automation Editing Automation Events If you click on the upper border of the editor, you can move the entire curve vertically. This allows you to raise or lower the values of the event values of the curve. 5 Compress Right If you Alt-click in the upper right corner of the editor, you can compress or expand the right part of the curve. This allows you to compress or expand the event values at the end of the curve.
Automation Editing Automation Events RESULT The curve segment between the two automation events is scaled. Moving Automation Events Moving Single Automation Events ● To move a selected automation event, click it and drag to the left or to the right. ● To restrict the direction of the movement, press Ctrl/Cmd and drag. NOTE Snap is taken into account when you move automation curves horizontally. To turn it off temporarily, hold down Ctrl/Cmd and any other modifier, and drag.
Automation Automation Tracks Automation Tracks Most of the tracks in your project have automation tracks, one for each automated parameter. To show automation tracks, you must open them. Showing/Hiding Automation Tracks ● Position the mouse pointer over the lower left corner of the track and click the arrow icon (Show/Hide Automation) that appears. ● Right-click the track in the track list and select Show/Hide Automation from the context menu.
Automation Virgin Territory vs. Initial Value Muting Automation Tracks By muting an automation track, you turn off automation for a single parameter. ● To mute individual automation tracks, click Mute Automation in the track list. Virgin Territory vs. Initial Value For parameter automation, Cubase works either with an initial value or with virgin territory.
Automation Automation Panel ● On the Project window toolbar, click Open Automation Panel ● Press F6. . RELATED LINKS Operations Tab on page 706 Operations Tab The Operations tab contains all functions that you need to perform automation operations. In the topmost section, the following options are available: Read/Write/Suspend Activate/Deactivates read/write for all tracks, or suspends read/write for all tracks.
Automation Automation Panel Cross-Over Continues writing automation data for as long as playback lasts or Write is enabled, and continues with the same value setting when you release the control. When you re-touch the fader and move it towards the original value, punch out occurs automatically as soon as you cross the original curve. Trim Allows you to modify the automation curve from a previous pass. Automation Functions Gives you access to a number of general automation functions.
Automation Automation Panel Automation Modes Cubase provides different punch out modes for automation: Touch, Auto-Latch, and CrossOver. In all modes, automation data is written as soon as a parameter control is touched in play mode. They differ in their punch out behavior. The automation modes are available on the upper part of the Automation Panel and on the Project window toolbar on the Global Automation Mode pop-up menu.
Automation Automation Panel NOTE You can set the time it takes for the parameter to reach the previously set value with the Return Time setting on the Settings page of the Automation Panel. RELATED LINKS Settings Tab on page 715 Auto-Latch Auto-Latch is useful in situations where you want to keep a value over a longer period of time – for example when making EQ settings for a particular scene.
Automation Automation Panel ● Once your pass has started, the writing of automation data continues for as long as playback lasts or Write is enabled. ● When you release the control, the automation pass continues, with the value setting remaining the same. ● When you re-touch the fader and move it towards the original value, punch out occurs automatically as soon as you cross the original curve.
Automation Automation Panel You can use Trim either in stop or in play mode: ● In stop mode, you can select one of the Fill options and edit the trim curve manually by clicking on it and moving it up or down. The original automation curve is displayed in a lighter color and its values are merged with the trim curve. The resulting automation curve is displayed in a darker color. ● In play mode, the events of the original automation curve are trimmed as the project cursor passes over them.
Automation Automation Panel Fill Gaps with Current Value (Selected Tracks) This option is used with virgin territories. Select this option to fill any gaps in the automation curves of the selected tracks. The gaps are filled with the current value of the corresponding control. Freeze All Trim Automation in Project Freezes all trim automation for all tracks in the project. Freeze Trim Automation of Selected Tracks Freezes all trim automation for the selected tracks.
Automation Automation Panel Activating Loop PREREQUISITE You have set up a loop range with the left and right locators. PROCEDURE 1. On the Automation Panel, activate Touch, and activate Loop as Fill option. 2. Start playback. 3. Move the fader until you have found the volume setting that you want and release the fader to punch out. The found value is set within the range that is defined by the left and right locators. Activating Gaps PREREQUISITE You have set up virgin territories.
Automation Automation Panel 2. On the Automation Panel, select To End as Fill option. 3. Click and draw to create an automation curve. 4. Release the mouse button. At the moment of release, a final automation event is created. The automation curve is written from this last event through to the end of the project. NOTE This procedure can be used with all the Fill options.
Automation Automation Panel To avoid inadvertently excluding whole tracks from your mix in this way, you can exclude Mute from all automation writing by clicking Mute in the Suspend Write category on the Automation Panel. Show Options The Show options allow you to open all automation tracks for a specific parameter. This gives you an overview of the automated parameter. ● To open the volume, pan, EQ, sends, or inserts automation tracks for all tracks, click the corresponding parameter.
Automation MIDI Controller Automation Reduction Level Punching out removes all superfluous automation events. This results in an automation curve that contains only the events necessary to reproduce your actions. A reduction level value of 0 % removes repeated automation points only. A reduction level value between 1 to 100 % smoothens the automation curve. The default value of 50 % should reduce the automation data amount significantly without touching the sound result of the existing automation.
Automation MIDI Controller Automation Average When this option is selected, the average values between part and track automation are used. Modulation In this mode, the automation track curve modulates the existing part automation, with higher curve points emphasizing the automation values and lower curve points reducing the automation values even further. NOTE The settings that you make for a controller are applied to all MIDI tracks that use this controller.
Automation MIDI Controller Automation Controller list Lists all MIDI controllers for which you can specify the record destination and the merge mode for automation separately. This gives you full control over the MIDI automation (destination as well as merge mode) in your project. Record Destination Click in the Record Destination column for a MIDI controller to open a pop-up menu where you can choose where you want recorded data of this particular MIDI controller to be saved.
VST Instruments VST instruments are software synthesizers or other sound sources that are contained within Cubase. They are played internally via MIDI. You can add effects or EQ to VST instruments. Cubase allows you to make use of VST instruments in the following ways: ● By adding a VST instrument and assigning one or several MIDI tracks to it. ● By creating an instrument track. This is a combination of a VST instrument, an instrument channel, and a MIDI track.
VST Instruments VST Instrument Control Panel VST Instrument Control Panel The VST instrument control panel allows you to set up the parameters of the selected instrument. The contents, design, and layout of the control panel depend on the selected instrument. The following controls are available: 1 Activate Instrument Activates/Deactivates the instrument. 2 Read Automation/Write Automation Allows you to read/write automation for the instrument parameter settings.
VST Instruments VST Instrument Control Panel Opens a pop-up menu that allows you to save, rename, or remove a preset. 10 Add VST Plug-in Picture to Media Rack Adds a picture of the VST plug-in to the Media rack. This is only available for plug-ins of other vendors. 11 VST Instrument context menu Opens a menu with specific functions and settings.
VST Instruments VST Instrument Selector VST Instrument Selector The VST instrument selector allows you to select VST instruments of the active collection. To open the VST instrument selector, do one of the following: ● Select Studio > VST Instruments, and click Add Rack Instrument. ● Select Studio > VST Instruments, click Add Track Instrument, and open the Instrument pop-up menu. The following controls are available: 1 Expand Tree/Collapse Tree Expands/Collapses the tree.
VST Instruments VST Instruments Window NOTE The VST Instruments in the right zone are just another representation of the VST Instruments window. All features are the same. RELATED LINKS Showing/Hiding Zones on page 44 Project Window Toolbar on page 45 VST Instruments Window The VST Instruments window allows you to add VST instruments for MIDI and instrument tracks. All instruments that are used in your project are shown. You can access up to 8 quick controls for each added instrument.
VST Instruments VST Instrument Controls Find Instruments Opens a selector that allows you to find a loaded instrument. Set Remote-Control Focus for VST Quick Controls to Previous Instrument Allows you to set the remote-control focus to the previous instrument. Set Remote-Control Focus for VST Quick Controls to Next Instrument Allows you to set the remote-control focus to the next instrument. Show/Hide all VST Quick Controls Shows/Hides the default quick controls for all loaded instruments.
VST Instruments VST Instrument Controls This lights up when MIDI data is received by the instrument. Click this button to open a pop-up menu that allows you to select, mute/unmute, and solo/unsolo for tracks that send MIDI to the instrument (inputs). NOTE If you resize the VST Instruments window, you can access this option by using an Input/ Output Options pop-up menu. 7 Activate Outputs This control is only available if the instrument provides more than one output.
VST Instruments Presets for Instruments NOTE This option is only available for VST 3 instruments that support side-chaining. Remote Control Editor Opens the Remote Control Editor. RELATED LINKS Side-Chain Input for VST Instruments on page 733 Presets for Instruments You can load and save presets for instruments. These contain all the settings that are required for the sound that you want.
VST Instruments Presets for Instruments ● In the VST Instruments window, click Preset Browser for the instrument, and select Save Preset. ● In the control panel for the VST instrument, click Preset Browser, and select Save Preset. 2. In the Save Preset dialog, enter a name for the preset. 3. Optional: Click Show Attribute Inspector and define attributes for the preset. 4. Click OK to save the preset and close the dialog.
VST Instruments Playing Back VST Instruments Programs Programs contain only the settings for one program. For multitimbral instruments, this includes only the settings for one sound slot. Saving Track Presets You can save your settings on instrument tracks as track presets for further use. PROCEDURE 1. Right-click the instrument track, and from the context menu, select Save Track Preset. 2. In the Save Track Preset dialog, enter a name for the preset. 3.
VST Instruments Latency ● Select Studio > VST Instruments. ● Select the instrument track and open the top Inspector section. 2. Click Freeze. 3. In the Freeze Instrument Options dialog, make your changes. 4. Click OK. RESULT ● The instrument is rendered to an audio file, and on playback you hear the same sound as before freezing. ● Less CPU load is used. ● The Freeze button lights up. ● The MIDI/instrument track controls are grayed out. ● The MIDI parts are locked.
VST Instruments Import and Export Options If the latency is too high to allow comfortable real time VST instrument playback from a keyboard, you can use another MIDI sound source for live playback and recording, and switch to the VST instrument for playback. RELATED LINKS Selecting an Audio Driver on page 16 Delay Compensation During playback, Cubase automatically compensates any delay inherent in the VST plug-ins you use.
VST Instruments Import and Export Options 3. In the Results list, select a MIDI loop and drag it to an empty section in the Project window. RESULT An instrument track is created and the instrument part is inserted at the position where you dragged the file. The Inspector reflects all settings that are saved in the MIDI loop, for example, the VST instrument that was used, applied insert effects, track parameters, etc. NOTE You can also drag MIDI loops onto existing instrument or MIDI tracks.
VST Instruments VST Quick Controls The default folder cannot be changed. However, you can create subfolders within this folder to organize your MIDI loops. To create a subfolder, click New Folder in the Save MIDI Loop dialog. Exporting Instrument Tracks as MIDI Files You can export instrument tracks as standard MIDI files. PROCEDURE 1. Select an instrument track. 2. Select File > Export > MIDI File. 3. In the Export MIDI File dialog, select a location and enter a name for the MIDI file. 4.
VST Instruments Side-Chain Input for VST Instruments RELATED LINKS Remote Controlling Cubase on page 749 Connecting VST Quick Controls with Remote Controllers on page 733 Activating Pick-up Mode for Hardware Controls on page 748 Connecting VST Quick Controls with Remote Controllers VST Quick Controls become powerful if you use them together with a remote controller. PREREQUISITE The MIDI output on your remote unit is connected to a MIDI input on your MIDI interface. PROCEDURE 1.
VST Instruments Side-Chain Input for VST Instruments ● To process the audio signal completely through the instrument, route the output of the audio track to the side-chain input of an instrument. ● To use both the clean audio signal and the signal processed by the instrument, route a send to the instrument side-chain. NOTE To hear the audio played through the instrument, you must trigger a note, either by playing MIDI events or by playing notes on your external MIDI keyboard.
VST Instruments External Instruments NOTE For detailed information about Retrologue and its parameters, see the separate document Retrologue. External Instruments An external instrument bus is an input (return) to your audio hardware, along with a MIDI connection via Cubase and additional settings. External instrument busses are created in the Audio Connections window.
Installing and Managing VST Plug-ins Cubase supports the VST 2 and VST 3 plug-in standards. You can install effects and instruments that comply with these formats. NOTE Cubase only supports 64-bit plug-ins. A plug-in is a piece of software that adds a specific functionality to Cubase. The audio effects and instruments that are used in Cubase are VST plug-ins. VST effect or VST instrument plug-ins normally have their own installation application.
Installing and Managing VST Plug-ins Plug-ins and Collections VST Plug-in Manager Window You can manage VST effects and VST instruments in the VST Plug-in Manager window. ● To open the VST Plug-in Manager window, select Studio > VST Plug-in Manager. The VST Plug-in Manager is divided into the following sections: VST Effects Lists all VST effects that are loaded in Cubase. To sort the list by a specific attribute, click the corresponding column header.
Installing and Managing VST Plug-ins Plug-ins and Collections RELATED LINKS Plug-ins and Collections on page 736 VST Audio System Page on page 17 VST Plug-in Manager Toolbar on page 738 VST 2 Plug-in Path Settings on page 739 Hiding Plug-ins on page 740 Reactivating Plug-ins from the Blocklist on page 740 VST Plug-in Manager Toolbar Shows tools and shortcuts for functions in the VST Plug-in Manager. ● To open the VST Plug-in Manager window, select Studio > VST Plug-in Manager.
Installing and Managing VST Plug-ins Adding New Plug-in Collections NOTE This option is only available for the Default collection. ● Sort By Vendor sorts the collection by vendor. NOTE This option is only available for the Default collection. VST 2 Plug-in Path Settings Shows information about the selected VST 2 plug-in path. ● To open the VST 2 Plug-in Path Settings, select Studio > VST Plug-in Manager, and click VST 2 Plug-in Path Settings. VST 2 Plug-in path list Shows all VST 2 plug-in paths.
Installing and Managing VST Plug-ins Hiding Plug-ins 3. Optional: Click New Folder. You can then move your plug-ins into these folders to organize them by categories, for example. 4. Enter a name for the new folder and click OK. 5. On the VST Effects tab or the VST Instruments tab, select the plug-ins that you want to add to the collection, and drag them in the new collection. If you created folders, you can drag the plug-ins directly into folders. RESULT The new collection is saved.
Installing and Managing VST Plug-ins Reactivating Plug-ins from the Blocklist NOTE You cannot reactivate 32-bit plug-ins, because they are not supported. 2. Click Reactivate. RESULT Cubase rescans the plug-in and removes it from the blocklist. AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK If you want to move the plug-in back to the blocklist, click Rescan All in the VST 2 Plug-in Path Settings, and restart Cubase. RELATED LINKS VST Plug-in Manager Window on page 737 741 Cubase Pro 10.5.
Track Quick Controls Cubase allows you to set up 8 different track parameters or settings as Track Quick Controls for quick access.
Track Quick Controls Parameter Assignment Track Quick Controls rack in the MixConsole Quick Controls assignments are saved with the project. You can assign Track Quick Controls to an external remote control device. For this to work, you must connect Track Quick Controls with your remote controller. You can automate parameter settings in the Quick Controls section using the Read/Write buttons (R and W).
Track Quick Controls Parameter Assignment The parameter name and its value are displayed in the slot. You can change the value by dragging the slider. 4. Repeat these steps for all slots for which you want to assign track parameters. RESULT You can now control the track parameters via the Quick Controls section in the Inspector or via the Track Quick Controls rack in the MixConsole. AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK You can rename a Quick Control by double-clicking on the name and entering a new one.
Track Quick Controls Parameter Assignment Setting Instrument Parameter Assignments to Default If you have changed the parameter assignment or if you manually routed a MIDI track to a VST instrument, you can retrieve the default assignments. PROCEDURE 1. In the Inspector for the instrument or MIDI track, open the Quick Controls section. 2. Click Get Default QCs from Plug-in. RESULT The instrument parameter assignments are set to default.
Track Quick Controls Controlling Automatable Parameters RELATED LINKS Assigning Track Parameters to Quick Controls on page 743 Loading Track Quick Control Assignments as Presets You can load presets for Quick Control assignments. PROCEDURE 1. In the Inspector for your track, open the Quick Controls section. 2. In the Quick Controls section, click Preset Management . 3. Select one of the presets in the upper list of the menu. RESULT The preset is loaded and allows you to access the channel parameters.
Track Quick Controls Connecting Track Quick Controls with Remote Controllers Showing Automated Quick Control Assignments You can show all Quick Control assignments that have been automated for one track. PROCEDURE 1. Click the track for which you want to show automated Quick Control assignments. 2. In the Inspector for your track, open the Quick Controls section. 3. In the Quick Controls section, click Preset Management . 4. Select Show Automated QC Assignments.
Track Quick Controls Connecting Track Quick Controls with Remote Controllers RELATED LINKS Generic Remote Page on page 753 Activating Pick-up Mode for Hardware Controls Pick-up Mode allows you to change configured Quick Control parameters without accidentally modifying the previous values. This is useful if you want the control to pick up the parameter at the value to which it was last set. If you move a hardware control, the parameter only changes once the control reaches the previous value.
Remote Controlling Cubase You can control Cubase via MIDI with a connected MIDI device. The supported devices are described in the separate document Remote Control Devices. You can also use a generic MIDI controller to remote-control Cubase. NOTE Most remote-control devices are able to control both MIDI and audio channels in Cubase, but the parameter setup may be different. Audio-specific controls such as EQ are disregarded when controlling MIDI channels.
Remote Controlling Cubase Setting up Remote Devices 3. In the table on the right, deactivate In ‘All MIDI Inputs’ for the MIDI input to which you have connected the MIDI remote unit. The State column reads Inactive. 4. Click OK. RESULT The remote unit input is removed from the All MIDI Inputs group. RELATED LINKS MIDI Port Setup Page on page 23 Setting up Remote Devices PROCEDURE 1. Select Studio > Studio Setup. 2.
Remote Controlling Cubase Setting up Remote Devices A bright stripe in the Project window and in the MixConsole indicates which channels are linked to the remote-control device. You can open a panel for the added device by selecting Studio > More Options. AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK Depending on your external MIDI control device, you might need to configure the parameters.
Remote Controlling Cubase Remote Devices and Automation MIDI Input Allows you to select a MIDI input. MIDI Output Allows you to select a MIDI output. User Commands Lists the controls or buttons of your remote device. Smart Switch Delay Allows you to specify a delay for the smart switch function. Functions that support the smart switch behavior are activated for as long as the button is pressed.
Remote Controlling Cubase Generic Remote Page 3. Click in the Category column for the control to which you want to assign a Cubase command, and select the category from the pop-up menu. The categories correspond to the categories in the Key Commands dialog. 4. Click in the Command column, and select the Cubase command from the pop-up menu. The available items on the pop-up menu depend on the selected category. 5. Click Apply.
Remote Controlling Cubase Generic Remote Page The following options are available: MIDI Input Allows you to select the MIDI input port to which your remote device is connected. MIDI Output Allows you to select the MIDI output port to which your remote device is connected. MIDI Remote Control Configuration The upper table shows the MIDI remote-control configuration of your remote device. Cubase Control Assignment The lower table allows you to assign Cubase controls to your remote device.
Remote Controlling Cubase Generic Remote Page The following options are available in the upper table: Control Name Double-click this field to change the name for the control, and enter the one written on the console, for example. This name is automatically reflected in the lower table. MIDI Status Allows you to specify the type of MIDI message sent by the control. MIDI Channel Allows you to select the MIDI channel on which the controller is transmitted.
Remote Controlling Cubase Generic Remote Page Delete Deletes the selected control from the table. Learn Allows you to assign MIDI messages by learning. Cubase Control Assignment Section You can specify the Cubase control assignment section in the lower table of the Generic Remote setup page. Each row in the table is assigned to the controller in the corresponding row in the MIDI remote-control configuration table.
Remote Controlling Cubase Generic Remote Page Bank pop-up menu Allows you to switch banks. This is necessary if your MIDI control device has 16 volume faders, and you are using 32 MixConsole channels in Cubase, for example. Rename Allows you to rename the selected bank. Add Adds banks to the pop-up menu. Delete Deletes the selected bank from the pop-up menu.
Remote Controlling Cubase Remote Control Editor VST Mixer Allows you to control MixConsole functions. If you select one of the available channels or Selected in the Channel/Category column, and one of the options in the Value/Action column, you can control that function of that specific channel or of the selected channel using your MIDI device. VST Control Room Allows you to control the functions of the Control Room.
Remote Controlling Cubase Remote Control Editor 1 Inspector Contains the settings and the parameter assignment for the selected cell. The upper section contains settings for the text label. The lower section contains settings for the knob and the switches. 2 Layout Selection Shows the name of the layout. Click to select a different layout.
Remote Controlling Cubase Remote Control Editor Remote Control Editor Toolbar Shows tools for setting up the layout. Remove All Assignments Removes all parameter assignments. Get Default Factory Layout/Copy Layout from Other Tab Reverts to the default settings for the current layout or copies the settings of one layout page to another. Activate/Deactivate Learn Mode Activates/Deactivates Learn mode for the Remote Control Editor.
Remote Controlling Cubase Remote Control Editor LED Ring An LED ring around the knob. The setting increases clockwise. LED Ring (counter-clockwise) An LED ring around the knob. The setting increases counter-clockwise. Center Width An LED ring that starts at the top center position, and when the settings increase, an LED is shown growing in both directions. Center Neutral A dial that starts at the top center position and can be moved left or right, like a pan control, for example.
Remote Controlling Cubase Remote Control Editor Assigning Parameters to Controls PROCEDURE 1. On the Remote Control Editor toolbar, click Activate/Deactivate Learn Mode. 2. Select the control that you want to assign to a plug-in parameter. 3. Do one of the following: 4. ● Click a parameter on the plug-in panel. ● Double-click on a control in the Remote Control Editor, and select a parameter from the list of available plug-in parameters. Press Esc to end Learn mode.
Remote Controlling Cubase Joysticks NOTE This is useful if your hardware devices have value fields that only display a limited number of characters, for example. Joysticks You can use a joystick to remote-control panning operations in Cubase. This can be useful, for example, for creating smooth automation curves. ● To use a joystick for remote-controlling, connect it to your computer and restart Cubase. After restarting the application, the joystick is automatically activated.
MIDI Realtime Parameters and MIDI Effects MIDI realtime means that you can change or transform MIDI events on MIDI or instrument tracks before they are sent to the MIDI outputs. This allows you to change the way MIDI data is played back. The actual MIDI events on the track are not affected. Therefore, MIDI realtime changes are not reflected in any MIDI editor.
MIDI Realtime Parameters and MIDI Effects MIDI Track Parameters Use the Input Transformer for the following purposes: ● Set up split keyboard combinations for recording left and right hands separately. ● Convert a controller, such as a foot pedal, into MIDI notes (for playing bass drum the right way). ● Filter out a specific type of MIDI data on one MIDI channel only. ● Turn aftertouch into any controller and vice versa. ● Invert velocity or pitch.
MIDI Realtime Parameters and MIDI Effects MIDI Modifiers Action list Allows you to specify any changes that are made to the found events. Function pop-up menu Allows you to select between Filter and Transform as a basic type of editing to be performed. Specifying Filter Conditions PROCEDURE 1. Select a MIDI or instrument track. 2. Perform one of the following actions: 3.
MIDI Realtime Parameters and MIDI Effects MIDI Modifiers MIDI Modifiers Section ● To open the MIDI Modifiers section, select a MIDI track, and in the Inspector, click MIDI Modifiers. NOTE If you want to compare the result of your modifier settings with the unprocessed MIDI, you can use the bypass button in the MIDI modifiers section. If this button is activated, the MIDI modifiers settings are temporarily disabled. Transpose Allows you to transpose all notes on the track in semitones.
MIDI Realtime Parameters and MIDI Effects MIDI Modifiers Range Allows you to specify a pitch or velocity range and either force all notes to fit within this range, or exclude all notes outside this range from playback. HMT: Follow Activate this option to apply Hermode tuning to the notes played on this track. HMT: Use for Analysis Activate this option to use the notes you played on this track to calculate retuning.
MIDI Realtime Parameters and MIDI Effects MIDI Modifiers Range Modes On the Range pop-up menu, you can select different range modes. Values are shown as numbers, from 0 to 127, for the velocity modes and as note numbers, from C-2 to G8, for the pitch modes. Vel. Limit Allows you to force all velocity values to fit within the range that you specify with the min and max values. Values below the lower limit are set to the min value, velocity values above the higher setting are set to the max value. Vel.
MIDI Realtime Parameters and MIDI Effects MIDI Modifiers RELATED LINKS Hermode Tuning on page 770 Hermode Tuning You can select different Hermode tuning types. ● To select a Hermode tuning type, select Project > Project Setup and select an option from the HMT Type pop-up menu. The following options are available: None No tuning is applied. Reference (pure 3/5) Tunes pure thirds and fifths. Classic (pure 3/5 equalized) Tunes pure thirds and fifths. In conflict situations, a slight equalization is applied.
MIDI Realtime Parameters and MIDI Effects MIDI Effects RELATED LINKS MIDI Track Inspector on page 133 MIDI Effects MIDI effects allow you to transform the MIDI data played back from the track in real time. You can add new events by using MIDI effects, or change MIDI event properties like pitches, for example. NOTE The included MIDI effect plug-ins are described in the separate document Plug-in Reference. MIDI Inserts MIDI insert effects are inserted in the signal chain of MIDI channels.
MIDI Realtime Parameters and MIDI Effects MIDI Effects Applying a MIDI Insert Effect You can apply MIDI insert effects to a MIDI track. PROCEDURE 1. Select the MIDI track. 2. In the Inspector, open the MIDI Inserts section. 3. Click Select Effect Type to open the MIDI effect pop-up menu. 4. Select a MIDI effect from the pop-up menu. RESULT The effect is automatically activated and its control panel is opened, allowing you to make settings for the effect.
MIDI Realtime Parameters and MIDI Effects MIDI Effects effect. Note that the effect can send its processed MIDI data to any MIDI output, not necessarily to the one used by the track. ● To open the MIDI Sends section, select a MIDI track, and in the Inspector, click MIDI Sends. You can add up to four MIDI send effects. Bypass Allows you to bypass all send effects for the track. Activate Send Allows you to activate/deactivate the selected effect.
MIDI Realtime Parameters and MIDI Effects Transpose and Velocity on the Info Line Presets Some of the MIDI effects come with a number of presets for instant use. 1 MIDI In/MIDI Out Activity Indicates if the plug-in receives or transmits MIDI data. 2 Save Preset/Remove Preset Allows you to save your settings as a preset or to remove saved presets. Saved presets are available in the Select Preset pop-up menu for all instances of that MIDI plug-in, and in all projects.
Using MIDI Devices The MIDI Device Manager allows you to work with MIDI devices, that is, representations of external MIDI hardware. You can install preset MIDI devices or define new ones. This is useful for global control and patch selection. You can create MIDI device panels, and create device maps where every parameter of an external device or a VST instrument can be controlled and automated from inside Cubase.
Using MIDI Devices Patch Banks The MIDI Device Manager allows you to specify which MIDI devices you are using, and to select to which device each MIDI track is routed. This allows you to select patches by name in the track list or Inspector. RELATED LINKS MIDI Device Manager on page 776 Patch Banks The Patch Banks list can have two or more main banks, depending on the selected device. This is due to the fact that different types of patches are handled differently in the instruments.
Using MIDI Devices MIDI Device Manager For more information about patch name scripts, see the separate document MIDI Devices. Remove Device Removes the selected device. Export Setup Exports the MIDI device setup as XML file. Import Setup Allows you to import an XML file of a MIDI device setup. Device setups can include device mapping, panels and/or patch information. Open Device Opens the selected device. Output Allows you to select a MIDI output for the selected device.
Using MIDI Devices MIDI Device Manager You can move presets between banks and folders via drag and drop. Add Multiple Presets Allows you to set up a range of presets and add them to the selected bank or folder. NOTE You can remove banks, folders, and presets by selecting them and pressing Backspace. IMPORTANT For details on which MIDI events are used for selecting patches in the MIDI device, consult its documentation.
Using MIDI Devices MIDI Device Manager Valid Range The valid range of the event. Default Name For multiple presets you can specify a default name. The added events will get this name, followed by a number. Installing Preset MIDI Devices You can install preset MIDI devices, that is, patch name scripts that do not include device mapping. PROCEDURE 1. Select Studio > More Options > MIDI Device Manager. 2. Click Install Device. 3.
Using MIDI Devices MIDI Device Manager This routes the MIDI track to the MIDI output specified for the device in the MIDI Device Manager. The Bank Selector and the Program Selector fields are replaced by a single Program Selector field that reads Off. 3. Open the Program Selector. A program list, similar to the one in the MIDI Device Manager, is shown. 4. Select an entry in the list. RESULT The corresponding MIDI message is sent to the device.
Using MIDI Devices Device Panels For a description of Identical Channels and Individual Channels, see the separate document MIDI Devices. 7. Click OK. 8. Select the device in the Installed Devices list. 9. In the pop-up menu at the top of the window, select Patch Banks. 10. Activate Enable Edit and use the Commands pop-up menu to organize the patch structure of the new device.
Using MIDI Devices Device Panels Showing Device Panels in the Inspector PROCEDURE 1. In the Project window, select a MIDI track and from the Output Routing pop-up menu, select the device. 2. Optional: Set the MIDI channel to Any. This is required for some devices. 3. In the Inspector, open the Device Panel section and click the arrow to the right. A Panels folder is shown with the selected device in a node structure below it.
Using MIDI Devices Device Panels The panel is shown in the Channel Racks section of the MixConsole. Automating Device Parameters You can automate device panels just like regular audio and MIDI tracks. PROCEDURE 1. In the Inspector, click Open Device Panels to open the device panel. 2. On the device panel, activate Write Automation. 3. Move the knobs and sliders on the device panel. RESULT In the Project window, a MIDI Device Automation track is added to the track list.
MIDI Functions MIDI functions allow you to permanently edit MIDI events or MIDI parts in the Project window or from within a MIDI editor. Which events are affected when you use a MIDI function depends on the function, the active window, and the current selection: ● In the Project window, the MIDI functions apply to all selected parts, affecting all events of the relevant types in them. ● In the MIDI editors, MIDI functions apply to all selected events.
MIDI Functions Merging MIDI Events into a New Part Scale Correction Transposes the selected notes to the closest note of a specific scale type. This allows you to change the key and the tonality. ● Select a root note and a scale type for the current scale in the Current Scale pop-up menus. ● Select a root note and a scale type for the new scale in the New Scale pop-up menus. NOTE If the new root note differs from the current root note, this leads to an entirely different key.
MIDI Functions Merging MIDI Events into a New Part RESULT A new part is created between the locators on the destination track, containing the processed MIDI events. RELATED LINKS MIDI Merge Options Dialog on page 786 Freezing MIDI Modifiers on page 770 MIDI Merge Options Dialog ● To open the MIDI Merge Options dialog, select a MIDI part, and select MIDI > Merge MIDI in Loop. The following options are available: Include Inserts Applies MIDI insert effects and MIDI modifiers.
MIDI Functions Dissolve Part Dialog Dissolve Part Dialog You can separate MIDI events in a part according to channels or pitches and dissolve the part to different tracks or lanes. ● To open the Dissolve Part dialog, select the MIDI part you want to dissolve and select MIDI > Dissolve Part. The following settings are available: Separate Channels Separates MIDI events according to their channel. This is useful for MIDI parts on MIDI channel Any that contain events on different MIDI channels.
MIDI Functions Bouncing MIDI Parts ● When you have imported a MIDI file of Type 0. MIDI files of Type 0 contain only one track, with notes on up to 16 different MIDI channels. If you were to set this track to a specific MIDI channel, all notes in the MIDI file would be played back with the same sound. Setting the track to Any causes the imported file to play back as intended.
MIDI Functions Repeating MIDI Events of Independent Track Loops RESULT The selected MIDI parts are combined to one part. Any muted parts are removed. Transpose and velocity values that are set for the parts are taken into account. Repeating MIDI Events of Independent Track Loops You can repeat the MIDI events inside an independent track loop to fill up a MIDI part. This is useful if you want to convert the events of an independent track loop to actual MIDI events.
MIDI Functions Fixing MIDI Note Velocities PROCEDURE 1. In the Key Editor toolbar, open the Length Quantize pop-up menu and select the desired note length. 2. Select the note events that you want to fix. 3. Select MIDI > Functions > Fixed Lengths. RESULT The selected note events are set to the specified Length Quantize value. RELATED LINKS Key Editor Toolbar on page 820 Fixing MIDI Note Velocities You can set the velocity of selected MIDI notes to the Note Insert Velocity value.
MIDI Functions Deleting Overlaps Deleting Overlaps You can delete overlaps of notes that have the same or different pitches. This is useful if your MIDI instruments cannot handle overlapping events. PROCEDURE 1. Select the note events. 2. Do one of the following: ● Select MIDI > Functions > Delete Overlaps (mono). ● Select MIDI > Functions > Delete Overlaps (poly). RESULT The overlapping MIDI notes are shortened, so that no note begins before another ends.
MIDI Functions Deleting Double Notes After compression, you can add a velocity amount to maintain the average velocity level. ● To expand the dynamic range, use ratio values above 100 %. Before expansion, you can adjust the velocity to the middle of the range. Limit Limits the velocity values so that they stay between the Lower and the Upper values. Deleting Double Notes You can delete double notes of the same pitch on the exact same position from selected MIDI parts.
MIDI Functions Thinning Out Controller Data 2. Select MIDI > Functions > Restrict Polyphony. 3. Specify how many voices you want to use. 4. Click OK. RESULT The notes are shortened as required, so that they end before the next note starts. Thinning Out Controller Data You can thin out controller data in selected MIDI parts. Use this to ease the load on your external MIDI devices if you have recorded very dense controller curves. PROCEDURE 1.
MIDI Functions Reversing the Playback Order of MIDI Events Reversing the Playback Order of MIDI Events You can invert the order of the selected events or of all events in selected part rhythmically. This causes the MIDI to play backwards. However, this is different from reversing an audio recording. The individual MIDI notes still play as usual, but the playback order changes. PROCEDURE 1. Select the MIDI events or the MIDI part. 2. Select MIDI > Functions > Reverse.
MIDI Editors There are several ways to edit MIDI in Cubase. You can use the tools and functions in the Project window for large-scale editing or the functions on the MIDI menu to process MIDI parts in various ways. To manually edit your MIDI data on a graphical interface, you can use the MIDI editors. ● The Key Editor presents notes graphically in a piano roll-style grid. The Key Editor also allows for detailed editing of non-note events such as MIDI controllers.
MIDI Editors Common MIDI Editor Functions Zooming in MIDI Editors The MIDI editors provide several zooming options: ● The zoom sliders. ● The Zoom tool. ● The Zoom submenu in the Edit menu. When you use the Zoom tool for zooming, you can determine if you want to zoom horizontal only or horizontal and vertical at a time. ● To activate/deactivate the corresponding option, activate/deactivate Zoom Tool Standard Mode: Horizontal Zooming Only in the Preferences dialog (Editing—Tools page).
MIDI Editors Common MIDI Editor Functions Velocity The note events get different colors depending on their velocity values. Pitch The note events get different colors depending on their pitch. Channel The note events get different colors depending on their MIDI channel value. Part The note events get the same color as their corresponding part in the Project window. Use this option if you are working with 2 or more tracks in an editor, to see which note events belong to which track.
MIDI Editors Common MIDI Editor Functions Select Submenu for Note Events The Select submenu offers you several options to select note events. ● To open the Select submenu for a note event, select the note event, and select Edit > Select. All Selects all note events in the edited part. None Deselects all note events. Invert Inverts the selection. All selected note events are deselected and all notes that were not selected are selected instead.
MIDI Editors Common MIDI Editor Functions ● To unmute a note event, click it or enclose it with the Mute tool. You can also select a note event and select Edit > Unmute. Muted notes are dimmed in the note display. Toggle Selections ● To toggle selected elements within a selection rectangle, press Ctrl/Cmd and enclose the same elements within a new selection rectangle. Once you release the mouse button, the previous selection is deselected and vice versa.
MIDI Editors Common MIDI Editor Functions ● To trim the beginning of a single note event, press Alt and click the note event. ● To trim several note events, click and drag across the note events. ● To set the same start and end time for all edited note events, press Ctrl/Cmd and vertically drag along the note events. Editing Note Events on the Info Line You can move, resize, or change the velocity of note events on the info line using regular value editing.
MIDI Editors Common MIDI Editor Functions Setting Velocity Values When you draw note events in the MIDI editor, the note events get the velocity value that is set in the Note Insert Velocity field on the toolbar. There are different methods to set the velocity. ● Use the Edit Velocity tool modifier. The cursor changes into a speaker, and next to the note, a field with the Note Velocity slider shows the value. Move the mouse pointer up or down to change the value.
MIDI Editors Controller Display NOTE If you activate Independent Track Loop, the Link Project and Lower Zone Editor Cursors function is automatically deactivated in the Editor tab in the lower zone of the Project window. If the button is not visible, right-click the toolbar and select Independent Track Loop from the menu. If you have set up a loop range in the Project window, it is hidden from the ruler in the MIDI editor. 2. Ctrl/Cmd-click in the ruler to specify the start of the independent track loop.
MIDI Editors Controller Display The following options are available: 1 Note display Contains a grid in which MIDI notes are displayed as boxes. 2 Controller display Shows one or multiple controller lanes. 3 Divider Drag the divider between the note display and the controller display to resize the display areas. 4 Controller Selection and Functions pop-up menu Allows you to select which controller type is displayed, and contains editing functions for controller lanes and events.
MIDI Editors Controller Display ● 7 Continuous Controllers Controller Lane Setup Contains setup functions for controller lanes, and allows you to add and organize presets. Controller Lane Setup Menu The Controller Lane Setup menu allows you to add lanes and select which event type is displayed. ● To open the Controller Lane Setup dialog, click Controller Lane Setup left of the controller display.
MIDI Editors Controller Display The following options are available: Event types Lists the event types that you can display on the controller lanes. If automation data already exists for a controller, this is indicated by an asterisk that is displayed next to the controller name. Setup Opens the MIDI Controller Setup dialog that allows you to specify which MIDI controllers are visible/hidden in the menu. Create Controller Lane Adds a controller lane to the controller display.
MIDI Editors Controller Display RELATED LINKS MIDI Controller Setup Dialog on page 807 Adding Controller Lanes You can add controller lanes to the controller display. Controller lanes allow you to select a specific controller type for display, so that you can add and edit controller events of that type. PROCEDURE ● Do one of the following: ● Click Create Controller Lane ● Open the Controller Selection and Functions menu and select Create Controller Lane. . RESULT A new controller lane is created.
MIDI Editors Controller Display RELATED LINKS Controller Selection and Functions Menu on page 804 Setting up Available Continuous Controllers In the MIDI Controller Setup dialog, you can specify which continuous controllers are available for selection. PROCEDURE 1. Select Controller Selection and Functions > Setup. 2. In the MIDI Controller Setup dialog, move all the controllers that you need to the list on the left and move the controllers that you do not need to the list on the right. 3. Click OK.
MIDI Editors Controller Display Visible Lists the MIDI controllers that are visible. Hidden Lists the MIDI controllers that are hidden. >>> Select an item in the Visible list, and click >>> to hide it. <<< Select an item in the Hidden list, and click <<< to make it visible. Saving Controller Lane Presets You can save a controller lane setup as a controller lane preset.
MIDI Editors Controller Display PROCEDURE 1. Open the Controller Selection and Functions pop-up menu and select Velocity. 2. Select the Draw tool or the Line tool. 3. Click in the note display to add a note event. This adds a note event and a velocity controller event that you can edit. RESULT The velocity values are shown as vertical bars in the controller display. Each velocity bar corresponds to a note event in the note display. Higher bars correspond to higher velocity values.
MIDI Editors Controller Display The velocity value at the cursor position is displayed below the Controller Selection and Functions pop-up menu. NOTE If there is more than one note at the same position, their velocity bars overlap. To edit the velocity of only one of these notes, select the note in the note display. If no note is selected, all velocity events get the same velocity value. RESULT The velocity values change according to your edits.
MIDI Editors Controller Display NOTE You can step through the available dynamics symbols with the mouse wheel or the One down and One up key commands. RESULT The selected dynamics symbol is inserted. RELATED LINKS Dynamics Mapping Setup Dialog on page 811 Moving Events in the Controller Display on page 818 Dynamics Mapping Setup Dialog The Dynamics Mapping Setup dialog allows you to map dynamics symbols to MIDI controllers.
MIDI Editors Controller Display Symbol Lists the different dynamic symbols. Velocity Allows you to set the velocity change for the selected dynamic symbol. Volume Allows you to set the volume change for the selected dynamic symbol. Controller Allows you to set the controller change for the selected dynamic symbol. To select the MIDI controller that is sent, activate Send Controller, and select a controller from the pop-up menu.
MIDI Editors Controller Display 2. Do one of the following: ● Click a key on the keyboard display to set the note number. ● If you have selected poly pressure for several controller lanes, enter the note number in the lower value field to the left of each lane. The selected note number is displayed in the upper value field to the left of the controller display. 3. On the toolbar, select the Draw tool, and add a new poly pressure event.
MIDI Editors Controller Display 2. Select the Draw tool or the Line tool. 3. Do one of the following: ● To add a single event, click in the controller display. ● To add a multiple events, click and drag in the controller display. ● To add a Modulation (CC1) event, copy note events from the Key Editor note display and paste them on a controller lane in the controller display. RESULT The added events are shown as blocks. The block corresponds to the event values.
MIDI Editors Controller Display 1 The controller curve before the part starts. This curve depends on the existing controller data and on the selected merge mode. 2 Controller curve entered on the controller lane. 3 Resulting controller curve if controller automation was also recorded on a track. These values depend on the selected automation merge mode. On the controller lane, you can also see the controller curve that is applied before the part starts.
MIDI Editors Controller Display NOTE If Snap is activated, the Length Quantize value determines the density of created controller curves. For very smooth curves, use a small Length Quantize value or deactivate Snap. Beware that very dense controller curves can cause MIDI playback to stutter. Sine, Triangle, and Square These modes create different periodic waveform curves. The quantize value determines the period of the curve that is the length of one curve cycle.
MIDI Editors Controller Display The controller event editor features the following smart controls for specific editing modes: 1 Tilt Left If you click in the upper left corner of the editor, you can tilt the left part of the curve. This allows you to tilt the event values at the start of the curve upwards or downwards. 2 Compress Left If you Alt-click in the upper left corner of the editor, you can compress or expand the left part of the curve.
MIDI Editors Key Editor If you activate Auto Select Controllers, controllers that belong to a note event are automatically selected when you select the note event. RELATED LINKS Key Editor Toolbar on page 820 Moving Events in the Controller Display You can move events of a controller curve in the controller display. This only works for curve type controller events such as continuous controllers, pitchbend, aftertouch, poly pressure, and program change. PROCEDURE 1. 2.
MIDI Editors Key Editor The Key Editor is shown in the Editor tab in the lower zone of the Project window: The Key Editor is divided into several sections: 1 Toolbar Contains tools and settings. 2 Status line Informs about the mouse time position, the mouse note position, and the current chord. 3 Info line 819 Cubase Pro 10.5.
MIDI Editors Key Editor Displays note event information about a selected MIDI note. 4 Ruler Displays the timeline. 5 Inspector Contains tools and functions for working with MIDI data. 6 Note display Contains a grid in which MIDI notes are displayed as boxes. 7 Controller display The area below the note display consists of one or multiple controller lanes.
MIDI Editors Key Editor Allows you to use the left divider. Tools that are placed to the left of the divider are always shown. Auto-Scroll Link Project and Lower Zone Editor Cursors Links timelines, cursors, and zoom factors of the Editor tab in the lower zone and the Project window. NOTE You cannot activate Link Project and Lower Zone Editor Cursors if Independent Track Loop is active. Auto-Scroll Keeps the project cursor visible during playback.
MIDI Editors Key Editor Glues together events of the same pitch. Mute Mutes events. Zoom Zooms in. Hold Alt and click to zoom out. Time Warp Adjusts musical positions of events to time positions. Line Creates a series of contiguous events. Auto Select Controllers Auto Select Controllers Automatically selects controller data of the selected MIDI notes. Independent Track Loop Independent Track Loop Activates/Deactivates the independent track loop.
MIDI Editors Key Editor Decreases the length of the selected event by moving its start to the right. Move Left Moves the selected event to the left. Move Right Moves the selected event to the right. Trim End Left Decreases the length of the selected event by moving its end to the left. Trim End Right Increases the length of the selected event by moving its end to the right. Transpose Palette Move Up Transposes the selected event up by a half note.
MIDI Editors Key Editor ● Grid + Cursor snaps events to the quantize grid that is selected in the Quantize Presets pop-up menu or to the cursor position. ● Events + Cursor snaps events to the start or end of other events, or to the cursor position. ● Grid + Events + Cursor snaps events to the quantize grid that is selected in the Quantize Presets pop-up menu, to the start or end of other events or to the cursor position.
MIDI Editors Key Editor Step/MIDI Input Step Input Activates/Deactivates MIDI step input. MIDI Input/Note Expression MIDI Input Activates/Deactivates MIDI input and note expression MIDI input. Move Insert Mode Moves all note events to the right of the step input position to the right to make room for the inserted event when you insert notes. NOTE This only works if Step Input is activated. Record Pitch Includes the pitch when you insert notes.
MIDI Editors Key Editor This button is available in the Editor tab in the lower zone. It opens the editor in a separate window. Open in Lower Zone This button is available in the editor window. It opens the Editor tab in the lower zone of the Project window. Set up Window Layout Allows you to set up the window layout. Set up Toolbar Opens a pop-up menu where you can set up which toolbar elements are visible.
MIDI Editors Key Editor The on/off status of the info line in the Key Editor window and in the Editor tab in the lower zone of the Project window are independent of each other. RELATED LINKS Editing Note Events on the Info Line on page 800 Changing the Ruler Display Format on page 795 Key Editor Inspector In a MIDI editor, the Inspector is located left of the note display. The Inspector contains tools and functions for working with MIDI data. Expression Map Allows you to load an expression map.
MIDI Editors Key Editor Operations NOTE If you open the Key Editor in the lower zone, these sections are shown in the Editor Inspector in the left zone. RELATED LINKS Expression Maps on page 873 Note Expression Inspector Section on page 891 Quantize Panel on page 300 Transpose Functions on page 330 Opening the Editor Inspector on page 62 Note Display The note display is the main area in the Key Editor. It contains a grid in which note events are shown as boxes.
MIDI Editors Key Editor Operations Drawing Note Events with the Draw Tool The Draw tool allows you to insert single note events in the note display. When you move the cursor inside the note display, its position is indicated on the status line. Its pitch is indicated both on the status line and on the piano keyboard to the left. ● To draw a note, click in the note display. The note event has the length that is set on the Length Quantize pop-up menu.
MIDI Editors Key Editor Operations RELATED LINKS Line Tool Modes on page 830 Line Tool Modes The Line tool allows you to create a series of contiguous note events along different line shapes. You can also edit multiple controller events simultaneously. ● To open the Line tool modes, click Line. The following line modes are available: Line If this option is activated, you can click and drag to insert note events in the note display along a straight line in any angle.
MIDI Editors Key Editor Operations NOTE ● When you move selected note events to a different position, any selected controllers for these note events move accordingly. ● You can also adjust the position of note events by quantizing. RELATED LINKS Transpose Setup Dialog on page 784 Resizing Note Events Do one of the following: ● To resize the note event, position the Object Selection tool at the start or the end of a note event and drag the mouse cursor to the left or right.
MIDI Editors Key Editor Operations allowing you to set the same start or end time for all edited notes. You can change the Trim tool key commands in the Preferences dialog (Editing—Tool Modifiers page). Splitting Note Events ● To split the note at the position that you point, select Split, and click on a note. If several notes are selected, they are all split at the same position. The snap setting is taken into account.
MIDI Editors Key Editor Operations Chord Editing Section The Chord Editing section in the Inspector allows you to insert and edit chords, and change voicings. Chord Type Shows the chord type of the selected chords. Add to Chord Track Adds the chord indicated in the Chord Type field to the chord track. The chord event is inserted at the position on the chord track that corresponds to the position of the MIDI notes. Any existing chord events at this position are overwritten.
MIDI Editors Key Editor Operations Drop Notes - Move the third highest note an octave lower Moves the third highest note of a chord down by one octave. Drop Notes - Move the second and fourth highest notes an octave lower Moves the second and fourth highest notes of a chord down by one octave. Create Chord Symbols Performs a chord analysis of the selected notes. If nothing is selected, the whole MIDI part is analyzed.
MIDI Editors Key Editor Operations ● In the note event if the zoom factor is high enough. ● When dragging a note event. Expression Map Handling When an expression map is assigned to a MIDI track, the musical articulations that are defined for that map are displayed in the following locations of the Key Editor: ● On the info line in the Articulations field. ● On the controller lane. ● In the note event if the vertical zoom factor is high enough.
MIDI Editors Drum Editor For example, you can include the note-on velocity and/or note-off velocity of the played notes. You can also deactivate the pitch property, in which case all notes get a pitch C3, no matter what you play. 3. Click anywhere in the note display to set the start position of the first note event or chord. The step input position is shown as a vertical line in the note display. 4. Specify the note event spacing and length with the Quantize and Length Quantize popup menus.
MIDI Editors Drum Editor ● Select a MIDI part in the Project window and select MIDI > Open Drum Editor. ● In the Key Commands dialog in the Editors category, assign a key command for Open Drum Editor. Select a MIDI part in the Project window and use the key command. NOTE If you select MIDI > Set up Editor Preferences, the Preferences dialog opens on the Editors page. Make your changes to specify if you want the Drum Editor to open in a separate window or in the lower zone of the Project window.
MIDI Editors Drum Editor The Drum Editor is divided into several sections: 1 Toolbar Contains tools and settings. 2 Status line Informs about the mouse time position and the mouse note position. 3 Info line Displays information about the selected event. 4 Inspector Contains tools and functions for working with MIDI data. 5 Drum sound list Lists all drum sounds. 6 Drum map Lets you select the drum map for the edited track or a list of drum sound names. 7 Ruler Displays the time line.
MIDI Editors Drum Editor Drum Editor Toolbar The toolbar contains tools and various settings for the Drum Editor. ● To show or hide the toolbar elements, right-click the toolbar and activate or deactivate the elements. Retrospective Record Insert MIDI Retrospective Recording in Editor Allows you to recover MIDI notes that you played in stop mode or during playback. Left Divider Left Divider Allows you to use the left divider. Tools that are placed to the left of the divider are always shown.
MIDI Editors Drum Editor Tool Buttons Object Selection Selects events and parts. Drumstick Draws drum events. Erase Deletes events. Mute Mutes events. Zoom Zooms in. Hold Alt and click to zoom out. Time Warp Adjusts musical positions of events to time positions. Line Creates a series of contiguous events. Auto Select Controllers Auto Select Controllers Automatically selects controller data of the selected MIDI notes.
MIDI Editors Drum Editor Decreases the length of the selected event by moving its start to the right. Move Left Moves the selected event to the left. Move Right Moves the selected event to the right. Trim End Left Decreases the length of the selected event by moving its end to the left. Trim End Right Increases the length of the selected event by moving its end to the right. Transpose Palette Move Up Transposes the selected event up by a half note.
MIDI Editors Drum Editor Snap Snap On/Off Activates/Deactivates the Snap function. Snap Type Allows you to select one of the following snap types: ● Grid snaps events to the grid that is selected in the Quantize Presets pop-up menu. ● Grid Relative keeps the relative positions when snapping events to the grid. ● Events snaps events to the start or end of other events. ● Shuffle changes the order of events if you drag one event to the left or right of other events.
MIDI Editors Drum Editor Multiple Part Controls Show Part Borders Shows/Hides part borders for the active MIDI part within the left and right locators. Edit Active Part Only Restricts editing operations to the active part. Currently Edited Part Lists all parts that were selected when you opened the editor, and allows you to activate a part. Event Colors Event Colors Allows you to select event colors. Step/MIDI Input Step Input Activates/Deactivates MIDI step input.
MIDI Editors Drum Editor Edit VST Instrument Edit VST Instrument Opens the VST instrument that the track is routed to. Right Divider Right Divider Allows you to use the right divider. Tools that are placed to the right of the divider are always shown. Window Zone Controls Open in Separate Window This button is available in the Editor tab in the lower zone. It opens the editor in a separate window. Open in Lower Zone This button is available in the editor window.
MIDI Editors Drum Editor Mouse Time Position Displays the exact time position of the mouse pointer, depending on the selected ruler display format. This lets you edit or insert notes at exact positions. Mouse Note Position Displays the exact pitch of the mouse pointer position. This facilitates finding the right pitch when entering or transposing notes. Track Loop Start/Track Loop End If Independent Track Loop is activated on the toolbar and you set up a loop, the start/end position is displayed.
MIDI Editors Drum Editor At the maximum value the notes reach the beginning of the next note. ● To make the new length settings permanent, click Freeze MIDI Lengths to the right of the Scale Length/Scale Legato slider. ● To fine-tune the distance between consecutive notes, use the Overlap slider. At 0 Ticks, the Scale Length/Scale Legato slider extends each note so that it reaches the next note exactly.
MIDI Editors Drum Editor Drum Sound List The drum sound list lists all drum sounds by name and allows you to adjust and manipulate the drum sound setup in various ways. NOTE The number of columns in the list depends on whether a drum map is selected for the track or not. Pitch Note number of the drum sound. Instrument Name of the drum sound. Snap This is used when entering and editing notes. Mute Allows you to mute drum sounds. I-Note Input note for the drum sound.
MIDI Editors Drum Editor Operations Drum Visibility Agents Menu The Drum Visibility Agents on the drum editor toolbar allow you to determine which drum sounds are shown in the drum sound list. ● To open the visibility agents, click Drum Visibility Agents on the toolbar. Show All Drum Sounds Shows all drum sounds as defined in the selected drum map. NOTE In this mode, you can edit the order of the drum sound list manually.
MIDI Editors Drum Editor Operations NOTE To temporarily switch from the Object Selection tool to the Drumstick tool, hold down Alt. RESULT A note event is inserted. Inserting Multiple Note Events You can insert multiple note events of the same pitch with the Object Selection tool or the Drumstick tool. PREREQUISITE You have set up the Insert Length on the toolbar to determine the length of the inserted note.
MIDI Editors Drum Editor Operations Changing the Note Length You can change the note length in the drum editor with the Object Selection tool or with the Drumstick tool. PREREQUISITE You have activated Show Note Length On/Off on the drum editor toolbar. PROCEDURE 1. Move the mouse pointer to the beginning or the end of the note that you want to edit. The mouse pointer turns into a double arrow. 2. Drag to the left or to the right to adjust the length.
MIDI Editors Drum Maps Muting Notes and Drum Sounds IMPORTANT The mute state for drum sounds is part of the drum map. All other tracks using this map are affected. ● To mute individual notes, click or enclose them with the Mute tool, or select Edit > Mute. ● To mute a drum sound in a drum map, click in the Mute column for the drum sound. ● To mute all other drum sounds, click Solo Instrument (Requires Drum Map) on the toolbar.
MIDI Editors Drum Maps ● To open the Drum Map Setup dialog, select Drum Map Setup from the Map pop-up menu or the MIDI menu. The list on the left shows the loaded drum maps. The sounds and settings of the selected drum map are displayed on the right. NOTE The settings for the drum sounds are the same as in the Drum Editor. Use Head Pairs If this option is activated, 2 head symbols for each drum sound are displayed in the drum sound list.
MIDI Editors Drum Maps Remove Removes the selected drum map from the project. Load Allows you to load drum maps into your project. Save Allows you to save the drum map that is selected in the list on disk. Drum map files have the extension .drm. Edit head pairs Allows you to customize the note pairs. RELATED LINKS Drum Map Settings on page 853 Channel and Output Settings on page 854 Drum Map Settings A drum map consists of settings for 128 drum sounds, one for each MIDI note number.
MIDI Editors Drum Maps RESULT The sounds and settings of the instrument are displayed in the Drum Map Setup. NOTE Instrument and pattern pads are both exported to the drum map. If they share keys, the pattern pads get priority, that is, their settings are included in the drum map. Channel and Output Settings You can set separate MIDI channels and/or MIDI outputs for each sound in a drum map.
MIDI Editors Drum Maps I-Notes (Input Notes) When you play a note on your MIDI instrument, the program looks for this note number among the I-notes in the drum map. If you play the note A1, the program finds that this is the I-note of the bass drum sound. This is where the first transformation happens: the note gets a new note number according to the pitch setting for the drum sound. In our case, the note is transformed to a C1 note, because that is the pitch of the bass drum sound.
MIDI Editors List Editor List Editor The List Editor shows all events in the selected MIDI parts as a list, allowing you to view and edit their properties numerically. It also allows you to edit SysEx messages. ● To open a MIDI part in the List Editor, select a MIDI part in the Project window and select MIDI > Open List Editor.
MIDI Editors List Editor Default Items Solo Editor Solos the editor during playback if the editor has the focus. Record in Editor Enables the recording of MIDI data in the editor if the editor has the focus. NOTE This only works if MIDI Record Mode is set to Merge or Replace. Retrospective Record Insert MIDI Retrospective Recording in Editor Allows you to recover MIDI notes that you played in stop mode or during playback. Auto-Scroll Auto-Scroll Keeps the project cursor visible during playback.
MIDI Editors List Editor Mute Mutes events. Zoom Zooms in. Hold Alt and click to zoom out. Independent Track Loop Independent Track Loop Activates/Deactivates the independent track loop. Insert Type Insert Event Type Allows you to determine an event type for newly created events. Insert Velocity Note Insert Velocity Allows you to specify a velocity value for new notes. Nudge Palette Trim Start Left Increases the length of the selected event by moving its start to the left.
MIDI Editors List Editor Snap Snap On/Off Activates/Deactivates the Snap function. Snap Type Allows you to select one of the following snap types: ● Grid snaps events to the grid that is selected in the Quantize Presets pop-up menu. ● Grid Relative keeps the relative positions when snapping events to the grid. ● Events snaps events to the start or end of other events. ● Shuffle changes the order of events if you drag one event to the left or right of other events.
MIDI Editors List Editor Edit Active Part Only Restricts editing operations to the active part. Currently Edited Part Lists all parts that were selected when you opened the editor, and allows you to activate a part. Step/MIDI Input Step Input Activates/Deactivates MIDI step input. MIDI Input/Note Expression MIDI Input Activates/Deactivates MIDI input and note expression MIDI input.
MIDI Editors List Editor Edit VST Instrument Edit VST Instrument Opens the VST instrument that the track is routed to. Window Zone Controls Show/Hide Left Zone Shows/Hides the left zone. Show/Hide Right Zone Shows/Hides the right zone. Set up Window Layout Allows you to set up the window layout. Set up Toolbar Opens a pop-up menu where you can set up which toolbar elements are visible. RELATED LINKS Setup Options on page 1107 Status Line The status line is displayed below the toolbar.
MIDI Editors List Editor Filters Bar The filters bar allows you to hide events from view, based on their type and other properties. ● To show the filters bar, click Set up Window Layout on the toolbar, and activate Filters. Show Section The Show section allows you to set up filters. No Focus No filter is applied. Event Types Only events of the same event type as the selected type will be shown. This is the same as activating event types in the Hide section.
MIDI Editors List Editor ● To move the cursor position and start/stop playback, double-click in the column for an event. Type Event type. Cannot be changed. Start Starting position of the event, displayed in the format selected for the ruler. Changing it has the same effect as moving the event. NOTE If you move the event past any other event in the list, the list is resorted. The list always shows the events in the order in which they are played back.
MIDI Editors List Editor The vertical position of an event in the display corresponds to its entry in the list, that is, to the playback order. The horizontal position corresponds to the actual event position in the project. In the event display, you can add new parts or events, and drag events to another position. Value Display The value display to the right of the event display is a tool for quick viewing and editing of multiple values, for example, velocities or controller amounts.
MIDI Editors List Editor Operations NOTE For note events, there is also a value in the Data 3 column, which is used for note-off velocity. NOTE For SMF and text events, no values are displayed. List Editor Operations This section describes the principal editing operations within the List Editor. Drawing Events The Draw tool allows you to insert single events in the event display. When you move the cursor inside the event display, its position is indicated on the status line.
MIDI Editors List Editor Operations Filtering the Event List You can filter the event list with the Filters bar that is displayed below the toolbar in the List Editor. ● To filter the event list based on complex criteria, open the Show pop-up menu and select a filter. ● To hide an event type, activate the corresponding checkbox on the Filters bar. ● To hide all event types except one, press Ctrl/Cmd and click the checkbox of the event type that you want to view.
MIDI Editors List Editor Operations Editing in the Value Display ● To edit values in the value display, click and drag. The mouse pointer automatically takes on the shape of the Draw tool when you move it over the value display. SysEx Messages SysEx (System Exclusive) messages are model-specific messages for setting various parameters of a MIDI device. This makes it possible to address device parameters that would not be available via normal MIDI syntax.
MIDI Editors List Editor Operations Transmitting a Bulk Dump Back to a Device PREREQUISITE Route the MIDI track with the System Exclusive data to the device. Check your device’s documentation to find details about which MIDI channel should be used, etc. PROCEDURE 1. Solo the track. 2. Make sure that the device is set up to receive SysEx messages. 3. If necessary, put the device in Standby to Receive System Exclusive mode. 4. Play back the data.
MIDI Editors List Editor Operations MIDI SysEx Editor ● To open the MIDI SysEx Editor for a SysEx event, click in the Comments column for the event in the List Editor or the Project Browser. In the MIDI SysEx Editor, the bytes are displayed as follows: Address Shows at what position in the message a value is located. 0-7 Shows the entire message in hexadecimal format. SysEx messages always begin with F0 and end with F7 and a number of arbitrary bytes in between.
MIDI Editors In-Place Editor NOTE Do not confuse this format with MIDI files, which have the extension .mid. In-Place Editor The In-Place Editor allows you to edit MIDI notes and controllers directly in the Project window, for quick and efficient editing in context with other tracks. The In-Place Editor expands the MIDI track to show a miniature Key Editor. When you select a MIDI note, the Project window info line shows the same information about the note as the info line in the Key Editor.
MIDI Editors In-Place Editor Acoustic Feedback Acoustic Feedback Automatically plays back events when you move or transpose them, or when you create them by drawing. Multiple Part Controls Edit Active Part Only Restricts editing operations to the active part. List of Parts in Editor Lists all parts that were selected when you opened the editor, and allows you to activate a part. Indicate Transpositions Indicate Transpositions Allows you to display the transposed pitches of MIDI notes.
MIDI Editors In-Place Editor ● To close the In-Place Editor for one track, click Edit In-Place in the track list or doubleclick below the controller display in the In-Place Editor. ● To open/close the In-Place Editor for one or several selected tracks, use the Edit In-Place key command. ● You can drag notes from one In-Place Editor to another.
Expression Maps Expression maps allow you to set up a map for all your articulations. This allows you to audition a project including articulations. You can select expression maps in the Inspector for MIDI or instrument tracks, and specify the sound mapping and characteristics for all your articulations. If you select an expression map for a MIDI or instrument track, the articulations defined in the map are automatically applied during playback.
Expression Maps Articulations Articulations Musical articulations define how specific notes are sung or performed on a given instrument. They can also define the relative volume of notes or the changes in pitch. The following articulation types are available: ● Directions Directions, such as pizzicato, are valid for all notes from their insert position, to the insert position of the next direction. They are applied to a continuous range of notes, or even an entire piece of music.
Expression Maps Creating and Editing Expression Maps Sound Slots Shows the sound slots that correspond to the expression map that is selected in the Expression Maps section. Output Mapping Shows the output mapping that corresponds to the sound slot that is selected in the Sound Slots section. Articulations Allows you to organize articulations in groups. Remote Settings Allows you to set up remote keys for triggering articulations via a MIDI input device.
Expression Maps Creating and Editing Expression Maps The Expression Map Setup opens. 4. In the Expression Maps section, click Add Map to create a new map. 5. Optional: Click the name to enter a custom name for the expression map. Adding Sound Slots You must create sound slots for each articulation that you want to add. PREREQUISITE The Expression Map Setup window is open and an expression map is selected in the Expression Maps section. PROCEDURE 1. 2.
Expression Maps Creating and Editing Expression Maps 5. Click the Remote column for the sound slot and specify the key on your external device that triggers this sound slot. 6. Optional: Click the Col column to assign a color to the sound slot. When working in the MIDI editors, you can color your events according to the color of the sound slots. RESULT The sound slots are added and the articulations are available. You can create as many sound slots as you need.
Expression Maps Creating and Editing Expression Maps which matches most criteria. If two sounds are found which have the same articulation in group 1, the sound that also matches group 2 is preferred and so on. Output Mapping Section The Output Mapping section allows you to map sound slots to specific sound characters of an instrument. The available sounds depend on the instrument that is selected for the MIDI or instrument track.
Expression Maps Creating and Editing Expression Maps Min. Velocity/Max. Velocity Allows you to specify a minimum and a maximum velocity for the selected sound slot, to make sure that the sample mapped to a particular range is used. This way, you can use instruments that have different velocity ranges on the same key. Remote Settings Section The remote settings allow you to specify key switches or program change messages to trigger specific sound slots.
Expression Maps Creating and Editing Expression Maps Set Remote Keys Dialog The Set Remote Keys dialog allows you to assign a range of keys on your external device to the sound slots in the expression map. ● To open the Set Remote Keys dialog, click the Set Remote Keys button in the Expression Map Setup dialog. The following options are available: Start Key Allows you to specify the first key on the MIDI input device that you want to trigger a sound slot.
Expression Maps Creating and Editing Expression Maps 6. Make your changes, enter a name for the map, and click Save. RESULT The expression map is saved and you can load it from the Select Expression Map for the track pop-up menu in the Expression Map section of the Inspector. RELATED LINKS Creating Expression Maps on page 875 Track Presets on page 192 Saving Expression Maps If you have created and set up your expression map, you must save it. PROCEDURE 1.
Expression Maps Inserting Articulations 4. In the file dialog, locate and select the expression map that you want to load, and click Open. The expression map is now available in the Expression Maps section. 5. Repeat the steps for all the maps that you want to make available, and close the dialog. RESULT All loaded maps are available on the Expression Map pop-up menu in the Inspector.
Expression Maps Inserting Articulations Inserting Articulations in the Score Editor You can insert articulation symbols in the Score Editor. PROCEDURE 1. Select the MIDI part. 2. Select Scores > Open Score Editor. 3. On the Symbols tab of the Inspector, open the Expression Map section. 4. Activate the articulation symbol, and click at the desired position in the note display. IMPORTANT When you insert articulation symbols, make sure that they do not conflict with other articulations.
Expression Maps Inserting Articulations Inserting Articulations in the List Editor You can insert articulation symbols via the comment column of the List Editor. This only works if your MIDI part already contains some articulation symbols. PROCEDURE 1. Select a MIDI note in the event display of the List Editor. 2. Click the Comment column to open a pop-up menu with all note attributes that are available in the expression map, and select the desired attribute.
Note Expression Note expression allows you to edit MIDI notes and their expressions as one unit. Note expression allows you to associate expression events with MIDI notes, so that they are treated as a unit. When you quantize, move, copy, duplicate, or delete MIDI notes, all their associated controller information follows. This allows for an intuitive and accurate editing of note-related data.
Note Expression VST Note Expressions VST Note Expressions VST note expressions are note-specific. They are suitable for polyphonic contexts, as they allow you to edit the expression of each individual note in a chord. VST note expressions are provided by VST instruments. To be able to work with VST note expressions, you need a VST instrument that supports them, such as HALion Sonic SE. Which VST note expressions are available depends on the instrument.
Note Expression MIDI Controllers notes. In this scenario, MIDI channel 1 controls all notes whereas the other 15 MIDI channels can control individual notes. NOTE To use MIDI controllers to control individual notes, you must set the MIDI channel of the track to Any.
Note Expression MIDI Controllers Cubase allows you to capture three dimensions of input movements polyphonically. The Note Expression Input Device page provides the sections Pressure, Horizontal/X, and Vertical/Y that allow you to view, and if needed, edit which MIDI messages are used for these three dimensions of control. The following options are available: MIDI Input Allows you to select the MIDI input port to which your input device is connected.
Note Expression MIDI Controllers Transmits the absolute position. This corresponds to the following initial values: Absolute: On (Sensel Morph), Relative: Off (LinnStrument). ● Center (64) Transmits the center value first. Input movements cause the value to increase or decrease. This corresponds to the following initial values: Absolute: Off (Sensel Morph), Relative: On (LinnStrument).
Note Expression MIDI Controllers Multi-Channel Input Mode Allows you to choose a multichannel input mode. The following options are available: ● MPE Mode Activates MPE mode, and sets channel 1 as base channel. ● Channel Rotation Activates channel rotation, and assigns individual MIDI channels to incoming MIDI notes and their controller messages. This allows a 16-voice polyphony. For this to work, your input controller must support channel rotation.
Note Expression Note Expression Inspector Section As Recommended by Instrument Automatically assigns all note expressions to input movements according to the recommendations of the instrument, if available. Volume Assigns the note expression Volume to an input movement. Pan Assigns the note expression Pan to an input movement. Tuning Assigns the note expression Tuning to an input movement. MIDI PolyPressure Assigns the note expression MIDI PolyPressure to an input movement.
Note Expression Note Expression Inspector Section The following sections are available: 1 Section header/Bypass button Shows the section name. The bypass button allows you to bypass all note expression data for the track. 2 Expression section Lists the available VST note expressions, MIDI controllers, pitchbend, aftertouch and polypressure. 3 Expression settings section Allows you to make settings for the expression that is selected in the expression section.
Note Expression Note Expression Inspector Section 1 In Shows the abbreviation of the MIDI control change message or the input movement that is mapped to the expression for recording. 2 Expression filter Allows you to filter the list of expressions. 3 Visibility Shows/Hides the expression in the note expression event editor and in the event display. 4 VST note expressions Lists the available VST note expressions. 5 MIDI controllers Lists the available MIDI controllers.
Note Expression Note Expression Tools Expression Settings Section In this section, you can make settings for the expression that is selected in the expression section, for example, set up the input assignment. The expression settings are available in the Note Expression section of the Inspector. ● To open the Note Expression section, select a MIDI or an instrument track, and click Note Expression in the Inspector. 1 Color selector Allows you to specify a color for the selected expression.
Note Expression Controller Mapping Note Expression MIDI Input This button is available in the Step/MIDI Input section of the Key Editor toolbar. It allows you to record note expression data via MIDI input. Acoustic Feedback This button is available in the Acoustic Feedback section of the Key Editor toolbar. It gives you an acoustic feedback of the controller events that are present at the mouse position while you enter or change note expression data.
Note Expression Recording In the In column in the Inspector, the number of the assigned MIDI controller message, or PB for pitchbend, or AT for aftertouch is shown if the mapping is active. RELATED LINKS Global Settings Section on page 894 Mapping Controllers via MIDI Learn The MIDI Learn function allows you to assign the knobs and faders of your MIDI device to controllers. PROCEDURE 1. In the expression section, select the expression to which you want to assign a MIDI controller. 2.
Note Expression Recording Recording and the Sustain Pedal If you hold the sustain pedal (MIDI CC 64) of the connected MIDI device during recording, the following applies: ● When a note-off event is received (when the key on the connected keyboard is released), this message is not sent to the VST 3 instrument but is instead created by the program when the sustain pedal is released. This makes it possible for the VST 3 instrument to play back control change messages that are sent after a key was released.
Note Expression Recording PROCEDURE 1. In the global track controls area of the track list, click Add Track . 2. Click Instrument. 3. Open the Instrument pop-up menu and select HALion Sonic SE, for example. 4. Click Add Track. The instrument track is added to the track list, and the control panel of the selected VST instrument is opened. 5. In the top section of the Inspector for the instrument track, open the Input Routing popup menu, and select your MPE input device from the list.
Note Expression Note Expression Event Editor Starting Overdub Recording at Specific Controller Values When you record note expression data by overdubbing, you can activate a Latch Buffer. This is useful if you want to start recording at predefined initial knob or fader settings. When Cubase receives controller data from an external MIDI device, the setting of the faders and knobs on the device is automatically written to the Latch Buffer. This data is then added to the notes during playback. PROCEDURE 1.
Note Expression Note Expression Event Editor NOTE If you select several notes in the Key Editor, and you double-click any of them, the note expression event editor opens for all these notes. In this case, any editing affects all the notes that are present at the time position where you perform the editing. ● To close the editor, click in the event display.
Note Expression Note Expression Event Editor Shows the selected parameter. Click this to open a pop-up menu with all the parameters that are used for the note. To make more parameters available, select them in the Inspector. Smart Controls The note expression event editor features the following smart controls for specific editing modes: 1 Tilt Left If you click in the upper left corner of the editor, you can tilt the left part of the curve.
Note Expression Note Expression Event Editor ● To navigate to the next/previous note, use the Left Arrow/Right Arrow keys. ● To step through the notes, press Tab and Shift-Tab. Adding Note Expression Events PROCEDURE 1. Double-click a note in the event display to open the note expression event editor. 2. Do one of the following to select the parameter that you want to make settings for: 3.
Note Expression Note Expression Event Editor 3. Select Edit > Copy. 4. Select the note to which you want to paste the note expression events. 5. Press the key command that you assigned to the Paste Note Expression command. RESULT All copied note expression events are pasted to the selected note.
Note Expression Note Expression Event Editor RESULT The selected events are copied. Moving Note Expression Events PROCEDURE 1. Double-click the note that contains the note expression events to open the note expression event editor. 2. Open the Expression pop-up menu, and select the corresponding note expression from the list. 3. Do one of the following: ● Click the note expression event curve and drag to move all events.
Note Expression Trimming Note Expression Data Trimming Note Expression Data You can trim note expression data to automatically match the note length. PROCEDURE 1. Select the notes that contain note expression data. 2. Select MIDI > Note Expression > Trim Note Expression to Note Length. RESULT The note expression data is trimmed to the note length, and any data present after the end of the release phase is deleted.
Note Expression Note Expression MIDI Setup Dialog The following options are available: Controller Activates MIDI control change messages. Specify the MIDI control change messages that you want to use in the list below. NOTE MIDI controller data for deactivated MIDI control change messages will end up on the controller lane. Pitchbend Activates pitchbend data. Aftertouch Activates aftertouch data. Poly Pressure Activates poly pressure data.
Note Expression Note Expression MIDI Setup Dialog Recording MIDI Control Change Messages as Note Expression Data You can record MIDI control change messages as note expression data. PROCEDURE 1. In the Inspector, open the Note Expression section and activate MIDI as Note Expression. 2. Optional: Set the MIDI track to Any channel. MIDI control change messages, with the exception of poly pressure, are channel-specific.
Note Expression Note Expression MIDI Setup Dialog Adding Release Phases to Notes on page 904 Consolidating Note Expression Overlaps If you move or quantize notes so that they overlap, and if these overlapping notes contain data for the same control change message, you might need to consolidate the note expression overlaps. PROCEDURE ● Select MIDI > Note Expression > Consolidate Note Expression Overlaps.
Note Expression Note Expression MIDI Setup Dialog NOTE If you convert note expression data of VST note expressions to MIDI, the sound will change. Therefore, you must reassign the MIDI controller data to a new instrument destination. 909 Cubase Pro 10.5.
Chord Functions The chord functions provide you with many possibilities for working with chords. The chord functions allow you to: ● Build chord progressions by adding chord events to the chord track. ● Convert chord events to MIDI. ● Use the chord track to control audio playback or MIDI playback. ● Use the chord track voicing to change the pitches of your MIDI. ● Extract chord events from MIDI data to get an overview of the harmonic structure of a MIDI file.
Chord Functions Chord Events RELATED LINKS Chord Track on page 152 Chord Events Chord events are representations of chords that control or transpose playback on MIDI, instrument, and audio tracks. Chord events alter the pitches of MIDI notes and VariAudio segments if their tracks are set up to follow the chord track. Chord events have a specific start position. Their end, however, is determined by the start of the next chord event. They can have a root note, a type, a tension, and a bass note.
Chord Functions Chord Events NOTE This works only if the last chord event on the chord track is selected. Chord definition buttons Activate these buttons to define a root note, a chord type, a tension, and a bass note for your chord event. NOTE If you do not select a separate bass note, the setting is linked to the root note, so that no extra bass note is heard. Keyboard display Shows the notes of the chord event, considering the current voicing settings.
Chord Functions Chord Events ● Define the chord type, for example maj, min, dim, sus, or aug. ● Define a chord extension, for example, 7, 9, or 13. NOTE If you have activated Solfège in the Note Name pop-up menu in the Preferences dialog (Event Display—Chords&Pitches page), you can also enter chords in this format. You must capitalize the first letter and write “Re” instead of “re”, for example. Otherwise, the chord is not recognized. 4. Press Tab to add a new undefined chord and define it.
Chord Functions Chord Events Go to Previous Chord/Go to Next Chord Allow you to select the previous/next chord on the chord track for editing. Add Chord Adds a new undefined chord event on the chord track. NOTE This works only if the last chord event on the chord track is selected. Suggestions list Shows suggestions for the next chord. Click a chord suggestion to select it. Complexity filter Allows you to increase the complexity and thus the number of suggestions.
Chord Functions Chord Events Chord Assistant tabs Click the tabs to open one of the chord assistant modes. Chord Assistant – Proximity The Proximity mode of the Chord Assistant takes a set of harmonic rules into account to offer suggestions that match the origin chord. If you open the Chord Assistant for a chord event, the previous event is set as origin chord. This is shown in the bottom center of the Chord Assistant.
Chord Functions Chord Events ● 5. To display the suggestions in a graphic, click the Proximity tab. Click a suggestion to select it. RESULT The suggested chord is added as a chord event to the chord track. Repeat the steps above to create as many chord events as required by your harmonic structure. Chord Assistant – Circle of Fifths The Circle of Fifths mode of the Chord Assistant shows the chords in an interactive visualization of the circle of fifths.
Chord Functions Chord Events ● To play a chord and assign it to the selected chord event, click it. The last 3 chords that you clicked are shown in bold. ● To define a new key, right-click the chord in the Chord Assistant and select Use as Origin, or use the Rotate Left/Rotate Right controls. ● To select the parallel minor chord and define it as key, click Major/Minor.
Chord Functions Scale Events RELATED LINKS Chord Track on page 152 Add Track Dialog – Instrument on page 125 Changing How Chord Events Are Displayed You can change how chord events are displayed. This is useful if chord events overlap each other at low zoom levels or if you do not like the font type. PROCEDURE 1. On the chord track, activate Resolve Display Conflicts. 2. In the Preferences dialog, select Event Display > Chords&Pitches, and set up the chord font.
Chord Functions Voicings ● Double-click the scale event, and in the keyboard that appears, select a Root Key and Type of the scale. The keys that correspond to the scale are highlighted. Voicings Voicings determine how chord events are set up. They define the vertical spacing and order of the pitches in a chord, but also the instrumentation and genre of a musical piece. For example, a C chord can be spread over a wide range of pitches, and a pianist will choose different notes than a guitarist.
Chord Functions Voicings Adaptive Voicings Activate this to let Cubase set the voicings automatically. This prevents the individual voices from jumping too much. Automatic Scales Activate this to let Cubase set the scales automatically. Mapping Offset If you enter a negative number of ticks, the chord events will affect the MIDI notes that have been triggered too early.
Chord Functions Voicings Triads with maj9 and min9 Sets a triad with a major and a minor ninth, but without root note. Chords with more than 3 notes are not changed. 4-Note Chords Sets a 4-note chord without root note. Chords with fewer than 3 notes are not changed. 4-Note Chords (Open Jazz) Sets a 4-note chord without root note and without fifth. Chords with fewer than 3 notes are not changed. 5-Note Chords Sets a 5-note chord with a ninth. Chords with fewer than 4 notes are not changed.
Chord Functions Converting Chord Events to MIDI Converting Chord Events to MIDI You can convert chord events to MIDI for further editing or for printing a lead sheet in the Score Editor. PROCEDURE 1. In the global track controls area of the track list, click Add Track 2. Do one of the following: ● Click Instrument to add an instrument track. ● Click MIDI to add a MIDI track. 3. Click Add Track. 4. Do one of the following: .
Chord Functions Controlling MIDI or Audio Playback Using the Chord Track The first chord event is mapped to the pad where you dropped it and all subsequent chord events are mapped to the following pads. 2. Click the corresponding pads on the HALion Sonic SE keyboard to trigger the chords. Controlling MIDI or Audio Playback Using the Chord Track You can use the chord track to control audio playback or MIDI playback.
Chord Functions Controlling MIDI or Audio Playback Using the Chord Track Follow Chord Track Select an option to determine how the events on your track are mapped to the chord track. Voicings Allows you to select a voicing library or to use the voicings from the chord track. This is only available if you selected Voicings or Single Voice in the Follow Chord Track pop-up menu. Live Transform Allows you to transpose the MIDI input live to a chord progression on the chord track.
Chord Functions Controlling MIDI or Audio Playback Using the Chord Track NOTE If this is the first time that you open this pop-up menu for the track, the Follow Chord Track dialog opens. 4. In the Follow Chord Track dialog, make your changes. 5. Click OK. RESULT The events on your track now match the chord progression on the chord track. NOTE If you matched your MIDI track to the chord track, some of the original MIDI notes may be muted.
Chord Functions Controlling MIDI or Audio Playback Using the Chord Track Single Voice Maps MIDI notes and VariAudio segments to the notes of a single voice (soprano, tenor, bass, etc.) of the voicing. Use the pop-up menu below to select the voice. NOTE If you apply this mode to a selection of tracks that contain separate voices, you can set up one track as master and the others as voicing slaves. This way, you can change the voicing of the master and the slaves will follow automatically.
Chord Functions Assigning Voices to Notes RESULT The chords and scales of each event or part are analyzed and used for mapping. If no chords are found, Cubase assumes that the performance is in “C”. The available mapping modes and voicings correspond to the Follow Chord Track parameters in the Chords section of the Inspector. RELATED LINKS Follow Chord Track Modes on page 925 Assigning Voices to Notes You can transpose MIDI notes to match the voices of a selected voicing library.
Chord Functions Recording Chord Events with a MIDI Keyboard RESULT The chord events are added on the chord track. NOTE You can now open the Chord Assistant to create variations. RELATED LINKS Create Chord Symbols Dialog on page 928 Create Chord Symbols Dialog This dialog allows you to determine, which MIDI data should be taken into account when extracting chord events from MIDI. Include Bass Notes Activate this if you want your chord events to contain a bass note.
Chord Functions Recording Chord Events with a MIDI Keyboard RESULT All recognized chords are recorded as chord events on the chord track. NOTE The chord track uses its own voicing settings. The recorded chord events may therefore sound different. RELATED LINKS Adding Chord Events on page 912 929 Cubase Pro 10.5.
Chord Pads Chord pads allow you to play with chords, and to change their voicings and tensions. In terms of harmonies and rhythms, they allow for a more playful and spontaneous approach to composition than the chord track functions. You can: ● Perform with chords in real time via a MIDI keyboard. ● Record your performance as MIDI events on a MIDI or instrument track or even on the chord track. NOTE We assume that you have a MIDI keyboard connected and set up.
Chord Pads Chord Pads Zone 1 Chord Pad Output Mode Activate this to send chord data to all tracks that are monitored or record-enabled. Deactivate this to send chord data exclusively to tracks that are monitored or recordenabled and where Input Routing is set to Chord Pads. NOTE If Record-Enable allows MIDI Thru is deactivated in the Preferences dialog (Record— MIDI page), you must activate Monitor to use the chord pads.
Chord Pads Chord Pads Zone NOTE The section remote range is only shown if Player Modes is set to Sections. 9 Set up Chord Pads Opens the Chord Pads Setup dialog. 10 Functions Menu Opens a menu with specific functions and settings for the chord pads. 11 Chord Pads Presets Allows you to save and load presets for chord pads and players. 12 Show/Hide Chord Assistant Shows/Hides the Chord Assistant window that shows suggestions of chords that match the chord that you specified as the origin chord.
Chord Pads Functions Menu All chord pads follow the adaptive voicing. This is indicated by AV. If you change the voicing for a pad manually, however, adaptive voicing is deactivated. An L indicates that the chord pad is locked for editing. 6 Voicing Allows you to set another voicing for the chord pad. 7 Tensions Allows you to add/remove tensions for the chord. Chord Pad Context Menu ● To open the chord pad context menu, right-click a chord pad.
Chord Pads Chord Assistant Assign Pads from Chord Track Assigns the chord events from the chord track to the chord pads in the same order as they appear on the chord track. Chord events that have more than one occurrence are only assigned once. Snap Playback to Musical Grid Allows you to delay the playback of a triggered chord pad to the next defined musical position. This is useful if you work with an arpeggiator or if you set the Player Modes to Pattern.
Chord Pads Chord Assistant You must define an origin chord as follows: ● Right-click the chord pad with the chord you want to use as origin and select Use X as Origin for Chord Assistant. The Chord Assistant window shows suggestions for follow-on chords that you can assign to the chord pads. Chord Assistant – List The List mode of the Chord Assistant allows you to create harmonic chord progressions based on harmonic rules that can be more or less complex.
Chord Pads Chord Assistant Algorithm Mode Select Cadence to build up a chord progression based on cadences. Select Common Notes to build up a progression by specifying how many common notes the chords should share. Cadence Type NOTE This option is only available if you selected Cadence as Algorithm Mode. Allows you to select a cadence type for the suggestions. This way, only the chords with specific harmonic functions are suggested.
Chord Pads Chord Assignment Chord Assistant – Circle of Fifths Mode The Circle of Fifths mode of the Chord Assistant window shows the chords in an interactive visualization of the circle of fifths. The origin chord that defines the current key is shown in the center of the Chord Assistant window. The tonic (I) of that key is displayed above the center. The outer circle shows the twelve major chords ordered in intervals of fifths. The inner circle displays the corresponding parallel minor chords.
Chord Pads Chord Assignment Unassigning Chord Pads You can clear all chord assignments from the chord pads to start from scratch. PROCEDURE ● To the left of the chord pads, open the Functions Menu and select Unassign All Pads. Assigning Chords with the Chord Editor If you know exactly which chord you want to assign to a specific chord pad, you can use the Chord Editor. PROCEDURE 1. Move the mouse pointer to the left edge of the chord pad, and click Open Editor. 2.
Chord Pads Chord Assignment RELATED LINKS Chord Assistant – List on page 913 Assigning Chords with the Chord Assistant – Circle of Fifths Mode If you have a chord that you want to use as a starting point for a chord progression, but you do not know how to create such a progression, you can use the Chord Assistant – Circle of Fifths window. PROCEDURE 1. Right-click the chord pad that you want to use as a starting point and activate Use X as Origin for Chord Assistant.
Chord Pads Swapping Chord Assignments The borders of the chord pad change their color to indicate that it is now ready for recording. 2. On your MIDI keyboard or on the On-Screen Keyboard, press the keys for the chord that you want to assign. The chord and its voicing are assigned to the chord pad, and you hear an acoustic feedback of the chord. NOTE The assigned voicing can be changed by the Adaptive Voicing setting.
Chord Pads Copying Chord Assignments Copying Chord Assignments You can copy the chord assignment of one pad and paste it on another pad. PROCEDURE ● Alt-click a chord pad and drag it to another chord pad. While you drag, the border of the destination chord pad changes its color. RESULT When you drop the pad on another, the first pad’s assignment is copied to the destination chord pad together with its settings, except for the Adaptive Voicing Reference.
Chord Pads Playing Back and Recording Chords 4. Click Add Track. The instrument track is added to the track list, and the control panel of the selected VST instrument is opened. 5. On the instrument track, click Record Enable or Monitor. NOTE If Record-Enable allows MIDI Thru is deactivated in the Preferences dialog (Record— MIDI page), you must activate Monitor to use the chord pads. 6. Select Project > Chord Pads > Show/Hide Chord Pads to open the Chord Pads. 7. Activate Chord Pad Output Mode. 8.
Chord Pads Playing Back and Recording Chords RESULT The instrument track now receives MIDI data exclusively from the chord pad device. You can use a connected MIDI keyboard to trigger the chord pads. This still works if you hide the Chord Pads from view. NOTE On the Chord Pads page of the Studio Setup dialog, you can select your connected MIDI keyboard from the MIDI Input pop-up menu. This is useful if you want to use a specific MIDI keyboard exclusively for triggering the chord pads.
Chord Pads Player Setup 2. Select Project > Add Track > Chord. The chord track is added to the track list. 3. In the Inspector for the chord track, click Record Enable. 4. On the Transport panel, activate Record. 5. On your MIDI keyboard, press the keys that trigger the chord pads. RESULT The chord events are recorded on the chord track. NOTE The recorded chord events may sound different from the chord pad playback.
Chord Pads Player Setup Player Modes ● Plain Chords triggers all notes of a chord simultaneously. ● Pattern plays an arpeggio that is based on the notes of the pattern. ● Sections controls the playback of single notes or groups of notes of a chord. RELATED LINKS Players and Voicings on page 945 Voicings on page 919 Player Setup on page 944 Players and Voicings Different types of instruments and styles have different voicing libraries.
Chord Pads Player Setup Overlaps Allows you to select what happens with the notes of the first chord when you play a chord without releasing the previous chord. ● Hold First holds the notes of the first chord. No note-off message is sent. If the chords have common notes, these are not triggered again. ● Legato releases the notes of the first chord, except for the common notes. These are held and not triggered again. ● Stop First releases the notes of the first chord including the common notes.
Chord Pads Player Setup Using the Pattern Player You can play back the pattern of a MIDI loop or a MIDI part with chord pads. This plays back the pattern with the notes that make up the chord. PROCEDURE 1. To the left of the chord pads, activate Show/Hide Player Setup. 2. In the Selected Player Settings section, open the Player Modes pop-up menu, and select Pattern. 3. Perform one of the following actions: ● Click Import MIDI Loop to select a MIDI loop that you want to use as a pattern.
Chord Pads Player Setup NOTE When setting up the player for a track, make sure that Record Enable or Monitor is only active for this particular track. 10. Select the second instrument track, select a sound for the VST instrument, and set up another player. For example, select a guitar sound and activate Guitar Player. 11. Select the next instrument track, and proceed as for the other 2 tracks. For example, select a string sound, click Player Options, and select Add Basic Player. 12.
Chord Pads Player Setup RELATED LINKS Chord Pads Setup Dialog on page 951 Custom Section Player Settings Dialog on page 949 Custom Section Player Settings Dialog The custom settings for the section player allow you to determine how the sections are triggered, how they are distributed, or if they are played at all. Only sections with remote keys assigned are available. ● In the Player Setup, open the Player Modes pop-up menu and select Sections, then open the Section Player Settings menu and select Custom.
Chord Pads Player Setup ● Latch Chord Pads Activate this for sections and combination modes. This way, if you release the remote key for the chord pad, you will still hear the sections if you keep the section remote keys pressed. Chord Note Distribution Allows you to determine how chord notes are distributed among the sections if the chord that is assigned to the chord pad has more notes than sections. Mute Sections Excludes a section from being played.
Chord Pads Chord Pads Setup Dialog Chord Pads Setup Dialog The Chord Pads Setup dialog allows you to change the remote key assignments and the layout of the chord pads. ● To open the Chord Pads Setup dialog, click Set up Chord Pads. Pad Remote Control Allows you to specify a range of remote keys that trigger the chords that are assigned to the chord pads. Here, you can also set up chord modifiers that allow you to specify how the chords are played back.
Chord Pads Chord Pads Setup Dialog Pad Remote Control Tab The Pad Remote Control tab in the Chord Pads Setup dialog allows you to specify a range of remote keys that trigger the chords that are assigned to the chord pads. ● To open the Pad Remote Control tab, click Set up Chord Pads, and in the Chord Pads Setup dialog, click Pad Remote Control.
Chord Pads Chord Pads Setup Dialog Activate Activates/Deactivates the remote key assignment for the parameters voicings, tensions, and transpose. If this option is deactivated, only the remote key assignment for the pads remote range is active. NOTE If you use the remote keys for voicings, tensions, or transposition after releasing the remote key for the chord pad, the chord pad that you last played is affected.
Chord Pads Chord Pads Setup Dialog MIDI Learn Activates/Deactivates the MIDI Learn function to assign MIDI input to the parameters for changing tensions. In the Transpose Modifiers section, the following options are available: Transpose Up Plays back the last played chord and transposes it upwards. Transpose Down Plays back the last played chord and transposes it downwards.
Chord Pads Chord Pads Setup Dialog Sections Allows you to assign remote keys for up to 5 sections. You can use the section remote keys together with a pad remote key to trigger the chord notes that correspond to the sections. By default, Section 1 is set to G2, Section 2 is set to A2, Section 3 is set to B2, and Section 4 is set to C3. MIDI Learn Activates/Deactivates the MIDI Learn function to assign MIDI input to the sections.
Chord Pads Chord Pads Presets Pad Layout Tab The Pad Layout tab in the Chord Pads Setup dialog allows you to change the layout that is used for the chord pads. NOTE By default, the keyboard layout is active, but you can change to a grid layout if you prefer. After changing the pad layout, you may need to adjust the remote setup. ● To open the Pad Layout tab, click Set up Chord Pads, and in the Chord Pads Setup dialog, click Pad Layout.
Chord Pads Creating Chord Events from Chord Pads ● To load only the player settings of Chord Pads Presets, click Chord Pads Presets and select Load Players from Preset. Saving Chord Pads Presets If you have set up the chord pads, you can save them as Chord Pads Presets. PROCEDURE 1. To the left of the chord pads, click Chord Pads Presets and select Save Chord Pads Preset. 2. In the New Preset section, enter a name for the new preset. NOTE You can also define attributes for the preset. 3.
Logical Editor The Logical Editor is a powerful tool for search and replace functions on MIDI data. You can use the Logical Editor as follows: ● You set up filter conditions to find certain elements. This can be elements of a certain type, with certain attributes or values, or on certain positions, in any combination. You can combine any number of filter conditions and make composite conditions using And/Or operators. ● You select the basic function to be performed.
Logical Editor Filter Conditions 1 Filter Conditions Allows you to specify the conditions such as type, attribute, value, or position that a specific element must meet to be found. You can combine any number of filter conditions using AND/OR operators. 2 Action list Allows you to set up a list of actions that specifies exactly what is done. This is not necessary for all functions. 3 Function pop-up menu Allows you to select a function. 4 Apply Applies your settings.
Logical Editor Filter Conditions Parameter 2 Only available if one of the Range options is set in the Condition column. Allows you to find all elements with values inside or outside the range between Parameter 1 and Parameter 2. Bar Range/Time Base Only available if the Filter Target is set to Position. If one of the Bar Range options is selected in the Condition column, you use the Bar Range/Time Base column to specify zones within each bar.
Logical Editor Filter Conditions Less or Equal Has a value that is the same as or lower than the one set up in the Parameter 1 column. Inside Range Has a value that is between the values set up in the Parameter 1 and Parameter 2 columns. Note that Parameter 1 should be the lower value and Parameter 2 the higher. Outside Range Has a value that is not between the values set up in the Parameter 1 and Parameter 2 columns.
Logical Editor Filter Conditions Searching for Elements at Specific Positions You can search for elements starting at specific positions, either relative to the start of the project or within each bar. PROCEDURE 1. Open the Filter Target pop-up menu and select Position. This allows you to find elements starting at specific positions, either relative to the start of the project or within each bar. 2.
Logical Editor Filter Conditions RELATED LINKS Combining Multiple Condition Lines on page 982 Value 1 and Value 2 MIDI events can be composed of value 1 and value 2. Value 1 and value 2 have different meanings for different event types: Event type Value 1 Value 2 Notes The Note Number/Pitch. The velocity of the note. Poly Pressure The key that was pressed. The amount of pressure for the key. Controller The type of Controller, displayed as a number. The amount of Control Change.
Logical Editor Filter Conditions NOTE To find all notes of a certain key, in all octaves, open the Condition pop-up menu and select Note is equal to. 3. Click below the list to add another condition line. Parameter 1 is automatically set to Note. Also, Value 1 and Value 2 will be displayed as Pitch and Velocity respectively. RELATED LINKS Combining Multiple Condition Lines on page 982 Searching for Controllers PROCEDURE 1. Open the Filter Target pop-up menu and select Value 1. 2. Click 3.
Logical Editor Filter Conditions Searching for Properties You can search for properties that are not part of the MIDI standard but rather Cubase-specific settings. PROCEDURE 1. Open the Filter Target pop-up menu and select Property. 2. Open the Parameter 1 pop-up menu and select the property that you want to search for. 3. Open the Condition pop-up menu and select one of the following options: ● Select Property is set if you want to search for events that have the specified property.
Logical Editor Filter Conditions In this example, the action is performed after playing the C1. Searching for Chords You can search for chords in a MIDI part or on the chord track. PREREQUISITE NOTE A note belongs to a chord if at least 2 other notes play at the same time. PROCEDURE 1. Open the Filter Target pop-up menu and select Context Variable. 2. Open the Parameter 1 pop-up menu and select the property that you want to search for. 3. Open the Condition pop-up menu and select an option.
Logical Editor Filter Conditions Voice If you set Parameter 2 to the voice in the chord, this finds the specified voice in the selected MIDI part. NOTE The Musical Context presets give you an idea of the possibilities of this filter target. Combining Multiple Condition Lines You can add condition lines and combine them by using boolean And and Or operators and brackets. ● To add a new condition, click below the list. The new line is added at the bottom of the list.
Logical Editor Selecting a Function You can find all notes that either have the pitch C3 or the MIDI channel 1 (but no non-note events). Selecting a Function The pop-up menu at the bottom of the Logical Editor is where you select the function, that is, the basic type of editing to be performed. Delete Deletes all elements found by the Logical Editor. Transform Changes one or several aspects of the found elements. You set up exactly what is changed in the action list.
Logical Editor Specifying Actions Specifying Actions You can specify actions, that is, changes that are made to the found elements, in the lower list of the Logical Editor. Actions are relevant for all function types except Delete and Select. You can add action lines by clicking , and remove them by selecting it and clicking . Action Target The Action Target allows you to select the property that is changed in the events. Position Moves the events. Length Resizes note events.
Logical Editor Specifying Actions Operation The Operation column allows you to determine what to do with the Action Target. The options on this pop-up menu are different depending on the selected Action Target. Add Adds the value specified in the Parameter 1 column to the Action Target. Subtract Subtracts the value specified in the Parameter 1 column from the Action Target. Multiply by Multiplies the Action Target with the value specified in the Parameter 1 column.
Logical Editor Applying the Defined Actions Mirror This is only available if you set Action Target to Value 1 or Value 2. When this option is selected, the values are mirrored around the value set in the Parameter 1 column. In the case of notes, this inverts the scale, with the key set in the Parameter 1 column as center point. Linear Change in Loop Range This affects events between the left and right locators only.
Logical Editor Presets Presets You can load, save and manage Logical Presets. To load a preset, do one of the following: ● Open the Logical Editor, and open the Select Preset pop-up menu, and select an option. ● Select MIDI > Logical Presets, and select an option. ● Open the List Editor, and in the filters bar, select a preset from the Show section. NOTE If you set up a key command for a preset, you can conveniently apply the same operation to several selected events in one go.
Project Logical Editor The Project Logical Editor is a powerful tool for search and replace functions in the Project window. The Project Logical Editor allows you to specify filter conditions and combine them with actions. This way you can search for all open folder tracks in your project, for example, and close them. It comes with a number of presets that show you the possibilities of this feature, and that you can use as a starting point for your own settings.
Project Logical Editor Filter Conditions Allows you to set up a list of actions that specifies exactly what is done. This is not necessary for all functions. 3 Function pop-up menu Allows you to select if the found elements are transformed, deleted, or selected. 4 Macro pop-up menu Allows you to select a macro. 5 Apply Applies your settings. IMPORTANT Not every combination of settings always makes sense. Experiment a bit before applying your edits to important projects.
Project Logical Editor Filter Conditions Bar Range/Time Base Only available if the Filter Target is set to Position. If one of the Bar Range options is selected in the Condition column, you use the Bar Range/Time Base column to specify zones within each bar. This allows you to find all elements on or around the first beat of every bar, for example. If any of the other Condition options is selected, you can use the Bar Range/Time Base column to specify a time base such as PPQ, seconds, etc.
Project Logical Editor Filter Conditions MIDI If no container type is specified, this finds MIDI parts and MIDI tracks. Automation If no container type is specified, this finds automation events and automation tracks. Marker If no container type is specified, this finds marker events and marker tracks. Transpose If no container type is specified, this finds transpose events and transpose tracks. Arranger If no container type is specified, this finds arranger events and arranger tracks.
Project Logical Editor Filter Conditions ● Select Unequal if you want to search for any other container type than the specified. ● Select All Types if you want to search for all container types. EXAMPLE You can set up the Project Logical Editor to find all folder tracks in the project. Container Type Filter When the Filter Target is set to Container Type, the Parameter 1 pop-up menu lists the available container types.
Project Logical Editor Filter Conditions You can set up the Project Logical Editor to find all MIDI and instrument parts (not tracks) or all audio events (not parts or tracks) in the project that are muted. Searching for Names PROCEDURE 1. Open the Filter Target value field and select Name. 2. Click the Parameter 1 pop-up menu and enter a name, or a part of a name that you want to search for. 3.
Project Logical Editor Filter Conditions EXAMPLE You can set up the Project Logical Editor to find all elements at the PPQ position 5.1.1. in the project. You can set up the Project Logical Editor to find elements starting around the second beat in each bar. Position Filter For positions, the following Condition options are available: Equal Has the exact same value as set up in the Parameter 1 column. Unequal Has any value other than the one set up in the Parameter 1 column.
Project Logical Editor Filter Conditions Inside Cycle Is inside the set cycle. Exactly Matching Cycle Exactly matches the set cycle. Searching for Elements of Specific Lengths PROCEDURE 1. Open the Filter Target pop-up menu and select Length. This allows you to find elements of a specific length only. NOTE The Length parameter is interpreted via the time base setting in the Bar Range/Time Base column, that is, in PPQ, seconds, samples, or frames. 2.
Project Logical Editor Filter Conditions Inside Range Has a value that is between the values set up in the Parameter 1 and Parameter 2 columns. Note that Parameter 1 should be the lower value and Parameter 2 the higher. Outside Range Has a value that is not between the values set up in the Parameter 1 and Parameter 2 columns. Searching for Color Names PROCEDURE 1. Open the Filter Target pop-up menu and select Color Name. 2.
Project Logical Editor Filter Conditions Properties Filter For properties, the following Condition options are available: Property is set This finds all events that have the property that is set in the Parameter 1 column. Property is not set This finds all events that do not have the property that is set in the Parameter 1 column. When the Filter Target is set to Property, the pop-up menu lists the available Parameter 1 properties. Event is muted This finds all muted events.
Project Logical Editor Specifying Actions ● Or determines that at least one of the conditions must be fulfilled for an element to be found. IMPORTANT When you add a new condition line, the boolean setting default is And. EXAMPLE You can set up the Project Logical Editor to find MIDI tracks. You can set up the Project Logical Editor to find all parts or events that match exactly the cycle.
Project Logical Editor Specifying Actions You can add action lines by clicking , and remove them by selecting it and clicking . Action Target The Action Target allows you to select the property that is changed. Position Adjusting the Position value moves the elements.
Project Logical Editor Specifying Actions Set to fixed value This sets the Length to the value specified in the Parameter 1 column. Set Random Values between This will add a random value to the current length. The added random value will be within the range specified with Parameter 1 and Parameter 2. Track Operation Adjusting the Track Operation value allows you to change the track status. NOTE Track operations may also affect automation tracks.
Project Logical Editor Selecting a Function Name Adjusting the Name value allows you to rename the found elements. Replace Replaces names with the text specified in the Parameter 1 column. Append The name will be appended with the string specified in the Parameter 1 column. Prepend The name will be prepended with the string specified in the Parameter 1 column. Generate Name The name will be replaced by the text specified in the Parameter 1 column, followed by the number set with Parameter 2.
Project Logical Editor Applying Macros Transform Changes one or several aspects of the found elements. You set up exactly what is changed in the action list. Select This will simply select all found elements, highlighting them for further work in the Project window. Applying Macros In the Macro pop-up menu, you can select a macro that will be executed automatically after completing the actions defined.
Project Logical Editor Presets NOTE To remove a preset, load it and click the Remove Preset button. Organizing and Sharing Presets The Project Logical Editor presets are stored within the application folder in the Presets \Logical Edit Project subfolder. Preset files cannot be edited manually, but you can reorganize them. This also makes it easy to share presets with other Cubase users, by transferring the individual preset files.
Editing Tempo and Time Signature Project Tempo Modes For every project you can set a tempo mode, depending on whether your music has a fixed tempo or if it changes throughout the project. On the Transport panel, you can set the following tempo modes: ● Fixed Tempo Mode If you want to work with one fixed tempo that does not change throughout the project, deactivate Activate Tempo Track on the Transport panel. You can change the tempo value to set a fixed rehearsal tempo.
Editing Tempo and Time Signature Tempo Track Editor RELATED LINKS Instrument Track Inspector on page 126 MIDI Track Inspector on page 133 Audio Track Inspector on page 123 Tempo Track Editor The Tempo Track Editor provides an overview of the project tempo settings. It allows you to add and edit tempo events. To open the Tempo Track Editor, do one of the following: ● Select Project > Tempo Track. ● Press Ctrl/Cmd-T.
Editing Tempo and Time Signature Tempo Track Editor Tempo Track Editor Toolbar The toolbar contains tools for selecting, adding, and changing tempo and time signature events. The following tools are available: Activate Tempo Track Activate Tempo Track Switches the project tempo between fixed tempo mode and tempo track mode. Left Divider Left Divider Tools that are placed to the left of the divider are always shown. Auto-Scroll Auto-Scroll Keeps the project cursor visible during playback.
Editing Tempo and Time Signature Tempo Track Editor Current Tempo Current Tempo In fixed tempo mode, this allows you to change the current tempo. Snap Snap On/Off Restricts horizontal movement and positioning to the positions specified by the Snap Type. Time signature events always snap to the beginning of bars. Snap Type Allows you to specify to what positions you want events to snap. Tempo Recording Open Tempo Recording Panel Opens a panel that allows you to record tempo changes.
Editing Tempo and Time Signature Tempo Track Tempo Track You can use the tempo track to create tempo changes within a project. ● To add a tempo track to your project, select Project > Add Track > Tempo. ● You can use the tools on the Project window toolbar to add and edit tempo events. ● You can use the tempo event editor to edit selected tempo events. ● To select a tempo event, click it with the Object Selection tool.
Editing Tempo and Time Signature Tempo Changes for Projects If you click in the upper right corner of the editor, you can tilt the right part of the curve. This allows you to tilt the event values at the end of the curve upwards or downwards. 7 Scale Around Relative Center If you Alt-click in the middle right border of the editor, you can scale the curve relative to its center. This allows you to raise or lower the event values horizontally around the center of the editor.
Editing Tempo and Time Signature Tempo Changes for Projects Setting up Projects for Tempo Changes When you create a new project, the project tempo is automatically set to fixed tempo mode. If your music contains tempo changes, you must set your project to tempo track mode. PROCEDURE ● To set your project to tempo track mode, do one of the following: ● On the Transport panel, activate Activate Tempo Track. ● Select Project > Tempo Track and activate Activate Tempo Track.
Editing Tempo and Time Signature Tempo Changes for Projects By moving the slider to the right, you can raise the project tempo, by moving it to the left, you can lower it. RESULT The tempo changes are recorded and added to the tempo curve in the Tempo Track Editor. RELATED LINKS Tempo Track Editor Toolbar on page 991 Setting up a Tempo Track from Tapping You can create a complete tempo track based on tapping the tempo of freely recorded audio or MIDI material.
Editing Tempo and Time Signature Tempo Changes for Projects Setting up a Tempo Track from Tempo Detection You can set up a complete tempo track using the result of a tempo detection for an audio event or a MIDI part. PROCEDURE 1. In the Project window, select the audio event or the MIDI part that you want to analyze. 2. Select Project > Tempo Detection. 3. On the Tempo Detection Panel, click Analyze. RESULT ● A tempo track is added to the project.
Editing Tempo and Time Signature Tempo Changes for Projects NOTE If your material includes multiple sections with different tempos, you can also split the material at each major tempo change and perform a tempo detection for every single resulting section. Each section must have a length of at least 7 seconds. Editing Tempo Events In the Tempo Track Editor, you can edit selected tempo events. Use the following methods: ● With the Object Selection tool, click and drag horizontally and/or vertically.
Editing Tempo and Time Signature Setting up a Fixed Project Tempo Setting up a Fixed Project Tempo If your music does not contain tempo changes, and the tempo track is deactivated, you can set up a fixed tempo for your project. When the tempo track is deactivated, the tempo track curve is grayed out. The fixed tempo is displayed as a horizontal line in the tempo curve display.
Editing Tempo and Time Signature Setting up a Fixed Project Tempo PROCEDURE 1. Activate playback. 2. Select Project > Beat Calculator. 3. Click Tap Tempo. The Tap Tempo window opens. 4. Use Space to tap the tempo of the recording that is played back. In the BPM field, the calculated tempo is updated each time you tap. 5. Click OK to close the window. The tapped tempo is shown in the BPM field of the Beat Calculator. 6.
Editing Tempo and Time Signature Beat Calculator Beat Calculator The Beat Calculator is a tool for calculating the tempo of freely recorded audio or MIDI material. It also allows you to set the tempo by tapping. ● To open the Beat Calculator for an audio or MIDI recording, select Project > Beat Calculator. Beats Allows you to enter the number of beats for the selected section of your recording. BPM Shows the tempo calculated for the selection.
Editing Tempo and Time Signature Tempo Detection Name Shows the name of the selected event or part. Analyze Starts the tempo detection. Multiply by 2 Allows you to double the detected tempo. This is useful if your material is twice as fast as the detected tempo. Divide by 2 Allows you to halve the detected tempo. This is useful if your material is half as fast as the detected tempo. Multiply by 4/3 Allows you to adjust the detected tempo with a factor of 4/3.
Editing Tempo and Time Signature Exporting a Tempo Track Exporting a Tempo Track You can export a tempo track as an XML file to use it in other projects. PROCEDURE 1. Select File > Export > Tempo Track. 2. In the file dialog that opens, specify a name and a location for the file. 3. Click Save. RESULT The tempo track information is saved together with signature events with the file extension .smt. Importing a Tempo Track You can import a tempo track from another project. PROCEDURE 1.
Editing Tempo and Time Signature Process Tempo Dialog The following options are available in the Bar Range section: Start at Bar Shows the start time of the locator range in bars and beats. Finish at Bar Shows the end time of the locator range in bars and beats. The following options are available in the Alternative Time Format section: Time Display Format Allows you to select the alternative time format. Start at Position Shows the start time of the locator range in the selected time format.
Editing Tempo and Time Signature Process Bars Dialog Process Bars Dialog The Process Bars dialog allows you to insert, delete, replace, or reinterpret the signature events by automatic adjustment of the signature and tempo events. ● To open the Process Bars dialog, select Project > Tempo Track to open the Tempo Track Editor, and click Open Process Bars Dialog. The following options are available: Start at Bar Allows you to set a start position for the process.
Editing Tempo and Time Signature Time Warp NOTE The Time Warp tool can create tempo values up to 360 BPM. If you activate Time Warp on the toolbar, the ruler shows tempo events as flags with tempo values. If you click Time Warp again, a pop-up menu opens where you can select one of the following modes: ● Warp Grid If you use the Time Warp tool in this mode, the absolute time positions for all tracks that are set to musical time base are kept.
Editing Tempo and Time Signature Set Definition from Tempo Dialog Set Definition from Tempo Dialog The Set Definition from Tempo dialog allows you to set up freely recorded audio material to follow a specific tempo. ● To open the Set Definition from Tempo dialog for an audio recording, select Audio > Advanced > Set Definition from Tempo. Save Definition in Project Only Saves the tempo information in the project file only.
Editing Tempo and Time Signature Time Signature Events Time signature events can have click patterns assigned. These allow you to create different grooves and feels for the metronome click. You can create a triplet click pattern for a 4/4 time signature, for example.
Editing Tempo and Time Signature Time Signature Events Setting up a Click Pattern for a Time Signature Event For each signature event in your project, you can set up a metronome click pattern. PROCEDURE 1. Double-click the plus sign to open the Click Pattern Editor. 2. Do one of the following: ● Open the Pattern pop-up menu and select one of the presets. ● Use the Clicks setting to define the number of clicks that you want to hear, and click in the event display to set up a new click pattern. 3.
Project Browser The Project Browser provides a list-based representation of the project. It allows you to view and edit all events on all tracks. ● To open the Project Browser, select Project > Browser. NOTE The Project Browser can be open while you are working in other windows. Any changes in the Project window or an editor are immediately reflected in the Project Browser and vice versa. 1 Project Structure Allows you to select specific track types for viewing and editing in the event display.
Project Browser Project Structure Time Format Allows you to change the time display format in the Project Browser. Track/Part/Event Shows what is added when you click Add. Add Adds the track, part, or event type that is shown in the pop-up menu to the left. Filter Allows you to filter the event display by event type. Sync Selection Links the selection in the Project Browser to the selection in the Project window. This allows you to locate events in the two windows.
Project Browser Event Display Audio events: Double-click the waveform image to open the event in the Sample Editor. Audio parts: Double-click the waveform image to open the event in the Audio Editor. MIDI parts: Double-click the part image to open the event in the Key Editor. File Audio events: The name of the audio file referenced by the audio clip of the event. Type MIDI events: The type of the MIDI event. Tempo track: The type of the tempo curve. Start The start position of the event.
Project Browser Event Display Mute Mutes or unmutes the event. Image Audio events: Displays a waveform image of the event. Editing Note Expression Data In the Project Browser, you can view and edit the MIDI controller events or VST 3 events of a MIDI note with note expression data. PROCEDURE 1. In the Project Structure, select the Note Expression subitem of the MIDI note that you want to view or edit. In the event display, all MIDI controllers or VST 3 events within the note expression data are listed.
Rendering Audio and MIDI You can render existing material to new audio material. You can render the following: ● Audio tracks ● Instrument tracks ● Audio events or parts on audio tracks ● MIDI parts on instrument tracks ● Range selections on audio or instrument tracks ● Range selections on multiple audio or instrument tracks IMPORTANT The rendering function does not support side-chain routing. Render Tracks Dialog The Render Tracks dialog allows you to customize the track render settings.
Rendering Audio and MIDI Render Tracks Dialog The following settings are available in the Mode section: As Separate Events Creates one or more tracks that contain separate events or parts that are saved as separate audio files. As Block Events Creates one or more tracks that contain adjacent events/parts that are combined to blocks. Every block is saved as a separate audio file. As One Event Creates one or more tracks that contain the events/parts and combines them to one event/part.
Rendering Audio and MIDI Render Tracks Dialog activated. The resulting audio file format is determined by the output channel of the source track. A mono track that is routed to a stereo bus results in a stereo audio file. Complete Signal Path + Master FX Renders the complete signal path and the master bus settings into the resulting audio files. This includes all channel settings, group channel settings, FX send channel settings, and panner settings.
Rendering Audio and MIDI Render Selection Dialog Rendering Tracks You can render selected tracks either via the Render Tracks dialog or by directly using the Render (with Current Settings) command. PROCEDURE 1. Deselect all events. 2. Select one or more audio, MIDI, or instrument tracks. 3. Select Edit > Render in Place > Render Settings. 4. Specify the render options. 5. Click Render. RESULT All selected source material is processed according to your render settings.
Rendering Audio and MIDI Render Selection Dialog The following settings are available in the Mode section: As Separate Events Creates one or more tracks that contain separate events or parts that are saved as separate audio files. As Block Events Creates one or more tracks that contain adjacent events/parts that are combined to blocks. Every block is saved as a separate audio file. As One Event Creates one or more tracks that contain the events/parts and combines them to one event/part.
Rendering Audio and MIDI Render Selection Dialog File Path Allows you to select a custom folder to which the resulting .wav files are rendered. Mix down to One Audio File Creates one audio file from all your source material. This option is only available if several tracks are selected and Dry (Transfer Channel Settings) is deactivated. The following settings are available in the Source Event Settings section: Source Events ● Keep Source Events Unchanged Keeps the source events unchanged.
Export Audio Mixdown The Export Audio Mixdown function allows you to mix down and export all audio that is contained between the left and right locators of a project or in ranges defined by cycle markers. ● To open the Export Audio Mixdown dialog, select File > Export > Audio Mixdown. Export Audio Mixdown Dialog The Export Audio Mixdown dialog allows you to set up how audio is mixed down and exported. ● To open the Export Audio Mixdown dialog, select File > Export > Audio Mixdown.
Export Audio Mixdown Export Audio Mixdown Dialog Channel Selection In the Channel Selection section, the following options are available: Single Allows you to export a single channel. Multiple Allows you to export multiple channels. Enter Filter Text Allows you to enter text to filter the channels by their channel name. This is useful if your project contains a large number of channels. Channels list Allows you to activate one or more channels for export.
Export Audio Mixdown Export Audio Mixdown Dialog NOTE Only the cycle markers of the active marker track can be selected. File Location In the File Location section, the following options are available: File Name Allows you to specify the name of the mixdown file. Click File Name Options to open a pop-up menu with naming options: ● Set to Project Name inserts the project name into the File Name field.
Export Audio Mixdown Export Audio Mixdown Dialog the audio quality. For CD burning, select 44.100 kHz, because this is the sample rate used on audio CDs. Bit Depth Allows you to select a bit depth for the mixdown file. NOTE This parameter is only available for uncompressed audio file formats and FLAC files. Allows you to select 8-bit, 16-bit, 24-bit, 32-bit (float), or 64-bit (float) files. If you plan to re-import the mixdown file into Cubase, select 32-bit (float).
Export Audio Mixdown Export Audio Mixdown Dialog ● If the CPU and disk speed of your computer do not allow to export all channels simultaneously in real time, the program stops the process, reduces the number of channels, and starts again. Afterwards, the next batch of files is exported. This is repeated as often as needed to export all selected channels. Update Display Updates the meters during the export process. This allows you to check for clipping, for example.
Export Audio Mixdown Export Audio Mixdown Dialog File Formats on page 1027 Naming Scheme Dialog The Naming Scheme dialog allows you to define naming schemes for the audio material that you want to export. The naming attributes that are available in this dialog depend on the channel that you selected for export. ● To open the Naming Scheme dialog, open the Export Audio Mixdown dialog, and click Set up Naming Scheme. Scheme Allows you to save and delete naming schemes.
Export Audio Mixdown Mixing Down to Audio Files ● Digits The number of number of digits prior to the counter value. Preview Displays a preview of your current settings. Defining Naming Schemes You can define a naming scheme by combining attributes that determine the structure of the file names for the exported audio files. Depending on the settings in the Channel Selection section and the Export Range section, different naming attributes are available. PROCEDURE 1.
Export Audio Mixdown Available Channels for Export 5. Click Export Audio. RESULT The audio file is exported. IMPORTANT ● If you set the export range in such a way that the effects that are applied to a preceding event, for example reverb, reach into the next, these are heard in the mixdown even though the event itself is not included. To avoid this, mute the first event.
Export Audio Mixdown File Formats AIFF File This is an audio file format standard defined by Apple Inc. AIFF files are used on most computer platforms. The files can contain embedded text strings. AIFF files have the extension .aif. MPEG 1 Layer 3 File This is a family of standards used for encoding audio-visual information such as movies, video, and music in a digital compressed format. Cubase can read MPEG Layer 2 and MPEG Layer 3.
Export Audio Mixdown File Formats Insert iXML Chunk Includes additional project-related metadata, such as project name, author, and project frame rate. Insert Tempo Definition This option is only available if Insert iXML Chunk is activated. It allows you to include tempo information from the tempo track or from the Definition section of the Sample Editor in the iXML chunk of the exported files. Set up Broadcast Wave Chunk Opens the Broadcast Wave Chunk dialog where you can enter information.
Export Audio Mixdown File Formats AIFF Files AIFF stands for Audio Interchange File Format, a standard defined by Apple Inc. AIFF files have the extension .aif and are used on most computer platforms. If you select the AIFF File format for the exported file, you can make the following settings in the Select Attributes section: Insert Broadcast Wave Chunk Activates the embedding of additional file information in Broadcast Wave format. NOTE By activating this option, you create a Broadcast Wave file.
Export Audio Mixdown File Formats High Quality Mode Sets the encoder to a different resampling mode. This may give better results depending on your settings. However, it does not allow you to select the Sample Rate. Insert ID3 Tag Includes ID3 Tag information in the exported file. Edit ID3 Tag Opens the ID3 Tag dialog that allows you to enter information about the file. This information is embedded in the file and can be displayed by most MP3 playback applications.
Export Audio Mixdown File Formats NOTE Always keep in mind the intended use of the file. For publication on the Internet, you might not want too high bit rates, for example. Channels This setting depends on the chosen output. You cannot change it manually. Mode ● Select Constant Bit Rate if you want to limit the file size. To calculate the size of a file that is encoded with a constant bit rate, multiply the bit rate by the duration of the file.
Export Audio Mixdown File Formats Windows Media Audio File Settings Dialog - Media Tab The Media tab in the Windows Media Audio File Settings dialog allows you to enter information about the file. Use the Title, Author, Copyright, and Description fields to enter a file description of its content that is embedded in the file header. This can be displayed by some Windows Media Audio playback applications.
Export Audio Mixdown File Formats Wave 64 Files Wave 64 is a proprietary format developed by Sonic Foundry Inc. Wave 64 files have the extension .w64. NOTE Wave 64 files are a good choice for long recordings where the file sizes exceeds 2 GB. The quality of Wave 64 files is identical to standard Wave files. Insert Broadcast Wave Chunk Activates the embedding of additional file information in Broadcast Wave format. NOTE By activating this option, you create a Broadcast Wave file.
Synchronization Synchronization is the process of getting 2 or more devices to play back together at the same speed, position, and phase. These devices can range from audio and video tape machines to digital audio workstations, MIDI sequencers, synchronization controllers, and digital video devices. If you know the position and speed for the master device, you can resolve the speed and position of the slave device to it, so that the 2 devices play in perfect sync with one another.
Synchronization Timecode Formats ● Timecode Slave Any device receiving the timecode and synchronizing or locking to it. ● Machine Control Master The device that issues transport commands to the system. ● Machine Control Slave The device receiving timecode commands and responding to them. Cubase can be the machine control master, sending transport commands to an external device which in turn sends timecode and audio clock information back to Cubase.
Synchronization Timecode Formats 30 fps non-drop SMPTE (N) This is the frame count of NTSC broadcast video. However, the actual frame rate or speed of the video format runs at 29.97 fps. This timecode clock does not run in real time. It is slightly slower by 0.1 %. 30 fps drop-frame SMPTE (D) The 30 fps drop-frame count is an adaptation that allows a timecode display running at 29.
Synchronization Clock Sources Frame count vs. frame rate Part of the confusion in timecode stems from the use of frames per second in both the timecode standard and the actual frame rate. When used to describe a timecode standard, frames per second defines how many frames of timecode are counted before one second on the counter increments. When describing frame rates, frames per second define how many frames are played back during the span of one second of real time.
Synchronization Project Synchronization Setup Dialog Project Synchronization Setup Dialog The Project Synchronization Setup dialog provides a central place to configure a complex synchronized system. In addition to settings for timecode sources and machine control settings, basic transport controls are available for testing the system. To open the Project Synchronization Setup dialog, do one of the following: ● Select Transport > Project Synchronization Setup.
Synchronization Project Synchronization Setup Dialog In the topmost section, the following options are available: Activate External Sync Activates/Deactivates the external synchronization. Timecode Source The Timecode Source section allows you to determine whether Cubase is acting as timecode master or slave.
Synchronization Project Synchronization Setup Dialog NOTE Discrepancies between the Project Frame Rate and the incoming timecode can cause problems during postproduction, even if Cubase is able to lock to that timecode. MIDI Timecode Settings The MIDI Timecode Settings become available if you activate MIDI Timecode as a Timecode Source. MTC Input Allows you to select the MIDI input ports. To allow Cubase to synchronize to MIDI timecode from any MIDI connection, select All MIDI Inputs.
Synchronization Project Synchronization Setup Dialog Destinations Page The Destinations page allows you to set up the synchronization outputs, and to determine which external signals leave the application. MIDI Clock Destinations In the MIDI Clock Destinations section, you can select any MIDI ports that you want to output MIDI clock. Some MIDI devices, such as drum machines, can match their tempo and location to incoming MIDI clock.
Synchronization Project Synchronization Setup Dialog MIDI Timecode Preferences In the MIDI Timecode Preferences section, the following options are available: MIDI Timecode Follows Project Time Ensures that the MTC output always follows the time position of Cubase. Machine Control Page Machine Control Input Settings These settings become available, if you select MIDI Machine Control as machine control input.
Synchronization MMC Master Panel MMC Master Active Routes transport commands to any device while sync is enabled. MMC Input Determines which MIDI port in your system receives MMC commands. Set this to a MIDI port that is connected to the desired MIDI device. MMC Output Determines which MIDI port in your system sends MMC commands. Set this to a MIDI port that is connected to the desired MIDI device. MMC Device ID Set this to the same device ID as in the Machine Control Input Settings section.
Synchronization Setting up Synchronization for a Personal Music Studio ● Transport commands are routed to the machine control destination output as specified in the Project Synchronization Setup dialog. Locate, play, stop, and record commands will now be sent to an external device. ● Cubase awaits incoming timecode from the chosen timecode source defined in the Project Synchronization Setup dialog in order to play.
Synchronization Setting up Synchronization for a Personal Music Studio RESULT The hard disk recorder starts playback and sends MTC to Cubase. Once Cubase syncs to MTC, the status on the Transport panel changes to Lock and the current frame rate of incoming MTC is shown. 1046 Cubase Pro 10.5.
VST System Link VST System Link is a digital audio network system that allows you to link several computers using digital audio hardware and cables. Linking up 2 or more computers allows you to split different tasks and different tracks between different computers. You can run CPU-intensive processes, such as send effect plug-ins or VST instruments on one computer, and record audio tracks on another one.
VST System Link Setting up VST System Link Active Activates VST System Link. Online Puts the computer online. ASIO Input Allows you to define the networking input channel. ASIO Output Allows you to define the networking output channel. Use Selected ASIO Ports for Data only Activate this if you want to devote more bandwidth to MIDI, and send VST System Link information on the entire channel. This channel is then no longer available for audio transfer.
VST System Link Setting up VST System Link List Shows the name of each computer. Setting up a Network You can set up a network by connecting computers. PROCEDURE 1. Use a digital audio cable to connect the digital output of computer 1 to the digital input of computer 2. If you have more than 2 computers, add the others one by one. 2. Use a cable to connect the digital output of computer 2 to the digital input of computer 1.
VST System Link Setting up VST System Link indication that you have connected the cards and set up clock sync properly. Check the documentation of your audio hardware for details. RELATED LINKS Selecting an Audio Driver on page 16 ASIO Driver Setup Page on page 19 Adjusting the Buffer Size In a VST System Link network, adjusting the buffer size to minimize latency is extra important.
VST System Link Activating VST System Link 2. In the Project Time Displays section, open the Sample Rate pop-up menu and select a sample rate. Setting up Digital Audio Connections PROCEDURE 1. Select Studio > Audio Connections. 2. Click the Inputs tab, and click Add Bus. 3. In the Add Input Bus dialog, configure the bus. 4. Click Add Bus. 5. Click the Outputs tab, and click Add Bus. 6. In the Add Output Bus dialog, configure the bus. 7. Click Add Bus. 8.
VST System Link Activating VST System Link 3. In the Devices list, select VST System Link. 4. Use the ASIO Input and ASIO Output pop-up menus to define which channel is the networking channel that carries the VST System Link information. NOTE The networking signal is carried on only one bit of one channel. For an ADAT-based system 7 channels of 24-bit audio and 1 channel of 23-bit audio will be used for networking. You will still have around 138 dB headroom on this channel. 5.
VST System Link Activating VST System Link PROCEDURE 1. Select Studio > Studio Setup. 2. In the Devices list, select VST System Link. 3. Activate Online. 4. Repeat this for each computer in the network. RESULT The computers are online now. AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK Start playback on one computer to check if the system is working, and if all computers start and play perfectly in time. VST System Link sends and understands all transport commands.
VST System Link Application Examples Application Examples VST System Link allows you to split different tasks between 2 or more computers. The following application examples should give you an idea of what is possible. Configuring a Main Mix Computer Configuring one computer as a main mix computer that receives the audio from your other computers allows you to mix internally in the computer.
VST System Link Application Examples NOTE If your audio cards have multiple sets of input and output connections, you can link up multiple ADAT cables and send audio via any of the busses on any of the cables. Routing MIDI Tracks to VSTis on Other Computers You can route MIDI tracks from one computer to VST instruments on another computer. This allows you to use one computer for playback and recording and the other one as a VSTi rack. PROCEDURE 1. Record a MIDI track into computer 1. 2.
VST System Link Application Examples 7. Open the Sends rack for the track in the Inspector or the MixConsole. 8. Open the Send Routing pop-up menu for one of the sends and select the VST System Link bus assigned to the effect. 9. Use the Send slider to adjust the amount of effect as usual. RESULT The signal will be sent to the track on computer 2 and processed through its insert effect, without using any processor power on computer 1.
Video Cubase allows you to work with video content. You can play back video files in various formats and via different output devices from within Cubase, extract the audio material from a video file, and edit your music to the video. The video export function allows you to share your videos with clients or other users. IMPORTANT Videos are exported with a resolution of 1920 x 1080 px (Full HD). Video files with a lower or higher resolution than Full HD are upscaled or downscaled on export.
Video Frame Rates MPEG-4 This format can contain various metadata for streaming, editing, local playback, and interchange of content. Its file extension is .mp4. AVI This is a multimedia container format introduced by Microsoft. Codecs Codecs are methods of data compression used to make video and audio files smaller and more manageable for computers. For further details, refer to the support area at steinberg.net. Frame Rates Cubase supports different video and film frame rates.
Video Video Output Devices IMPORTANT Video formats with a variable frame rate (VFR) are not supported. Video Output Devices Cubase supports several video output devices. Viewing video files onscreen in the Video Player window may work just fine for many applications, but often it is necessary to display video in a large format for viewing small details and so others involved in the session can also see the video. Cubase provides the ability to use several types of video output devices to accomplish this.
Video Preparations for Creating Video Projects RESULT Cubase creates a video track with a video event. If Extract Audio from Video was activated, an audio track with an audio event is positioned below the video track. The corresponding audio clip is saved in the Pool Record folder. NOTE You can also import video files by dragging them from the MediaBay, the File Explorer/macOS Finder and dropping them in your project.
Video Preparations for Video Playback Manually Generating Thumbnail Cache Files You can manually generate thumbnail cache files. This is necessary if a thumbnail cache file could not be generated during import because the folder is write-protected, or because you have edited the file with an external video editing application. PROCEDURE ● Do one of the following: ● In the Pool, right-click the video file and select Generate Thumbnail Cache.
Video Preparations for Video Playback Format Allows you to select an output format. NOTE The Onscreen Window device only supports a fixed format. Offset If the video image does not match the audio, you can enter an offset value in milliseconds to specify how much earlier the video should be delivered. This compensates for the display delay. The offset is only used during playback. It is saved globally for each output device and is independent of the project.
Video Preparations for Video Playback Fullscreen Mode Sets the window to full screen mode. To exit full screen mode, open the context menu and select Exit Fullscreen Mode or press Esc. Quarter Size Reduces the window to a quarter of the actual size. Half Size Reduces the window to half the actual size. Actual Size Sets the window to the size of the video. Double Size Enlarges the window to twice the actual size. Aspect Ratio You can also drag the borders of the Video Player window to resize it.
Video Editing Video Scrubbing Video You can scrub video events, that is, play them back forwards or backwards. PROCEDURE 1. Select Studio > Video Player. 2. Do one of the following: ● Click in the Video Player window and move the mouse to the left or to the right. ● Use a jog wheel on a remote controller. Editing Video Video events are created automatically when you import a video file.
Video Export Video the end of the skidding sound and activate Use Video Follows Edit Mode to match that point to the stopped car on screen. RELATED LINKS Snap Point on page 525 Editing Tempo and Time Signature on page 989 Export Video You can export a video file from your project. This allows you, for example, to share sections of intermediate results or finished videos with clients or other users.
Video Export Video File Location File Name Allows you to specify the name of the exported video file. File Path Allows you to specify the file path of the exported video file. Click Path Options to open a pop-up menu with file path options: ● Choose opens the File Explorer/macOS Finder allowing you to browse for a file location. ● Recent Paths allows you to select a recently selected file locations. ● Clear Recent Paths allows you to delete all recently selected file locations.
Video Export Video NOTE ● If you export external effects or instruments in real time, you must also activate Monitor for the respective audio channels. ● Realtime Export affects only the audio export. Video is processed as usual. Export Range This section provides information about the exported locator range. File Information This section provides detailed information about the exported video file.
Video Extracting Audio from Video 6. Click Export Video. RESULT The video file is exported. RELATED LINKS Export Video Dialog on page 1065 Extracting Audio from Video You can extract the audio stream of a video file on import. PROCEDURE 1. Do one of the following: ● Select File > Import > Audio from Video File. This creates an audio clip in the Pool, but does not add any events to the Project window. ● Select Media > Extract Audio from Video File. 2.
Exchanging Files with Other Applications OMF Files Open Media Framework Interchange (OMFI) is a platform-independent file format that allows you to transfer digital media between different applications. Cubase can import and export OMF files. Importing OMF Files PROCEDURE 1. Select File > Import > OMF. 2. In the file dialog, select the OMF file and click Open. 3. Optional: If a project is open, choose if you want to create a new project.
Exchanging Files with Other Applications OMF Files Import Allows you to select a track for import. Type Shows the media type of the track. Track Name Shows the track name. Select All Tracks Selects all tracks for import. Import All Media Files Imports media files that are not referenced by events. Import Clip Gain as Automation Imports volume automation and envelopes of the volume automation track of each track.
Exchanging Files with Other Applications OMF Files Import at Absolute Time Inserts the elements contained in the file starting at the timecode position saved in the file and keeping the relative distances between the elements. Exporting OMF Files PROCEDURE 1. Select File > Export > OMF. 2. In the Export Options dialog, select the tracks that you want to include in the exported file and make your changes. 3. Click OK. 4. In the file dialog, specify a name and location. 5. Click Save.
Exchanging Files with Other Applications OMF Files Export Allows you to select a track for export. Track Name Shows the track name. Select All Selects all tracks in the project for export. From Left to Right Locator Allows you to export the range between the locators only. Media Destination Path Allows you to specify a location for the exported files. You can also click Browse. NOTE You can create references to media destinations that do not exist on the system you are working with.
Exchanging Files with Other Applications AAF Files Consolidate Events Allows you to copy only the portions of audio files that are used in the project. The Handle Length value allows you to define a length in milliseconds to include audio outside each event boundary for later fine-tuning. Handles allow you to adjust fades or edit points when the project is imported into another application. OMF 1.0 File Allows you to select an OMF version.
Exchanging Files with Other Applications AAF Files ● To import the AAF file to your active project, click No and proceed with step 5. 4. In the File Explorer/macOS Finder, specify a project folder and click Select Folder. 5. In the Import Options dialog, choose the tracks you want to import and make your changes. 6. Click OK. NOTE Depending on the size of the imported project and whether the files are embedded or referenced, the import process may take a while.
Exchanging Files with Other Applications AAF Files Import Allows you to select a track for import. Type Shows the media type of the track. Track Name Shows the track name. Select All Tracks Selects all tracks for import. Import All Media Files Imports media files that are not referenced by events. Import at Absolute Position Places imported track data at its original timecode position in your active project.
Exchanging Files with Other Applications AAF Files starts at timecode 01:00:00:00 with an event located at 02:00:00:00, and if the cursor in your active project is located at 02:00:00:00, the imported event is placed at timecode 03:00:00:00. NOTE ● If the original timecode position of the imported data is outside of your project range, the start/end time of your project is modified. ● The import position options are only available if you import the AAF file to your active project.
Exchanging Files with Other Applications AAF Files Export Allows you to select a track for export. Track Name Shows the track name. Select All Selects all tracks in the project for export. From Left to Right Locator Allows you to export the range between the locators only. Media Destination Path Allows you to specify a location for the exported files. You can also click Browse. NOTE You can create references to media destinations that do not exist on the system you are working with.
Exchanging Files with Other Applications AAF Files Export Muted Events with Volume -inf dB Sets muted events to a volume -inf dB on export. Consolidate Events Allows you to copy only the portions of audio files that are used in the project. The Handle Length value allows you to define a length in milliseconds to include audio outside each event boundary for later fine-tuning. Handles allow you to adjust fades or edit points when the project is imported into another application.
ReWire Introduction ReWire is a special protocol for streaming audio between two computer applications. Developed by Propellerhead Software and Steinberg, ReWire provides the following possibilities and features: ● Realtime streaming of up to 256 separate audio channels, at full bandwidth, from the synthesizer application into the mixer application. In this case, the mixer application is Cubase. An example of a synthesizer application is Propellerhead Software’s Reason.
ReWire Launching and quitting PROCEDURE 1. Select Studio > ReWire > ReWire Setup. 2. Activate the ReWire applications that you want to use. 3. Click Apply. RESULT The enabled ReWire applications become available in the ReWire submenu. AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK You can activate ReWire channels in the ReWire panel of the application.
ReWire Activating ReWire channels NOTE Please note that the two programs now compete for system resources such as audio cards, just as when running with other, non-ReWire audio applications. Activating ReWire channels ReWire supports streaming of up to 256 separate audio channels. The exact number of available ReWire channels depends on the synthesizer application. The ReWire device panels in Cubase allow you to activate the channels that you want to use.
ReWire How the ReWire channels are handled Basic transport controls When you run ReWire, the transports in the two programs are completely linked. It does not matter in which program you play, stop, fast forward or rewind. However, recording (if applicable) is still completely separate in the two applications. Loop settings If there is a loop or cycle facility in the synthesizer application, that loop will be completely linked to the cycle in Cubase.
ReWire Considerations and limitations play the synthesizer application via MIDI from Cubase, using it as one or several separate MIDI sound sources. ● The number and configuration of MIDI outputs depends on the synthesizer application. Considerations and limitations Sample rates Synthesizer applications may be limited to audio playback in certain sample rates. If Cubase is set to a sample rate other than those, the synthesizer application will play back at the wrong pitch.
Key Commands Key commands are assigned to most main menus and functions in Cubase. They are stored as Preferences that are used for all your projects. You can view and add key commands in the Key Commands dialog. Key command assignments are also shown in the tooltips. Tooltips that show an exclamation mark at the end have no key command assigned yet. You can save key commands settings as a key commands file, which is stored separately and can be imported into any project.
Key Commands Key Commands Dialog The following options are available: + All Expands all folders. - All Reduces all folders. Search Allows you to search for Cubase functions. This is useful if you want to know which key command is assigned to a specific function. Reset Current Key Command Allows you to reset the selected key command back to the default setting. Commands list Shows the Cubase functions for that you can assign key commands arranged in category folders.
Key Commands Key Commands Dialog RELATED LINKS Macros Section on page 1086 Assigning Key Commands on page 1087 Searching for Key Commands on page 1087 Resetting Key Commands on page 1089 Removing Key Commands on page 1088 Importing Key Command Settings on page 1089 Loading Key Command Presets on page 1089 Saving Key Commands Presets on page 1089 Setting up Macros on page 1088 Macros Section The Macros section allows you to set up a combination of several functions or commands that you want to be performed
Key Commands Assigning Key Commands Hide Macros Hides the Macros section. Reset All Resets all key commands to their default settings. RELATED LINKS Key Commands Dialog on page 1084 Setting up Macros on page 1088 Assigning Key Commands You can add key commands in the Key Commands dialog. PROCEDURE 1. Select Edit > Key Commands. 2. Do one of the following: ● In the Commands list, click the plus sign to open a category folder, and select the function to which you want to assign a key command.
Key Commands Removing Key Commands 3. Click Start/Continue Search. RESULT The first matching command is selected and displayed in the Commands list. The Keys column and the Keys list show the assigned key commands, if any. Removing Key Commands PROCEDURE 1. Select Edit > Key Commands. 2. In the Commands list, click the plus sign to open a category folder, and select the function for which you want to remove a key command. 3.
Key Commands Saving Key Commands Presets Saving Key Commands Presets You can save key commands settings as presets. PREREQUISITE You have set up the key commands to your liking. PROCEDURE 1. In the Presets section, click Save. 2. Enter a name for the preset and click OK. RESULT Your key commands settings are now available as a preset on the Presets pop-up menu. Loading Key Command Presets You can load key commands presets.
Key Commands Default Key Commands 2. Do one of the following: ● In the Commands list, select the key command that you want to restore and click Reset. ● Click Reset All. RESULT The key commands are reset. IMPORTANT Any changes made to the default key commands are lost. If you want to be able to revert to these settings again, make sure to save them first. Default Key Commands The default key commands are arranged in categories.
Key Commands Default Key Commands Automation Category Option Key command Open Panel F6 Read Automation for All Tracks On/Off Alt-R Write Automation for All Tracks On/Off Alt-W Chords Category Option Key command Show/Hide Chord Pads Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-C Devices (Studio) Category Option Key command Audio Connections F4 Audio Performance F12 MixConsole F3 MixConsole in Project Window Alt-F3 On-Screen Keyboard Alt-K Video Player F8 VST Instruments F11 Direct Offline Processing Category
Key Commands Default Key Commands Option Key command Copy Ctrl/Cmd-C Cut Ctrl/Cmd-X Cut Time Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-X Delete Delete or Backspace Delete Time Shift-Backspace Duplicate Ctrl/Cmd-D Expand/Reduce Alt-E Find Track/Channel Ctrl/Cmd-F Group Ctrl/Cmd-G Group Editing on Selected Tracks On/Off K Insert Silence Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-E Invert Alt-F Invert Selection Ctrl/Cmd-Alt-I Left Selection Side to Cursor E Lock Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-L Move to Cursor Ctrl/Cmd-L Move to Front (Uncover)
Key Commands Default Key Commands Option Key command Paste Time Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-V Primary Parameter: Decrease Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-Down Arrow Primary Parameter: Increase Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-Up Arrow Record Enable R Redo Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-Z Repeat Ctrl/Cmd-K Right Selection Side to Cursor D Secondary Parameter: Decrease Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-Left Arrow Secondary Parameter: Increase Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-Right Arrow Select All Ctrl/Cmd-A Select None Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-A Snap On/Off J Solo S Split At Cursor Alt-X
Key Commands Default Key Commands Option Key command Open Score Editor Ctrl/Cmd-R Open/Close Editor Return File Category Option Key command Close Ctrl/Cmd-W New Ctrl/Cmd-N Open Ctrl/Cmd-O Quit Ctrl/Cmd-Q Save Ctrl/Cmd-S Save As Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-S Save New Version Ctrl/Cmd-Alt-S Media Category Option Key command Open MediaBay F5 Open/Close Attribute Inspector Ctrl-Alt-Num 6 Open/Close Favorites Ctrl-Alt-Num 8 Open/Close File Browser Ctrl-Alt-Num 4 Open/Close Filters Ctrl-Alt-N
Key Commands Default Key Commands MIDI Category Option Key command Show/Hide Controller Lanes Alt-L MixConsole History Category Option Key command Undo MixConsole Step Alt-Z Redo MixConsole Step Alt-Shift-Z Navigate Category Option Key command Add Down: Shift-Down Arrow Expand/Undo selection in the Project window to the bottom/Move selected event in the Key Editor down 1 octave Add Left: Shift-Left Arrow Expand/Undo selection in the Project window/Key Editor to the left Add Right: Shift-Ri
Key Commands Default Key Commands Option Key command Right: Right Arrow Select next in the Project window/Key Editor Toggle Selection Ctrl/Cmd-Space Top: Home Select top track in the track list Up Arrow Up: Select next in the Project window/ Move selected event in the Key Editor one semitone up Nudge Category Option Key command End Left Alt-Shift-Left Arrow End Right Alt-Shift-Right Arrow Left Ctrl/Cmd-Left Arrow Right Ctrl/Cmd-Right Arrow Start Left Alt-Left Arrow Start Right Alt-Ri
Key Commands Default Key Commands Option Key command Set Track/Event Color Alt-Shift-C Setup Shift-S Quantize Category Option Key command Quantize Q Set Insert Length Category Option Key command 1/1 Alt-1 1/2 Alt-2 1/4 Alt-3 1/8 Alt-4 1/16 Alt-5 1/32 Alt-6 1/64 Alt-7 1/128 Alt-8 Toggle Dotted Alt-. Toggle Triplet Alt-, Tool Category Option Key command Combine Selection Tools On/Off Alt-Shift-1 Draw Tool 8 Drumstick Tool 0 Erase Tool 5 1097 Cubase Pro 10.5.
Key Commands Default Key Commands Option Key command Glue Tool 4 Mute Tool 7 Next Tool F10 Object Selection Tool 1 Play Tool 9 Previous Tool F9 Range Selection Tool 2 Split Tool 3 Zoom Tool 6 Track Versions Category Option Key command Duplicate Version Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-D New Version Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-N Next Version Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-H Previous Version Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-G Transport Category Option Key command Activate External Sync Alt-Shift-T Activate Metronome C Activate Punch In
Key Commands Default Key Commands Option Key command Enter Locator Range Duration Shift-D Enter Project Cursor Position Shift-P Enter Punch In Position Shift-I Enter Punch Out Position Shift-O Enter Right Locator Shift-R Enter Tempo Shift-T Enter Time Signature Shift-C Exchange Time Formats . Fast Forward Shift-Num + Fast Rewind Shift-Num - Forward Num + Go to Left Locator Num 1 Go to Project Start Num .
Key Commands Default Key Commands Option Key command MIDI Retrospective Record: Insert from All MIDI Inputs Shift- Num --* Nudge Cursor Left Ctrl/Cmd- Num - Nudge Cursor Right Ctrl/Cmd- Num + Panel (Transport panel) F2 Play Selection Range Alt-Space Recall Cycle Marker 1 to 9 Shift-Num 1 to Num 9 Record Num * Rewind Num - Set Left Locator to Project Cursor Position Ctrl/Cmd-Num 1 Set Marker 1 Ctrl/Cmd-1 Set Marker 2 Ctrl/Cmd-2 Set Marker 3 to 9 Ctrl/Cmd-Num 3 to Num 9 or Ctrl/Cmd-3
Key Commands Default Key Commands Option Key command Show/Hide Upper Zone Ctrl/Cmd-Alt-U Show/Hide Lower Zone Ctrl/Cmd-Alt-E or Ctrl/Cmd-Alt-B Show/Hide Transport Bar Ctrl/Cmd-Alt-T Show Previous Tab Ctrl/Cmd-Alt-Left Arrow Show Next Tab Ctrl/Cmd-Alt-Right Arrow Show Previous Page Ctrl/Cmd-Alt-Up Arrow or Page Up Show Next Page Ctrl/Cmd-Alt-Down Arrow or Page Down Show/Hide Info Line Ctrl/Cmd-I Show/Hide Overview Alt-O Windows Category Option Key command Inline: Key Commands Shift-F4
Key Commands Setting up Tool Modifier Keys Zoom Category Option Key command Zoom Full Shift-F Zoom In H Zoom In On Waveform Vertically Alt-H Zoom In Tracks Ctrl/Cmd-Down Arrow Zoom In Vertically Shift-H Zoom Out G Zoom Out Of Waveform Vertically Alt-G Zoom Out Tracks Ctrl/Cmd-Up Arrow Zoom Out Vertically Shift-G Zoom to Event Shift-E Zoom to Selection Alt-S Zoom Tracks Exclusive Z Setting up Tool Modifier Keys You can set up tool modifier keys that allow you to get an alternative
Key Commands Setting up Tool Modifier Keys RESULT The modifier keys for the action are replaced. 1103 Cubase Pro 10.5.
Customizing In Cubase you can organize windows and dialogs in workspaces, set up the appearance of specific elements, and save program settings as profiles. RELATED LINKS Workspaces on page 1104 Setup Options on page 1107 Profiles on page 1109 Workspaces Workspaces in Cubase allow you to organize windows and specific dialogs for your common work routines.
Customizing Workspaces Project Workspaces Allows you to save a specific layout of dialogs and windows that is saved with your current project. This allows you to open your project layout on other computers. Project workspaces are indicated by the letter P on your Workspaces menu. Workspaces for External Projects You can determine the view of external projects when you open them in Cubase.
Customizing Workspaces PROCEDURE 1. On the Workspaces menu, select the workspace that you want to modify. 2. Make your changes as required. 3. On the Workspaces menu, select one of the following: ● To update your current workspace, click Update Workspace. ● To save your workspace as a different workspace or workspace type, click Add Workspace. RELATED LINKS Creating Workspaces on page 1105 Workspaces Organizer The Workspaces Organizer allows you to manage the existing workspaces.
Customizing Setup Options Move Down Moves down a workspace by one position. NOTE ● You can also click and drag a workspace to another position within a list. ● You can move workspaces only within a list. For a global workspace to become a project workspace and vice versa, you must save it as a different type of workspace. ● To rename a workspace, you can double-click the workspace name.
Customizing Setup Options The info line setup context menu Setup Dialog The setup dialog allows you to specify which elements are visible/hidden and in what order they are shown. You can save and recall setup presets. ● To open a setup dialog, right-click the element that you want to set up, and select Setup. Hidden Items Lists the elements that are hidden. Visible Items Lists the elements that are visible. Add Select an item in the list of Hidden Items, and click Add to make it visible.
Customizing Profiles Remove Select an item in the list of Visible Items, and click Remove to hide it. Move Up Select an item in the list of Visible Items, and click Move Up to reorder the items. Move Down Select an item in the list of Visible Items, and click Move Down to reorder the items. Store Allows you to name the current configuration and save it as a preset. Delete Remove a selected preset. Reset All Reverts to the default configuration.
Customizing Profiles The dialog lists all available profiles. The active profile is indicated by a checkmark. To organize your profiles, you have the following options: New Adds a new profile with factory settings. Duplicate Duplicates the selected profile. Rename Allows you to rename the selected profile. Delete Deletes the selected profile. Import Opens a dialog that allows you to import a profile from a file. Export Opens a dialog that allows you to export the selected profile to a file.
Customizing Profiles AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK Activate the new profile to apply the settings. RELATED LINKS Activating Profiles on page 1111 Duplicating Profiles The Profile Manager allows you to create a duplicate of a profile and save it under a different name. PROCEDURE 1. Select Edit > Profile Manager. 2. In the Profile Manager, select the profile that you want to duplicate. 3. Click Duplicate. 4. In the Duplicate Profile dialog, enter a profile name and click OK.
Customizing Profiles Deleting Profiles The Profile Manager allows you to delete profiles. PREREQUISITE You have saved at least two profiles. NOTE You cannot delete the active profile. PROCEDURE 1. Select Edit > Profile Manager. 2. In the Profile Manager, select the profile that you want to delete. Select multiple profiles to delete them at once. 3. Click Delete. 4. Click OK.
Customizing Windows Dialog AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK Activate the new profile to apply the settings. RELATED LINKS Activating Profiles on page 1111 Windows Dialog The Windows dialog allows you to manage open windows in Cubase. ● To open the Windows dialog, select Window > Windows. The dialog lists all open dialogs, windows, and editors. The following options are available: OK Closes the dialog. Mode Allows you to select a mode that affects the function. ● Selected Affects the selected window only.
Customizing Where are the Settings Stored? Where are the Settings Stored? There is a large number of ways in which you can customize Cubase. While some of the settings you make are stored with each project, others are stored in separate preference files. If you need to transfer your projects to another computer in another studio, for example, you can bring all your settings along by copying the desired preference files and installing them on the other computer.
Customizing Safe Mode Dialog The following options are available in the Plug-Ins section: Deactivate all third party plug-ins Temporarily disables all third party plug-ins. After startup, only Steinberg plug-ins are available. The following options are available in the Preferences section: Use current program preferences Opens the program with the current preference settings. Disable program preferences Disables the current preferences and opens the program with the factory default settings instead.
Customizing Safe Mode Dialog ● Delete program preferences Deletes the preferences and opens the program with the factory default settings instead. This process cannot be undone. Note that this affects all versions of Cubase installed on your computer. 4. Click OK. AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK If the program works fine with disabled preferences, consider deleting and re-initializing the preferences.
Optimizing Optimizing Audio Performance This section gives you some hints and tips on how to get the most out of your Cubase system, performance-wise. NOTE For details and current information on system requirements and hardware properties, refer to steinberg.net. Performance Aspects Tracks and Effects The faster your computer, the more tracks, effects, and EQs you are able to play. Exactly what constitutes a fast computer is almost a science in itself, but some hints are given below.
Optimizing Optimizing Audio Performance This is especially true when using Cubase for Windows: ● Under Windows, ASIO drivers written specifically for the hardware are more efficient than the Generic Low Latency ASIO Driver and produce shorter latency times. ● Under macOS, audio hardware with properly written macOS (Core Audio) drivers can be very efficient and produce very low latency times. However, there are additional features only available with ASIO drivers, such as the ASIO Positioning Protocol.
Optimizing Optimizing Audio Performance Average load Shows how much of the available CPU power is used for audio processing. Real-time peak Shows the processing load in the real time path of the audio engine. The higher this value, the higher the risk that dropouts occur. Overload indicator The overload indicator to the right of the real-time peak indicator and the average load indicator displays overloads of the average or real-time indicator.
Optimizing Optimizing Audio Performance RELATED LINKS VST 2 Plug-in Path Settings on page 739 Activating the ASIO-Guard PROCEDURE 1. Select Studio > Studio Setup. 2. In the Devices list, select VST Audio System. 3. Activate the Activate ASIO-Guard option. NOTE This option is only available if you activate Activate Multi Processing. 4. Select an ASIO-Guard Level. The higher the level, the higher the processing stability and audio processing performance.
Preferences The Preferences dialog provides options and settings that control the global behavior of the program. Preferences Dialog The Preferences dialog is divided into a navigation list and a settings page. Clicking one of the entries in the navigation list opens a settings page. ● To open the Preferences dialog, select Edit > Preferences. In addition to the settings, the dialog provides the following options: Preference Presets Allows you to select a saved preference preset.
Preferences Preferences Dialog Apply Applies any changes that you have made without closing the dialog. OK Applies any changes that you have made and closes the dialog. Cancel Closes the dialog without saving any changes. Saving Preference Presets You can save complete or partial preference settings as presets. PROCEDURE 1. In the Preferences dialog, make your changes. 2. Click Store in the lower left section of the dialog. 3. Enter a preset name and click OK.
Preferences Editing Editing ‘Edit Solo’/’Record in MIDI Editors’ Follow Focus Suspends Record in Editor and Solo Editor in the MIDI editor if the Project window gets the focus. Default Track Time Type Allows you to select the default track time type for new tracks. ● Musical Sets new tracks to musical time base. ● Time Linear Sets new tracks to linear time base. ● Follow Transport Main Display Sets new tracks to follow the primary time format: Bars+Beats format sets new tracks to musical time base.
Preferences Editing Use Up/Down Navigation Commands for Selecting Tracks only Uses the Up Arrow/Down Arrow keys for track selection, not for event/part selection. Track Selection Follows Event Selection Automatically selects the corresponding track if you select an event in the Project window. Automation Follows Events Lets automation events automatically follow when you move, duplicate, copy, or paste an event or part on the track.
Preferences Editing Creates a new editing version of the clip, and applies the processing to that version leaving the original clip unaffected. ● Process Existing Clip Applies the processing to the existing clip. All events playing that clip are affected. Time Stretch Tool Algorithm Sets the default algorithm that is applied when you use the Object Selection tool in Sizing Applies Time Stretch mode. Default Warping Algorithm Sets the warp algorithm for new audio clips in the project.
Preferences Editing ● Jump Clicking anywhere on a slider instantly moves the slider handle to that position. ● Touch Clicking and dragging the actual slider handle adjusts the setting. ● Ramp Clicking and dragging a slider causes the handle to move smoothly to the new position. ● Relative Clicking and dragging up or down changes the setting according to how far you drag, not according to where you click.
Preferences Editing Scroll to Selected Track Scrolls the track list when you select a MixConsole channel and the respective track is out of view. Sync Selection in Project Window and MixConsole Synchronizes the selection in the Project window and the MixConsole. Enable Record on Selected MIDI Track Record-enables MIDI tracks when you select them. Enable Record on Selected Audio Track Record-enables audio tracks when you select them. Enable Solo on Selected Track Solos tracks when you select them.
Preferences Editors Show Notification when Switching Tool Mode with Key Command Shows a notification when you switch the tool mode by using a key command. Editors Use Drum Editor when Drum Map is assigned Shows drum note symbols in parts on MIDI tracks to which drum maps are assigned. The parts automatically open in the Drum Editor on double-click. This overwrites the Default MIDI Editor setting.
Preferences Event Display Smallest Track Height to Show Name Determines from which track height the track names are displayed. RELATED LINKS Waveform Brightness on page 1129 Note Brightness on page 1131 Event Display - Audio Interpolate Audio Waveforms Interpolates sample values to form curves when you zoom in to one sample per pixel or less. Show Event Volume Curves Always Shows event volume curves, regardless of whether the event is selected. Show Waveforms Shows waveforms for audio events.
Preferences Event Display Chord Symbols Allows you to select your preferred display method for major 7th chords, minor chords, half-diminished chords, diminished chords, and augmented chords. Custom Chord Symbols Allows you to modify the default chord symbols that are used on the chord track, for the chord pads, and in the Score Editor. ● New Custom Chord allows you to add a new custom chord symbol. ● The options to the left allow you to specify the chord for which you want to change the chord symbol.
Preferences General Event Display - MIDI Part Data Mode Determines if and how events in MIDI parts are shown. This setting is overwritten for tracks with drum maps if Use Drum Editor when Drum Map is assigned is activated. Show Controllers Shows non-note events such as controllers, etc. in MIDI parts. Note Brightness Sets the brightness of note events. Controller Brightness Sets the brightness of controller events.
Preferences MIDI Show Tips Displays an explanatory tooltip when you position the mouse pointer over an icon or button in Cubase. Maximum Undo Steps Allows you to specify the number of undo steps. Run Setup on Create New Project Opens the Project Setup dialog every time you create a new project. Open Projects in Last Used View Allows you to determine what window layout is used when you open a project. ● Never Uses the original window layout and settings.
Preferences MIDI Length Adjustment Allows you to enter a length adjustment value in ticks by which the notes that have the same pitch and MIDI channel are adjusted. This ensures that there is always a short time between the end of one note and the start of another. By default, there are 120 ticks per 1/16 note, but you can adjust this with the MIDI Display Resolution setting. Chase Events Chases event types for which one of the chase options is activated when you locate to a new position and start playback.
Preferences MIDI MIDI - MIDI File Export Options These options allow you to specify what data is included in exported MIDI files. Export Inspector Patch Includes MIDI patch settings in the Inspector as MIDI bank select and program change events in the MIDI file. Export Inspector Volume/Pan Includes volume and pan settings in the Inspector as MIDI volume and pan events in the MIDI file. Export Automation Includes automation as MIDI controller events in the MIDI file.
Preferences MIDI Import Options The Import Options for MIDI files allow you to specify what data is included in imported MIDI files. Extract First Patch Converts the first Program Change and Bank Select events for each track to Inspector settings for the track. Extract First Volume/Pan Converts the first MIDI Volume and Pan events for each track to Inspector settings for the track.
Preferences MediaBay MIDI - MIDI Filter This page allows you to prevent certain MIDI messages from being recorded and/or echoed by the MIDI thru function (thruput). The page is divided into 4 sections: Record Prevents the corresponding type of MIDI message from being recorded. It will, however, be thruput, and if already recorded, play back normally. Thru Prevents the corresponding type of MIDI message from being thruput. It will, however, be recorded and played back normally.
Preferences Record Meters’ Peak Hold Time Allows you to specify for how long the peak levels are held in the meters. For this to work, deactivate Meters - Hold Forever in the MixConsole. Meters’ Fallback Allows you to specify how quickly the meters in the MixConsole return to lower values after signal peaks. Metering - Appearance This page allows you to assign colors to level meter values to quickly identify what levels are reached. You can edit the appearance individually for all available scales.
Preferences Record Create Audio Images during Record Creates and displays a waveform image during the recording process. NOTE This real-time calculation uses some extra processing power. Record - Audio - Broadcast Wave This page allows you to specify the Description, Author, and Reference Value text strings that are embedded in recorded Broadcast Wave files. The settings you make here also appear as default strings in the Broadcast Wave Chunk dialog when you export files to certain formats.
Preferences Scores ● All Replace mode works as usual. Notes and controllers are replaced when recording. Scores This page allows you to make settings for the Score Editor. Select one of the available entries. Scores - Colors for Additional Meanings Allows you to specify different colors to identify non-standard elements in the score. ● Click in the Active column to activate this function for the respective element. ● Click in the color field to the right to specify a color.
Preferences Scores Show Bars and Beats Positions When Inserting Notes Shows the bars and beats positions when you insert notes with the mouse or the computer keyboard. Unlock Layout When Editing Single Parts If there is more than one part on a track, and you open the Score Editor for one of these parts, the other parts are displayed as empty space to preserve the layout. If this option is activated, this empty space is avoided, so you can print this single part without endless rests.
Preferences Transport Transport This page contains options related to playback, recording, and positioning. Playback Toggle Triggers Local Preview Allows you to use Space on your keyboard to start/stop local playback of the selected file in the Sample Editor or the Pool. When the Sample Editor is not open or when there is no audio file selected in the Pool, Space still toggles the global project playback. Show Timecode Subframes Shows subframes for all frame-based display formats.
Preferences User Interface Transport - Scrub Scrub Volume Sets the playback volume for the Scrub tool in the Project window and audio editors. NOTE This does not affect the scrub volume controlled by any connected hardware. Use High Quality Scrub Mode Enables effects for scrubbing and uses a higher resampling quality. However, scrubbing will be more demanding on the processor. Use Inserts While Scrubbing Allows you to activate insert effects for scrubbing with the shuttle speed control.
Preferences User Interface 2. Do one of the following: ● Activate a default color scheme by clicking on it. ● Click Choose Custom Color and in the Color Picker, select a new color. RESULT The color scheme is instantly applied. User Interface - Track & MixConsole Channel Colors Allows you to set the Auto Track/Channel Color Mode to colorize track controls and channel faders, and to determine the brightness of selected channels.
Preferences VST VST This page contains settings for the VST audio engine. Default Stereo Panner Mode Allows you to specify the default pan mode for inserted audio tracks. Connect Sends Automatically for Each Newly Created Channel Automatically connects the send routing for existing FX channels when you create a new audio or group channel.
Preferences VST ● While Record-Enabled Connects the audio source to the channel input when you click Record Enable. ● While Record Running Switches to input monitoring only during recording. ● Tapemachine Style Activates input monitoring in stop mode and during recording, but not during playback. NOTE The automatic monitoring options apply when you monitor through Cubase, or when you use ASIO Direct Monitoring.
Preferences VariAudio VST - Control Room This page contains settings for the Control Room. Show Control Room Volume in Transport Panel If the Control Room is enabled, the Control Room volume is shown on the Transport panel. Auto Disable Talkback Mode Determines if talkback is disabled during recording, during playback and recording, or not at all. NOTE Set the Talkback DIM level to 0 dB so as not to radically change the mix level when punching in and out of record mode.
Preferences Video Video Extract Audio on Import Video File Extracts and saves the audio data of imported video files as a separate audio clip. Thumbnail Memory Cache Size Allows you to set the size of the thumbnail cache. 1147 Cubase Pro 10.5.
Index A AAF files 1073 ACID® loops 539 Action Target 984 Length 984 Name 986 Position 984 Set Color 986 Track Operation 985 Trim 986 Activate Project 106 Activate Read/Write for all tracks 707 Activate tempo track 991 Activate this Track Track Control 116 Active Track Version 188 Adapt to Zoom 81 Grid type 86 ADAT Lightpipe Synchronization 1038 Add Cycle Marker Track Control 116 Add Latency to MIDI-Thru Processing 1138 Add Marker Track Control 116 Add Track dialog 120 Audio tracks 121 Folder tracks 147 FX
Index ASIO Latency Compensation Track Control 116 ASIO Latency Compensation Active by Default 1138 ASIO-Guard 1119 Aspect ratio Video Player window 1062 Assigning chords to Chord Pads 937 Assigning chords with the Chord Editor 938 Attribute Filter Applying in the MediaBay 649 Context menu search 649 MediaBay 648 Attribute Inspector MediaBay 651 Attributes 650 Defining 654 Editing in the MediaBay 651 Managing lists 653 MediaBay 648 Audio Handling 200 Overlapping 179 Rendering 1014 Zooming 82 Audio Alignment
Index Automation (continued) Merge Modes 716 One Shot 713 Quick scaling 702 Ramp curves 696 Read 696 Show options 715 Smooth transitions 700 Static value line 696 Suspend options 714 Suspend Read 714 Trim 710 Virgin territory 705 VST MultiPanner 671 Write 696 Automation data Editing 699 Removing 703 Selecting 700 Automation Event Editor Compress Left 701 Compress Right 701 Move Vertically 701 Scale Around Absolute Center 701 Scale Around Relative Center 701 Scale Vertically 701 Stretch 701 Tilt Left 701 Ti
Index Channel strip rack (continued) Limiter 390 Presets 397 Saturation 390 Transformer 390 Channel types MixConsole 365 Channels Adding to link groups 372 Controlling with VCA faders 417 Linking 369 Removing from link groups 373 Chase Events 260, 1132 Child busses 33 Surround configurations 664 Chord Assistant 913, 934 Assigning chords 938, 939 Cadence mode 913, 935 Circle of Fifths 934, 937 Common notes mode 913, 935 Complexity 913, 935 Gap mode 913, 935 Proximity 934, 936 Chord Editor 911 Adding chords
Index Common notes mode Chord Assistant 913, 935 Complexity filters 913, 935 Complexity filters Cadence mode 913, 935 Common notes mode 913, 935 Compress Left Automation Event Editor 701 Controller Event Editor 816 Tempo Event Editor 993 Compress Right Automation Event Editor 701 Controller Event Editor 816 Tempo Event Editor 993 Compressor Strip module 390 Connect Sends automatically for each newly created Channel 1144 Connecting Audio 15 MIDI 22 Constrain Delay Compensation 730 Continuous controllers Add
Index Cut Head 216 Cut Tail 216 Cycle Track Control 116 Cycle Follows Range Selection 1123 Cycle markers 338 Editing with tools 339 Using 338 Zooming 84, 339 Cycle recording 267 D Data on Folder Tracks Showing 1130 DC Offset Removing 490 Deactivate Read/Write for all tracks 707 Deep Track Folding 1126 Default MIDI Editor 1128 Delay compensation Constraining 730 Threshold for Recording 1144 Delete Notes Dialog 799 Delete Overlaps 1123 Deleting Continuous Controllers 792 Controllers 792 Doubles 792 MIDI con
Index E Edit Channel Settings Track Control 116 Edit History dialog 88 Edit In-Place Track Control 116 Edit Instrument Track Control 116 Editing Project window info line 58 Editing events Group editing 220 Editor Extensions 584 Lower zone 584 Editor Content Follows Event Selection 1128 Effect parameters Track Quick Controls 744 Effect Plug-in Presets Loading in MediaBay 656 Effects 442 Comparing settings 463 Control panel 461 Copying presets 466 Direct Offline Processing 471 Dithering 461 Exporting system
Index Export Audio Mixdown 1020, 1026 AIFC files 1029 AIFF files 1030 Broadcast Wave files 1028 Channel selection 1027 Defining Naming Schemes 1026 File Formats 1027 Flac files 1033 MP3 files 1030 Naming Scheme dialog 1025 Ogg Vorbis files 1033 Surround mixes 683 Wave 64 files 1034 Wave files 1028 Windows Media Audio files 1031 Export Video 1065 Export Video dialog 1065 Exporting AAF 1073 MIDI files 168 OMF 1069 Profiles 1112 Selected tracks 167 Track archives 168 Tracks 167 Video files 1067 Expression Map
Index Follow Chord Track (continued) Synchronizing Track Data 926 Using 924 Formant Shifting VariAudio 565 Frame count 1036 Frame rates Mismatch 1060 Synchronization 1036 Video 1060 Freeze VST instruments 728 Freeze Channel Track Control 116 Freeze MIDI Modifiers 770 Freeze Trim Automation 711 FX chain presets 387 FX Chain presets Direct Offline Processing 481 FX Chain Presets Loading in MediaBay 657 FX channel tracks 138 Add Track dialog 138 Adding 453, 454 Inspector 140 Setting up 35 FX Plug-in Presets L
Index Independent track loop Audio Part Editor 580 Independent Track Loop MIDI 801 Indicate Transpositions Key Editor 335 Info line Editing articulations 883 Project window 58 Transpose 336 Inhibit warning when applying Offline Processes 1146 Inhibit warning when changing the Sample Data 1146 Initial value Automation 705 Input busses Adding 33 Removing 41 Renaming 32 Routing 383 Surround configurations 666 Input gain MixConsole 385 Input levels 15 Input ports 21 Inputs Meter position options 379 Insert eff
Index Legato Mode - Between Selected Notes Only 1126 Legato Overlap 1126 Length Adjustment 1132 Level meters (MixConsole) 380 Limiter Strip module 390 Line tool 830 Drawing note events 829 Editing controller display events 815 Linear Time Base 989 Link groups 369 Adding channels 372 Assigning VCA faders 420 Changing settings 372 Creating 372 Q-Link 373 Removing channels 373 Removing VCA faders 420 Settings 369 Unlink 372 Link Project and Lower Zone Cursors 73 List Editor 856 Editing events 866 Editing oper
Index Media rack (continued) Right zone 77, 78 Right Zone 620, 622 Track Presets 629 VST Effects 626, 628 VST Instruments 625, 628 MediaBay 620 Adding Favorites 635 Allow Editing in Results List 652 Attribute Filter 648, 649 Attribute Inspector 650, 651 Attributes 648 Defining user attributes 654 Editing attributes 651 Editing attributes of multiple files 652 File Browser 634 Filters 646, 648 Finding file locations 637 Hiding sections 634 Instrument Presets 727 Logical Filter 646–648 Media Type Filter 638
Index MIDI interface Connecting 22 MIDI Latency Mode 1132 MIDI Loops Previewing in MediaBay 643 MIDI Max.
Index Move Vertically Automation Event Editor 701 Controller Event Editor 816 Tempo Event Editor 993 Moving Events 207 Moving tracks 173 MP3 files Exporting 1030 Importing 288 MPE 887 MPEG files Importing 288 MPEX algorithm 495 Pitch Shift 487 Multi processing 1118 Multi-channel tracks Splitting 170 Musical Articulations Editing 810 Musical Mode 539 Musical Time Base 989 Musical track time base 184 Mute MixConsole 378 Surround channels 678 Track Control 116 Transpose track 334 Mute Automation Track Control
Index Notepads MixConsole 402 Number of Bars per Staff 1139 O O-notes (Output notes) 854 Object Selection Combine Selection Tools 206 Offline Processing Applying permanently 484 Ogg Vorbis files Exporting 1033 Importing 288 OMF files 1069 On Import Audio Files 1124 On Processing Shared Clips 1124 On-Screen Keyboard 262 Computer keyboard 263 Modulation 263 Note velocity level 263 Octave offset 263 Options 263 Piano keyboard 263 Pitchbend 263 Recording MIDI 262 One Shot Fill options 713 One-Shot Mode Note E
Index Poly Pressure events Adding 812 Editing 813 Polyphony Restricting 792 Pool Applying different processing methods 606 Audio processing 616 Automatically generating new audio clips 619 Clip editing 612 Designating a new pool record folder 615 Key commands 612 Managing large sound databases 610 Managing media files 601 Organizing files in subfolders 616 Reducing the project size 617 Reference file 601 Renaming clips and regions 606 Resolve missing files dialog 611 Sampler tracks 601 Toolbar 604 Transfer
Index Project window (continued) Track list 53 Transport Bar 59, 238 Transport pop-up window 244 Visibility 64, 65 Zones 67 Zoom presets 83 Zoom submenu 82 Zooming 81 Project workspaces 1104 Project zone 44 Event display 54 Global track controls 54 Ruler 56 Toolbar 45 Track list 53 Projects Activating 106 Back up 109 Creating new 97, 99 Hub 97 Location 108 Missing ports 107 Opening 106 Opening recent 107 Prepare archive 109 Project Assistant 99 Project files 100 Revert 108 Saving 107 Saving templates 102 S
Index Remote control (continued) MIDI remote control configuration 754 Remote Control Editor 758 Resetting 751 Setting up 750 Remote Control Editor 758 Control settings 760 Layout 762 Parameter assignment 762 Toolbar 760 Remote Controllers Connecting Track Quick Controls 747 Connecting VST Quick Controls 733 Remove DC Offset Direct Offline Processing 490 Remove Empty Tracks 173 Remove Regions/Hitpoints on all Offline Processes 1124 Remove Selected Tracks 173 Removing Events 207 Silence 501 Renaming Clips 6
Index Sampler Control (continued) Transferring samples to VST instruments 600 Waveform display 592 Sampler tracks 128 Add Track dialog 128 Creating 588 Inspector 130 Loading Audio Samples 587 Loading MIDI Parts 588 Pool 601 Sampler Control 587 Transferring Samples to Instruments 600 Saturation Strip module 390 Save as Template 102 Save partial preferences settings 1122 Save Track Preset 193, 196 Scale Around Absolute Center Automation Event Editor 701 Controller Event Editor 816 Tempo Event Editor 993 Scal
Index Snap point Setting 85 Snap Point To Cursor 85 Snap to zero crossing 85 Snap type Project window 85 Snapshots MixConsole 355, 361–363 Solo MixConsole 378 Surround channels 678 Track Control 116 Solo Defeat MixConsole 378 Solo Record in MIDI Editors 1138 Spectrum Analyzer 502 Audio Functions 501 Comparing level values 503 Split MIDI Controllers 1126 Split MIDI Events 1126 Splitting By ranges 227 Events 215 Into equal events 216 Tracks 170 Standard algorithm 496 Standard Compressor Details view 409 Edit
Index Tempo Process Bars 1005 Process Tempo 1003 Set Definition from Tempo 1007 Tempo Changes Tempo Detection 997 Tempo Detection 997, 1001 Corrections 997 Panel 1001 Tempo Editor Toolbar 991 Tempo Event Editor 993 Compress Left 993 Compress Right 993 Move Vertically 993 Scale Around Absolute Center 993 Scale Around Relative Center 993 Scale Vertically 993 Stretch 993 Tilt Left 993 Tilt Right 993 Tempo Events Editing 998 Tempo matching Audio Alignment 210 Tempo modes Fixed Tempo 989 Tempo track 989 Tempo t
Index Track Presets (continued) creating 196 Creating 193 Extracting Sounds 195 Instrument 194 Loading 197 Loading in MediaBay 655 Loading Inserts and EQ 197 MIDI 193 Multi-Track 195 Pattern Banks 196 Previewing in MediaBay 643 Saving Track Quick Control Assignment Presets 197 Track Quick Controls 197 VST Presets 194 Track Quick Controls 742, 763 Assigning effect parameters 744 Assigning instrument parameters 745 Assigning parameters 743 Automatable Parameters 746 Connecting with Remote Controllers 747 Ins
Index Tuplets Quantizing 302 Type of New Tempo Points 991 U Undoing Edit History 88 Maximum undo steps 89 Maximum Undo Steps 1131 MixConsole parameter changes 354, 361 Offline processing 482, 616 Project window 45 Recording audio 274 Zoom operations 518 Unlock Layout when editing single parts 1139 Use Drum Editor when Drum Map is assigned 1128 Use Up/Down Navigation Commands for Selecting Tracks only 1123 Use Video Follows Edit Mode Video 1064 User-definable Frame Rate 1141 V Value Box/Time Control Mode
Index Volume databases (continued) Removing from the MediaBay 660 Unmounting in the MediaBay 660 VST Input ports 21 Output ports 21 VST 2 443 VST 3 443 VST 3 Suspend plug-in processing 728 VST AmbiConverter 695 VST AmbiDecoder 687 VST Audio System 16 VST effect selector 452 VST instrument selector 722 VST instruments Extracting expression maps 880 Freezing 728 Presets 726 Saving presets 726 Setting up 719 VST MultiPanner 667, 676 Ambisonics mode 685 Automation 671 Constant power 667 Disable channels 678 Di
Index Zoom Adapt Grid to Zoom 81 Audio Contents 82 Cycle Markers 84 Project window 81 Track Control 116 Zoom history Project window 84 Zoom presets Project window 83 Zoom Tool Standard Mode - Horizontal Zooming Only 1127 Zoom while Locating in Time Scale 1141 Zooming To cycle markers 339 Zooming horizontally 518 Zooming tracks 176 Zooming vertically 518 1172 Cubase Pro 10.5.
